Maybach - 62 - Owners Manual - 2005 - 2005

MAYBACH Order No. 6515 4416 13 Part No. 240 584 62 81 USA Edition A 2005 OPERATOR’S MANUAL OPERATOR’S MANUAL Grafik in der Größe 216x79 mm in den Grafikrahmen importieren! MAYBACH Order No. 6515 4416 13 Part No. 240 584 62 81 USA Edition A 2005 OPERATOR’S MANUAL OPERATOR’S MANUAL Grafik in der Größe 216x79 mm in den Grafikrahmen importieren! Maybach 57 Maybach 62 Our company congratulates you on the purchase of your new Maybach. Your selection of our product is a demonstration of your trust in Maybach Manufaktur. Furthermore, it exemplifies your desire to own an automobile that will be as easy as possible to operate and provide years of service. Your Maybach represents the efforts of many skilled engineers and craftsmen. To help assure your driving pleasure and also the safety of you and your passengers, we ask you to make a small investment of your time:
Please read this manual carefully, then return it to your vehicle where it will be handy for your reference.
Please follow the recommendations contained in this manual. They are designed to acquaint you with the operation of your Maybach.
Please pay attention to the warnings and cautions contained in this manual. They are designed to help improve the safety of the vehicle operator and occupants.
Should you have any questions, please contact your Maybach Studio MRM (Maybach Relationship Manager) or call us at 1-866-FOR-MAYBach (in the USA) or 1-888-881-6611 (in Canada). We extend our best wishes for many miles of safe, pleasurable driving. Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC A DaimlerChrysler Company Contents Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Product information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Operator’s Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Service and warranty information 10 Important notice for California retail buyers and lessees of Maybach automobiles . . . . . . . . . 11 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Roadside Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Change of address or ownership . 12 Operating your vehicle outside the USA or Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Where to find it . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Operating safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Proper use of the vehicle . . . . . . . 16 Problems with your vehicle . . . . . . . . 17 Reporting safety defects . . . . . . . . . . 18 Reporting safety defects . . . . . . . 18 Vehicle data recording . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Information regarding electronic recording devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 At a glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multifunction steering wheel . . . . . . . Front center console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Upper part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lower part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overhead control panel . . . . . . . . . . . Driver’s door control panel . . . . . . . . . Rear passenger compartment . . . . . . . Maybach 57 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maybach 62 without partition* . . Maybach 62 with partition* . . . . . Rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maybach 57 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maybach 62 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 22 24 26 27 27 28 30 31 32 32 34 36 38 38 40 Rear 3-place seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maybach 57 with rear center seat* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maybach 62 with rear center seat* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear center console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maybach 57 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maybach 62 with power tilt/sliding sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maybach 62 with electrotransparent roof*. . . . . . . . Rear door control panel . . . . . . . . . . . Maybach 57 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maybach 62 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 42 44 46 46 47 48 49 49 50 3 Contents Getting started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unlocking with the SmartKey . . . Unlocking with KEYLESS-GO** . . Starter switch positions. . . . . . . . . Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fastening the seat belts . . . . . . . . Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switching on headlamps. . . . . . . . Turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Windshield wipers. . . . . . . . . . . . . Problems while driving . . . . . . . . . Parking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switching off headlamps . . . . . . . Turning off the engine . . . . . . . . . Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 51 52 52 53 54 57 57 60 61 63 63 65 68 68 70 71 71 73 74 74 75 75 76 Safety and Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Occupant safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Seat belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Children in the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 87 Override switch for rear passenger compartment . . . . . . . . 94 Panic alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Activating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Deactivating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Driving safety systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 BAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 ESP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 The SBC brake system. . . . . . . . . . 101 Anti-theft systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Anti-theft alarm system . . . . . . . . 104 Tow-away alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Controls in detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Locking and unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . SmartKey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** . . Opening the doors from the inside. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Closing the rear doors automatically from the inside (Maybach 62) . . . . . . . Opening the trunk. . . . . . . . . . . . Closing the trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trunk lid emergency release . . . . Power closing assist for doors and trunk lid . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic central locking . . . . . . Locking and unlocking from the inside. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 108 108 111 117 117 118 119 123 124 124 125 Contents Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Easy-entry/exit feature . . . . . . . . Rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting front passenger seat position from rear. . . . . . . . . . . . Multicontour seats . . . . . . . . . . . Seat heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seat ventilation*. . . . . . . . . . . . . Memory function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storing positions in memory . . . Recalling positions from memory Storing exterior rear view mirror parking position . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lighting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exterior lamp switch . . . . . . . . . . Combination switch . . . . . . . . . . Hazard warning flasher . . . . . . . Interior lighting in the front . . . Interior lighting in the rear . . . . 127 127 129 135 136 138 139 140 141 141 142 143 143 147 147 148 150 Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instrument cluster illumination. . Coolant temperature gauge . . . . Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tachometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outside temperature indicator . . Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multifunction display. . . . . . . . . . Multifunction steering wheel . . . Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standard display menu . . . . . . . . Audio menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Telephone menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . Navigation menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . Distronic** menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trip computer menu . . . . . . . . . . Vehicle status message memory menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 153 154 154 155 155 156 156 157 157 158 160 162 163 165 168 168 169 Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . . One-touch gearshifting. . . . . . . . Gear ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gear selector lever position . . . . Automatic shift program . . . . . . Driving tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emergency operation (Limp Home Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . Good visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Headlamp cleaning system . . . . . Rear view mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear window defroster . . . . . . . . Automatic climate control . . . . . . . . Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear passenger compartment. . . Solar panel* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 192 192 197 198 199 200 210 217 171 172 5 Contents Power windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opening and closing the windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Synchronizing power windows . Summer opening feature . . . . . . Convenience closing feature . . . Power tilt/sliding sunroof. . . . . . . . . Opening and closing the power tilt/sliding sunroof (Maybach 57) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Synchronizing the power tilt/sliding sunroof (Maybach 57) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opening and closing the power tilt/sliding sunroof (Maybach 62) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Synchronizing the power tilt/sliding sunroof (Maybach 62) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electrotransparent roof* . . . . . . . . . Operating the electrotransparent roof . . . . . . . 6 218 218 220 220 221 222 222 224 225 229 230 230 Driving systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Distronic** . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Airmatic DC (Dual Control) . . . . . 247 Parktronic (Parking assist) . . . . . . 251 Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 Cargo tie-down hooks . . . . . . . . . 256 Loading instructions . . . . . . . . . . . 256 Useful features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 Vanity mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 Storage compartments. . . . . . . . . 258 Umbrella . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Ashtrays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Cigarette lighters . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Non-smokers package* . . . . . . . . 274 Folding table* (standard on Maybach 62; optional on Maybach 57) . . . . . . . 275 Refrigerator** in rear center console. . . . . . . . . . 277 12-V socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 Battery charge maintenance socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 Rear window curtain . . . . . . . . . . Rear side window curtains* . . . . Partition* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Two-way intercom* (Maybach 62: standard with partition*) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External communication (special order equipment) . . . . . . Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tele Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Garage door opener . . . . . . . . . . Infrared reflecting windshield . . Heated steering wheel . . . . . . . . Pocket PC remote control* . . . . . . . . Pocket PC holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pocket PC 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pocket PC 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operation via main menu function buttons and navigation button . . . . . . . . . . . . Operation via touch-screen . . . . . Pocket PC troubleshooting . . . . . 280 281 284 287 288 289 294 304 308 308 309 310 312 315 317 318 320 339 Contents Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The first 1000 miles (1500 km) . . . . . Driving instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drive sensibly – save fuel . . . . . . Drinking and driving . . . . . . . . . Pedals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Driving off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hydroplaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tire traction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tire speed rating. . . . . . . . . . . . . Winter driving instructions . . . . Standing water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Passenger compartment. . . . . . . Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control and operation of radio transmitters . . . . . . . . . . . . Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . Emission control . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coolant temperature . . . . . . . . . 341 342 343 343 343 343 343 344 345 345 346 346 347 347 348 349 349 349 349 350 350 351 At the gas station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Refueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Check regularly and before a long trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission fluid level . . . . . . . . Coolant level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Windshield washer and headlamp cleaning system . . . . . Tires and wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Important guidelines . . . . . . . . . . Life of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direction of rotation . . . . . . . . . . Checking tire pressure . . . . . . . . . Rotating tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Winter driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tire speed rating for winter tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Winter tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 352 354 355 355 356 359 360 361 362 363 363 364 364 364 370 371 371 372 372 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clearing the maintenance service indicator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance service term exceeded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calling up the maintenance service indicator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Resetting the maintenance service indicator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vehicle care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleaning and care of vehicle. . . . Practical hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . What to do if … . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lamps in instrument cluster . . . . Lamp in center console . . . . . . . . Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display . . . . Where will I find ...? . . . . . . . . . . . . . First aid kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vehicle jack, vehicle tool kit, luggage bowl, spare wheel. . . . . 373 373 373 374 374 375 375 383 384 384 390 391 422 422 422 7 Contents Unlocking/locking in an emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unlocking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . Locking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . Opening/closing in an emergency . . Power tilt/sliding sunroof (Maybach 57) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power tilt/sliding sunroof (Maybach 62) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pocket PC*. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing the memory card. . . . . Resetting the Pocket PC . . . . . . . Replacing SmartKey batteries . . . . . Replacing bulbs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing bulbs for front lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . License plate lamp . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . Removing wiper blades . . . . . . . Installing wiper blades . . . . . . . . Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . Mounting the spare wheel . . . . . 423 423 424 425 425 426 427 427 427 428 430 430 432 433 434 434 435 436 436 436 Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441 Disconnecting the batteries . . . . . 443 Charging and reinstalling the batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443 Reconnecting the batteries . . . . . 444 Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445 Towing the vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447 Installing towing eye bolt . . . . . . 449 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450 Aids for replacing fuses . . . . . . . . 451 Fuse boxes in engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451 Fuse box in passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452 Fuse box in the trunk . . . . . . . . . . 452 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453 Parts service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454 Warranty coverage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455 Loss of Service and Warranty Information Booklet. . . . . . . . . . . 455 Identification labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456 Layout of poly-V-belt drive . . . . . . . . 457 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458 Rims and tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Same size tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electrical system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. . . . . . Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine oils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine oil additives . . . . . . . . . . . Air conditioning refrigerant . . . . Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Premium unleaded gasoline . . . . Fuel requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . Gasoline additives . . . . . . . . . . . . Coolants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Windshield and headlamp washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Consumer information . . . . . . . . . . . Uniform tire quality grading. . . . 459 460 460 461 462 463 464 464 465 465 465 466 466 466 467 467 469 470 470 Technical terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471 Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477 8 Introduction Product information  Product information Please observe the following in your own best interest: We recommend using genuine parts as well as conversion parts and accessories explicitly approved for use on Maybach vehicles and your model. We have tested these parts to determine their reliability, safety and special suitability for Maybach vehicles. We are unable to make an assessment for other products and therefore cannot be held responsible for them, even if in individual cases an official approval or authorization by governmental or other agencies should exist. Use of such parts and accessories could adversely affect the safety, performance or reliability of your vehicle. Please do not use them. Genuine parts as well as conversion parts and accessories approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles are available at your authorized Maybach Studio where you will receive comprehensive information, also on permissible technical modifications, and where proper installation will be performed. 9 Introduction Operator’s Manual This Operator’s Manual contains a great deal of useful information. We urge you to read it carefully and familiarize yourself with the vehicle before driving. For your own safety and longer service life of the vehicle, we urge you to follow the instructions and warnings contained in this manual. Ignoring them could result in damage to the vehicle or personal injury to you or others. Vehicle damage caused by failure to follow instructions is not covered by the Maybach Limited Warranty. Your vehicle may have some or all of the equipment described in this manual. Therefore, you may find explanations for optional equipment not installed in your vehicle. If you have any questions about the operation of any equipment, your authorized Maybach Studio will be glad to demonstrate the proper procedures. 10 We continuously strive to improve our product, and ask for your understanding that we reserve the right to make changes in design and equipment. Therefore, information, illustrations and descriptions in this Operator’s Manual might differ from your vehicle. Service and warranty information The Service and Warranty Information Booklet contains detailed information about the warranties covering your Maybach, including:
New Car Limited Warranty Optional equipment is also described in this manual, including operating instructions wherever necessary. Since they are special-order items, the descriptions and illustrations herein may vary slightly from the actual equipment of your vehicle.
Emission System Warranty
California, Maine, Massachusetts, and Vermont Emission Control System Warranty (California, Maine, Massachusetts, and Vermont only)
State Warranty Enforcement Laws (Lemon Laws) If there are any equipment details that are not shown or described in this Operator’s Manual, your authorized Maybach Studio will be glad to inform you of correct care and operating procedures. The Operator’s Manual and Maintenance Booklet are important documents and should be kept with the vehicle. Introduction Operator’s Manual Important notice for California retail buyers and lessees of Maybach automobiles Under California law you may be entitled to a replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the purchase price or lease price, if Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its authorized repair or service facilities fail to fix one or more substantial defects or malfunctions in the vehicle that are covered by its express warranty after a reasonable number of repair attempts. During the period of 18 months from original delivery of the vehicle or the accumulation of 18000 miles (approximately 29000 km) on the odometer of the vehicle, whichever occurs first, a reasonable number of repair attempts is presumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one or more of the following occurs: (1) the same substantial defect or malfunction results in a condition that is likely to cause death or serious bodily injury if the vehicle is driven, that defect or malfunction has been subject to repair two or more times, and you have directly notified Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC in writing of the need for its repair, (2) the same substantial defect or malfunction of a less serious nature than category (1) has been subject to repair four or more times and you have directly notified us in writing of the need for its repair, or (3) the vehicle is out of service by reason of repair of the same or different substantial defects or malfunctions for a cumulative total of more than 30 calender days. Written notification should be sent to us, not a Maybach Studio, at Maybach Assistance Center, Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC, Three Paragon Drive, Montvale, NJ 07645. 11 Introduction Operator’s Manual Maintenance The Maintenance Booklet describes all the necessary maintenance work which should be performed at regular intervals. Always have the Maintenance Booklet with you when you take the vehicle to your authorized Maybach Studio for service. The service advisor will record each service in the booklet for you. Roadside Assistance The Maybach Roadside Assistance Program provides factory trained technical help in the event of a breakdown. Calls to the toll-free Roadside Assistance number 1-866-FOR-MAYBach (in the USA) 1-888-881-6611 (in Canada) will be answered by Maybach Assistance Representatives 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. For additional information refer to the Maybach Roadside Assistance Program brochure in your glove box. 12 Change of address or ownership If you change your address, be sure to send in the "Change of Address Notice" found in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet, or simply call the Maybach Assistance Center at 1-866-FOR-MAYBach (in the USA) or 1-888-881-6611 (in Canada). It is in your own interest that we can contact you should the need arise. If you sell your Maybach, please leave all literature with the vehicle to make it available to the next operator. If you bought this vehicle used, be sure to send in the "Notice of Purchase of Used Car" found in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet, or call the Maybach Assistance Center at 1-866-FOR-MAYBach (in the USA) or 1-888-881-6611 (in Canada). Introduction Operator’s Manual Operating your vehicle outside the USA or Canada If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreign countries, please be aware that: Certain Maybach models are available for delivery in Europe under our European Delivery Program. For details, consult an authorized Maybach Studio or write to:
Service facilities or replacement parts may not be readily available.
Unleaded gasoline for vehicles with catalytic converters may not be available; the use of leaded fuels will damage the catalysts. Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC European Delivery Department One Mercedes Drive Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
Gasoline may have a considerably lower octane rating, and improper fuel can cause engine damage. In Canada: In the USA: Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. European Delivery Department 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9 13 Introduction Where to find it This Operator’s Manual is designed to provide comprehensive support information for you, the vehicle operator. Each section has its own reference color so you can find information quickly. At a glance Here you will find an overview of all the controls that can be operated in the vehicle’s interior. Getting started Controls in detail Technical data Here you will find detailed information about the equipment installed in your vehicle. This section expands on the "Getting started" section and also describes technical innovations. All important technical data for your Maybach can be found in this section. Operation Here you will find all the information you need for the proper operation of your Maybach. Indexes The glossary provides explanations of the most important technical terms. The table of contents and the index are designed to help you find information quickly and easily. The following publications are part of your vehicle documentation: Here you will find all the information you need for your first drive. Practical hints
this Operator’s Manual
the Maintenance Booklet Safety and Security This section provides fast assistance for dealing with problems you may encounter. Here you will find descriptions of the safety and security features of your Maybach. 14 Separate operating instructions will be provided as required depending on the equipment options installed in your vehicle. Introduction Symbols  Symbols The following symbols are found in this Operator’s Manual: * Optional equipment is identified with an asterisk. Since standard equipment varies between models, the descriptions and illustrations in this manual may differ slightly from the actual equipment of your Maybach. ** Two asterisks designates standard equipment which the purchaser of the vehicle had the option to delete at the time the vehicle was ordered. Warning! !  This symbol points to instructions for Highlights hazards that may result in damage to your vehicle.  A number of these symbols appear- you to follow. ing in succession indicates a multiplestep procedure. i Helpful hints or further information you may find useful.  page This symbol tells you where to look for further information on a topic.  This continuation symbol marks an interrupted procedure which will be continued on the next page. -> In the glossary of technical terms, this symbol is used to indicate cross-references to term definitions. DISPLAY Words appearing in the multifunction display are printed in the type shown here. G Warning notices draw your attention to hazards that may endanger your health or life, or the health or life of others. 15 Introduction Operating safety Warning! G Work improperly carried out on electronic components and associated software could cause them to cease functioning. Because the vehicle’s electronic components are interconnected, any modifications made may produce an undesired effect on other systems. Electronic malfunctions could seriously impair the operating safety of your vehicle. See an authorized Maybach Studio for repairs or modifications to electronic components. Other improper work or modifications on the vehicle could also have a negative impact on the operating safety of the vehicle. Some safety systems only function while the engine is running. You should therefore never turn off the engine while driving. 16 Warning! G Heavy blows against the vehicle underbody or tires/wheels, for example when running over an obstacle, road debris or a pothole, may cause serious damage and impair the operating safety of your vehicle. If you feel a sudden significant vibration or ride disturbance, or you suspect that damage to your vehicle has occurred, you should turn on your hazard warning flashers, carefully slow down, and drive with caution to an area which is a safe distance from the road. Inspect the vehicle underbody and tires/ wheels for possible damage. If the vehicle appears unsafe, have it towed to the nearest authorized Maybach Studio or other qualified maintenance or repair facility for further inspection or repairs. Proper use of the vehicle Proper use of the vehicle requires that you are familiar with the following information and rules:
the safety precautions in this manual
the "Technical data" section in this manual
traffic rules and regulations
motor vehicle laws and safety standards Warning! G Various warning labels are attached to your vehicle. These warning labels are intended to make you and others aware of various risks. You should not remove any of these warning labels unless explicitly instructed to do so by information on the label itself. Removal of any of these labels may cause you and others to be unaware of certain risks which may result in an accident and/or personal injury. Introduction Problems with your vehicle  Problems with your vehicle If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation, we urge you to immediately contact your Maybach Relationship Manager at an authorized Maybach Studio to have the problem diagnosed and corrected if required. If the matter is not handled to your satisfaction, please discuss the problem with the Maybach Studio management, or if necessary contact us at one of the following addresses: In the USA: Maybach Assistance Center Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Three Paragon Drive Montvale, NJ 07645 In Canada: Customer Relations Department Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9 17 Introduction Reporting safety defects For the USA only: The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the "National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966". Reporting safety defects If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your Maybach Studio, the Maybach Assistance Center, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (or 366-0123 in Washington, D.C. area) or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the Hotline. 18 Introduction Vehicle data recording  Vehicle data recording Information regarding electronic recording devices (Including notice pursuant to California Code § 9951) Please note that your vehicle is equipped with devices that can record vehicle systems data and, if equipped with the Tele Aid system, may transmit some data in certain accidents. This information helps, for example, to diagnose vehicle systems after a collision and to continuously improve vehicle safety. DaimlerChrysler may access the information and share it with others
for safety research or vehicle diagnosis purposes
with the consent of the vehicle owner or lessee
in response to an official request by law enforcement or other government agency
for use in dispute resolution involving DaimlerChrysler, its affiliates or sales/service organization and/or
as otherwise required or permitted by law. Please check the Tele Aid subscription service agreement for details regarding the information that may be recorded or transmitted via that system. 19 20 At a glance Cockpit Instrument cluster Multifunction steering wheel Front center console Overhead control panel Driver’s door control panel Rear passenger compartment Rear seats Rear 3-place seat Rear center console Rear door control panel 21 At a glance Cockpit 22 At a glance Cockpit Item 1 Exterior lamp switch 2 Headlamp washer button Page 70, 143 192
High beam 70
Turn signals 71
Windshield wipers 71 4 Cruise control lever
Cruise control 233 Distronic** 236 5 Multifunction steering wheel 60, 158 6 Horn 7 Instrument cluster 24, 153 Page 8 Lever for voice control system, see separate operating instructions 9 Starter switch 3 Combination switch
Item 54 Item Page e Glove box lid release 259 f Glove box lock 259 g Front center console 27 60 a Front Parktronic warning indicator 254 h Steering wheel adjustment stalk b Air vent grille with storage box 258 j Heated steering wheel switch 308 k Remote trunk lid switch 119 c Overhead control panel 30 d Compartment for front telephone 260 290 The Roadside Assistance button • and the Information button ¡ are located in the compartment for front telephone. 298 l Parking brake pedal m Hood lock release 74 355 n Parking brake release 74 o Door control panel 31 23 At a glance Instrument cluster 24 At a glance Instrument cluster Item Page Item 1 Coolant temperature gauge 154 9 - 2 Fuel gauge with fuel reserve warning lamp 389 3 L Left turn signal indicator lamp Item Antilock Brake System (ABS) indicator lamp 385 k H High beam headlamp indicator lamp 147 l Knob for instrument cluster illumination 153 a A m ? Reset button Seat belt telltale Engine malfunction indicator lamp, USA only 389 b J ± Engine malfunction indicator lamp, Canada only 389 n ; Brake warning lamp, USA only 388 3 Brake warning lamp, Canada only 388 o 1 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) indicator lamp 387 71 4 Speedometer 156 c < 5 v Antilock Brake System (ABS)/Electronic Stability Program (ESP) warning lamp 384 d Digital clock (see COMAND and RearCabin Audiovisual System operating instructions) 6 l Distance warning lamp1 385 7 K Right turn signal indicator lamp 8 Tachometer 1 Page 71 154 386 e Gear selector lever position and program mode 185 f Main odometer 157 g Trip odometer 157 h Multifunction display 157 j Outside temperature indicator 155 Page Tire pressure warning lamp 389 Vehicles without Distronic**: Warning lamp without function. It illuminates when the ignition is on. It should go out when the engine is running. 25 At a glance Multifunction steering wheel Item Page 1 Multifunction display Operating control system 2 Selecting the submenu or setting the volume: Press button æ up/to increase ç down/to decrease 3 Telephone: Press button 26 s to take a call to dial a call t to end a call to reject an incoming call 157 158 Item Page 4 Menu systems: Press button è for next menu ÿ for previous menu 5 Moving within a menu: Press button j for next display k for previous display At a glance Front center console  Front center console Upper part Item Page Item 1 Hazard warning flasher on/ off switch 147 7 Automatic climate control 2 Anti-theft alarm system indicator lamp 105 8 Chrome label for opening cover of: 3 Central locking switch 125 4 Central unlocking switch 125 5 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp 6 COMAND (see separate COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions) 89 Page 199
Cup holders 269
Switch for opening/closing rear window curtain 280
Switch for opening/closing rear side window curtains* 281 27 At a glance Front center console Lower part Maybach 57 and Maybach 62 without partition* Item Page 1 KEYLESS-GO** start/stop button 55, 66 2 Gear selector lever for automatic transmission 66 3 Button for retracting/extending rear seat head restraints 133 4 Parking assist (Parktronic system) deactivation button 255 5 Two-way intercom* on/off button 287 Item Page 6 Chrome label for opening cover of:
Ashtray 272
Lighter 273
Storage compartment* 274 7 Thumbwheel for setting distance in Distronic** 243 8 Distance warning function** on/off button 243 9 Level control button 249 a Airmatic DC button 248 b Electronic Stability Program (ESP) control switch 100 c Program mode selector switch for automatic transmission 189 i Depending on equipment, the arrangement of switches and buttons may vary. 28 At a glance Front center console Maybach 62 with partition* Item Page 1 KEYLESS-GO** start/stop button 55, 66 2 Gear selector lever for automatic transmission 66 3 Button for retracting/extending rear seat head restraints 133 4 Parking assist (Parktronic system) deactivation button 255 5 Two-way intercom on/off button 287 6 Switch for opening/closing partition* curtain 7 Partition* opening/closing switch Item Page 7 Chrome label for opening cover of:
Ashtray 272
Lighter 273
Storage compartment* 274 9 Thumbwheel for setting distance in Distronic** 243 a Distance warning function** on/off button 243 b Level control button 249 c Airmatic DC button 248 285 d Electronic Stability Program (ESP) control switch 100 284 e Program mode selector switch for automatic transmission 189 i Depending on equipment, the arrangement of switches and buttons may vary. 29 At a glance Overhead control panel Item 30 Page 1 Left reading lamp on/off 148 2 Rear interior lighting on/off 148 3 Interior lighting control 148 4 Right reading lamp on/off 148 5 Front interior lighting on/ off 148 6 Tow-away alarm button 106 7 Rear view mirror 61, 192 8 Garage door opener 304 Item Page 9 Automatic antiglare function on/off 192 a Tele Aid (emergency call system) button 294 b Switch for opening/closing power tilt/sliding sunroof (Maybach 57) 222 Switch for opening/closing power tilt/sliding sunroof (Maybach 62) 225 Switch for operating electrotransparent roof* screen 230 At a glance Driver’s door control panel  Driver’s door control panel Item Page 1 Door handle 117 2 Memory function (for storing seat, mirror and steering wheel settings) 142 3 Seat adjustment Item 7 Override switch for rear passenger compartment Page 94 8 Switches for opening/closing rear door windows 218 195 9 Button for opening storage compartment 261 4 Button for folding exterior mirrors in and out 261 5 Exterior mirror adjustment 61 a Handle for opening storage compartment 6 Switches for opening/closing front door windows 218 b Seat ventilation* 139 c Seat heating 138 57 31 At a glance Rear passenger compartment Maybach 57 32 At a glance Rear passenger compartment Item Page Item Page Item Page 1 Vanity mirror, left 257 7 Automatic climate control panel 214 156 4 Outside temperature gauge 155 2 Speedometer 3 Clock (see COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions) 156 5 Vanity mirror, right 257 8 Button for opening storage compartment/drawer 263 6 Video monitor, right (see COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions) 9 Video monitor, left (see COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions) 33 At a glance Rear passenger compartment Maybach 62 without partition* 34 At a glance Rear passenger compartment Item Page Item 1 Vanity mirror, left 257 5 Vanity mirror, right 2 Speedometer 156 3 Clock (see COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions) 156 6 Video monitor, right (see COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions) 4 Outside temperature gauge 155 7 Button for opening upper storage compartment Page 257 264 Item Page 8 Automatic climate control panel 214 9 Button for opening storage compartment/drawer 263 a Video monitor, left (see COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions) 35 At a glance Rear passenger compartment Maybach 62 with partition* 36 At a glance Rear passenger compartment Item Page Item Page 1 Vanity mirror, left 257 5 Vanity mirror, right 2 Speedometer 156 3 Clock (see COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions) 156 6 Video monitor, right (see COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions) 4 Outside temperature gauge 155 7 Button for opening upper storage compartment 264 8 Storage pocket, right 265 257 Item Page 9 Automatic climate control panel 214 a Button for opening storage compartment/drawer 263 b Storage pocket, left 265 c Video monitor, left (see COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions) 37 At a glance Rear seats Maybach 57 38 At a glance Rear seats v Item Page 1 Rear Parktronic warning indicator 253 2 Button for opening upper storage compartment with insert for two champagne flutes 266 3 Chrome label for opening DVD player, AUX sockets and headphone jacks (see COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions) 266 4 Chrome label for opening CD changer compartment (see COMAND and RearCabin Audiovisual System operating instructions) 266 Item 5 Chrome label for opening middle storage compartment 6 Door control panel, left Page 266 49 7 Handle for opening left door storage compartment for headphones 261 8 Handle for opening left door storage compartment 261 9 Center armrest with Item a Rear center console Page 46 b Rear-cabin beverage holder 269 c 12-V socket 278 d Adjustment switch for left multicontour seat 136 e Folding table* 275 f Folding table* 275 g Adjustment switch for right multicontour seat 136
Storage compartment for telephone 291 h Handle for opening right door storage compartment 261
Storage compartment underneath 266 261
Refrigerator** underneath 277 j Handle for opening right door storage compartment for headphones k Door control panel, right 49 39 At a glance Rear seats Maybach 62 40 At a glance Rear seats Item Page Item Page 1 Rear Parktronic warning indicator 253 6 Door control panel, left 261 2 Button for opening upper storage compartment with insert for two champagne flutes 266 7 Handle for opening left door storage compartment for headphones 8 Handle for opening left door storage compartment 261 3 Chrome label for opening DVD player, AUX sockets and headphone jacks (see COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions) 266 4 Chrome label for opening CD changer compartment (see COMAND and RearCabin Audiovisual System operating instructions) 266 5 Chrome label for opening middle storage compartment 266 49 Item d Rear center console Page 46 e Rear-cabin beverage holder 269 f 12-V socket 278 g Folding table 275 h Folding table 275 136 9 Button for opening storage compartment 262 j Adjustment switch for right multicontour seat a Storage compartment 262 261 b Adjustment switch for left multicontour seat 136 k Handle for opening right door storage compartment for headphones c Center armrest with 291 l Handle for opening right door storage compartment 261 m Button for opening storage compartment 262 n Storage compartment 262
Storage compartment for telephone
Storage compartment underneath 266
Refrigerator** underneath 277 o Door control panel, right 49 41 At a glance Rear 3-place seat Maybach 57 with rear center seat* 42 At a glance Rear 3-place seat v Item 1 Rear Parktronic warning indicator Page Item Page 253 3 Door control panel, left 261 DVD player compartment, CD changer compartment, AUX sockets and headphone jacks located behind backrest (see COMAND and RearCabin Audiovisual System operating instructions) 267 4 Handle for opening left door storage compartment for headphones 5 Handle for opening left door storage compartment for ashtray
Storage compartment between the rear outer seats located behind backrest 267
Center armrest with storage compartment for telephone (backrest folded down) 291 2 Rear center backrest
Item Page 9 Switch for rear center seat head restraints 134 a Cup holder 270 b Adjustment switch for right multicontour seat 136 261 261 6 Cup holder 270 c Handle for opening right door storage compartment for ashtray 7 Adjustment switch for left multicontour seat 136 261 8 12-V socket 278 d Handle for opening right door storage compartment for headphones 49 e Door control panel, right 49 43 At a glance Rear 3-place seat Maybach 62 with rear center seat* 44 At a glance Rear 3-place seat Item 1 Rear Parktronic warning indicator Page

Page 253 3 Door control panel, left 261 DVD player compartment, CD changer compartment, AUX sockets and headphone jacks located behind backrest (see COMAND and RearCabin Audiovisual System operating instructions) 267 4 Handle for opening left door storage compartment for headphones 5 Handle for opening left door storage compartment for ashtray Storage compartment between the rear outer seats located behind backrest 267 Center armrest with storage compartment for telephone (backrest folded down) 291 2 Rear center backrest
Item Item Page b Switch for rear center seat head restraints 134 c Cup holder 270 d Adjustment switch for right multicontour seat 136 261 261 6 Adjustment switch for left multicontour seat 136 e Handle for opening right door storage compartment for headphones 262 f Handle for opening right door storage compartment for ashtray 261 7 Button for opening storage compartment 8 Storage compartment 262 262 9 Cup holder 270 g Button for opening storage compartment a 12-V socket 278 h Storage compartment 262 49 j Door control panel, right 49 45 At a glance Rear center console Maybach 57 Item Page Item Page 1 Left reading lamp on/off 150 294 8 Switch for opening/closing rear right-side window curtain* 281 2 Tele Aid (emergency call system) button 3 Right reading lamp on/off 150 280 4 Ambient lighting on/off 150 9 Switch for opening/closing rear window curtain 281 Rear interior lamps on/off 150 5 Thumbwheel for dimming ambient lighting 150 a Switch for opening/closing rear left-side window curtain* 287 b Two-way intercom* on/off button 287 6 Two-way intercom* volume thumbwheel c Rear interior lamps on/off 150 7 Cover of compartment with: Switch for opening/closing rear window curtain 280
Ashtray 272 d Central unlocking switch 125
Lighter 274 e Central locking switch 125
Storage compartment* 274 i Depending on equipment, the arrangement of switches and buttons may vary. 46 At a glance Rear center console Maybach 62 with power tilt/sliding sunroof Item Page 1 Left reading lamp on/off 151 2 Tele Aid (emergency call system) button 294 3 Right reading lamp on/off 151 4 Ambient lighting on/off 151 5 Headliner lamps and pillar uplights on/off Depending on equipment, the arrangement of switches and buttons may vary. Page a Switch for raising/lowering power tilt/sliding sunroof 227 b Switch for opening/closing rear right-side window curtain* 281 151 c Switch for opening/closing rear window curtain 280 6 Thumbwheel for dimming ambient lighting and headliner lamps and pillar uplights 151 d Switch for opening/closing rear left-side window curtain* 281 284 7 Two-way intercom* volume thumbwheel 287 e Switch for opening/closing partition* f Switch for opening/closing partition* curtain 284 g Two-way intercom* on/off button 287 h Rear interior lamps on/off 151 j Central unlocking switch 125 k Central locking switch 125 8 Cover of compartment with: i Item
Ashtray 272
Lighter 274
Storage compartment* 274 9 Switch for opening/closing power tilt/sliding sunroof 227 47 At a glance Rear center console Maybach 62 with electrotransparent roof* Item Page 1 Left reading lamp on/off 151 2 Tele Aid (emergency call system) button 294 3 Right reading lamp on/off 151 4 Ambient lighting on/off 151 5 Roof lighting on/off 151 6 Thumbwheel for dimming ambient lighting or roof lighting 7 Two-way intercom* volume thumbwheel Depending on equipment, the arrangement of switches and buttons may vary. 48 Page a Switch for making electrotransparent roof* opaque/transparent 232 b Switch for opening/closing rear right-side window curtain* 281 c Switch for opening/closing rear window curtain 280 151 281 287 d Switch for opening/closing rear left-side window curtain* e Switch for opening/closing partition* 284 f Switch for opening/closing partition* curtain 284 g Two-way intercom* on/off button 287 h Rear interior lamps on/off 151 j Central unlocking switch 125 k Central locking switch 125 8 Cover of compartment with: i Item
Ashtray 272
Lighter 274
Storage compartment* 274 9 Switch for opening/closing electrotransparent roof* screen 232 At a glance Rear door control panel  Rear door control panel Maybach 57 Item 1 Page 1 Adjustment switch for right front passenger seat1 135 2 Adjustment switch for right rear seat1 135 3 Memory button for storing rear seat positions 142 4 Door handle 117 5 Seat ventilation* 139 6 Seat heating 138 7 Seat adjustment 130 8 Switches for opening/closing rear door window 218 These switches are located on the right rear passenger side only. 49 At a glance Rear door control panel Maybach 62 Item 1 50 Page 1 Adjustment switch for right front passenger seat1 135 2 Adjustment switch for right rear seat1 135 3 Memory button for storing rear seat positions 142 4 Door handle 117 5 Switch for moving seat to fully reclined position 132 6 Seat ventilation* 139 7 Seat heating 138 8 Switch for moving seat to to upright position 132 9 Seat adjustment 132 a Switches for opening/closing rear door window 218 These switches are located on the right rear passenger side only. Getting started Unlocking Adjusting Driving Parking and locking 51 Getting started Unlocking The "Getting started" section provides an overview of the vehicle's most basic functions.  Press unlock button Œ on the Unlocking with the SmartKey SmartKey. All turn signal lamps flash once. The vehicle unlocks. The locking knobs in the doors move up. The anti-theft alarm system is disarmed. If you are already familiar with the basic functions described here, the "Controls in detail" section will provide you with further information. The corresponding page references are located at the end of each segment. i The SBC brake system is activated ( page 101).  Get in the vehicle and insert the SmartKey in the starter switch. SmartKey with remote control 1 2 3 4  Panic button ( page 95) Š Unlock button for trunk lid Œ Unlock button ‹ Lock button Warning! G When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury. 52 For more information, see "SmartKey" ( page 108). Getting started Unlocking Unlocking with KEYLESS-GO** With KEYLESS-GO you can open and start your vehicle without using the buttons on the SmartKey. i To unlock the vehicle, the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be outside the vehicle, no further than approximately 3 feet (1 meter) away from the door. Warning! G When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury.  Grasp the outside door handle. All turn signal lamps flash once. The vehicle unlocks. The locking knobs in the doors move up. The anti-theft alarm system is disarmed. i The SBC brake system is activated ( page 101).  Get in the vehicle. For more information, see "SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO**" ( page 111). 53 Getting started Unlocking Starter switch positions Warning! G 0 For removing SmartKey i 1 Power supply to some electrical consumers, such as seat adjustment 2 Ignition (power supply for all electrical consumers) and driving position. All lamps in the instrument cluster come on. If a lamp in the instrument cluster fails to come on when the ignition is switched on, have it checked and replaced if necessary. If a lamp in the instrument cluster remains on after starting the engine or comes on while driving, refer to "Lamps in instrument cluster" ( page 384). The SmartKey can only be removed from the starter switch with the gear selector lever in position P. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury. SmartKey 3 Starting position i When you switch on the ignition, the indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster come on. This indicates that the respective systems are operational. They should go out when the engine is running. Starter switch 54 ! If the SmartKey can still not be turned, the battery may not be sufficiently charged.
Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary ( page 441).
Get a jump start ( page 445). To prevent accelerated battery discharge or a completely discharged battery, always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch. For information on starting the engine using the SmartKey, see "Starting with the SmartKey" ( page 66). Getting started Unlocking SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be located in the vehicle. Pressing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button on the gear selector lever corresponds to turning the SmartKey to the various starter switch positions.  Make sure the gear selector lever is set to P.  Do not depress the brake pedal. If you firmly depress the brake pedal during pressing KEYLESS-GO start/stop button, the engine starts automatically. Position 0 i The function of the SmartKey overrules the KEYLESS-GO function. KEYLESS-GO start/stop button Before you press the KEYLESS-GO start/ stop button, the vehicle's on-board electronics have status 0 (as with SmartKey removed). 1 USA only 2 Canada only 55 Getting started Unlocking Position 1 Ignition (or position 2) i  Press KEYLESS-GO start/stop  Press KEYLESS-GO start/stop If you now press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button once, the power supply is again switched off. button 1 once. button 1 twice. This supplies power to some electrical consumers, such as seat adjustment. All lamps in the instrument cluster come on. If a lamp in the instrument cluster fails to come on when the ignition is switched on, have it checked and replaced if necessary. If a lamp in the instrument cluster remains on after starting the engine or comes on while driving, refer to "Lamps in instrument cluster" ( page 384). i If you now press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button 56
once again, the ignition (position 2) is switched on
twice, the power supply is again switched off i When you switch on the ignition, the indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster come on. This indicates that the respective systems are operational. They should go out when the engine is running. For information on starting the engine using the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button, see "Starting with KEYLESS-GO**" ( page 66). Getting started Adjusting  Adjusting Warning! G All seat, head restraint, steering wheel, and rear view mirror adjustments, as well as fastening of seat belts, must be done before the vehicle is put into motion. Seats Warning! G Do not adjust the driver's seat while driving. Adjusting the seat while driving could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat back in an excessively reclined position as this can be dangerous. You could slide under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide under it, the belt would apply force at the abdomen or neck. That could cause serious or fatal injuries. The seat backrest and seat belts provide the best restraint when the wearer is in a nearly upright position and belts are properly positioned on the body. Only the reclining seat (in Maybach 62 rear cabin) can be used in a reclined position with seat belts properly fastened while the vehicle is in motion. The reclining seat in the Maybach 62 rear cabin includes a belt system and kinematic electronic controls that are designed to maintain proper support and restraint-system effectiveness in all seat settings in the event of a collision or similar situation. Your seat must be adjusted so that you can correctly fasten your seat belt ( page 63). Never place hands under the seat or near any moving parts while a seat is being adjusted. Warning! G When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Even with the SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** removed from the starter switch or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** removed from the vehicle, the power seats can be operated when the respective door is open. Therefore, do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury. 57 Getting started Adjusting Warning! G Children 12 years old and under must never ride in the front seat, except in a Maybach authorized BabySmartTM1 compatible child seat, which operates with the BabySmartTM system installed in the vehicle to deactivate the passenger front airbag when it is properly installed. Otherwise they will be struck by the airbag when it inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious or fatal injury will result. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions. Infants and small children must ride in back seats and be seated in an appropriate infant or child restraint system, which is properly secured with the vehicle's seat belt and top tether strap, or secured via lower anchors and top tether strap, fully in accordance with the child seat manufacturer's instructions. 1 BabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens Automotive Corp. 58 A child's risk of serious or fatal injuries is significantly increased if the child restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle and the child is not properly secured in the child restraint. Seat adjustment The seat adjustment switches are located on each door.  Switch on ignition ( page 54). or  Open the respective door. Seat fore and aft adjustment  Press switch forward or backward in direction of arrow 1. Adjust to a comfortable seating position that still allows you to reach the accelerator/brake pedal safely. The position should be as far to the rear as possible, corresponding to the driver's ability to properly operate the controls. i When moving the seat, be sure that there are no items in the footwell or behind the seats. Otherwise you could damage the seats. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Seat fore and aft adjustment Seat height Seat cushion tilt Seat backrest tilt Seat cushion depth Head restraint height The memory function ( page 140) lets you store settings for the seat positions together with the settings for the steering wheel and rear view mirrors. Getting started Adjusting Seat height Head restraint height  Press switch up or down in direction  Press switch up or down in direction of arrow 2. Seat cushion tilt  Press switch up or down in direction of arrow 3 until your upper legs are lightly supported. Seat backrest tilt  Press switch forward or backward in direction of arrow 4 until your arms are slightly angled when holding the steering wheel. Seat cushion depth  Press switch forward or backward in direction of arrow 5 until your legs are supported comfortably. Head restraint tilt of arrow 6. i Adjust the head restraint in such a way that it is as close to the head as possible. Warning! G For your protection, drive only with properly positioned head restraints. Manually adjust the angle of the head restraint. Adjust head restraint so that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at eye level. This will reduce the potential for injury to the head and neck in the event of an accident or similar situation.  Push or pull on the lower edge of the Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head restraints. Head restraints are intended to help reduce injuries during an accident. head restraint cushion. i Adjust the head restraint in such a way that it is as close to the head as possible. For more information, see "Seats" ( page 127). 59 Getting started Adjusting Steering wheel Warning! G Steering wheel adjustment Adjusting steering column in or out The stalk is located on the lower lefthand side of the steering wheel.  Move stalk forward or backward in Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. Adjusting the steering wheel while driving could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Adjusting steering column up or down When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Even with the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** removed from the starter switch or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** removed from the vehicle, the steering wheel adjustment feature can be operated when the driver’s door is open. Therefore, do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury. direction of arrow 1 until a comfortable steering wheel position is reached with your arms slightly bent at the elbow.  Move the stalk up or down in direc- tion of arrow 2. 1 Adjusting steering column, in or out 2 Adjusting steering column, up or down  Switch on ignition ( page 54). or  Open the driver's door. Make sure your legs can move freely and that all of the displays (including malfunction and indicator lamps) on the instrument cluster are clearly visible. i The memory function ( page 140) lets you store settings for the steering wheel together with settings for the rear view mirrors and seat positions. For more information, see "Heated steering wheel" ( page 308). 60 Getting started Adjusting Mirrors Adjust the interior and exterior rear view mirrors before driving so that you have a good view of the road and traffic conditions. Warning! G In the case of an accident liquid electrolyte may escape the mirror housing if the mirror glass breaks. Interior rear view mirror Exterior rear view mirror  Manually adjust the interior rear view mirror. For more information, see "Rear view mirrors" ( page 192). Warning! G Exercise care when using the passengerside exterior rear view mirror. The mirror surface is convex (outwardly curved surface for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror are closer than they appear. Check your interior rear view mirror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes. Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not allow the liquid to come into contact with eyes, skin, clothing, or respiratory system. In case it does, immediately flush affected area with water, and seek medical help if necessary. ! Electrolyte drops coming into contact with the vehicle paint finish can only be completely removed while in their liquid state and by applying plenty of water. 61 Getting started Adjusting The buttons are located on the driver's door.  Switch on ignition ( page 54). i  Press button 1 for the driver’s side The memory function ( page 140) lets you save the rear-view mirror settings together with the settings for the steering wheel and seat positions. exterior rear view mirror or button 2 for the passenger-side exterior rear view mirror.  Push adjustment button 3 up or down, left or right according to the desired setting. ! 1 Driver's side exterior rear view mirror button 2 Passenger-side exterior rear view mirror button 3 Adjustment button 62 For information on how to reposition the exterior mirror housing when it was forcibly pushed forward (hit from the rear) or forcibly pushed rearward (hit from the front), see "Folding the exterior mirrors in and out manually" ( page 196). i At low ambient temperatures, the exterior rear view mirrors will be heated automatically. For more information, see "Rear view mirrors" ( page 192). Getting started Driving  Driving Warning! G Do not lay any objects in the driver's footwell. Be careful that floor mats or carpets in the driver's footwell have sufficient clearance for the pedals. During sudden driving or braking maneuvers the objects could get caught between the pedals. You could then no longer brake or accelerate. G Due to the considerably larger interior compared to other vehicles, for occupants in the rear of the vehicle not properly wearing their seat belts, the risk of injury in an accident is significantly increased. They are much more likely to be thrown around in the vehicle in slight frontal impacts or even during emergency braking maneuvers. Always fasten your seat belt before driving off. Always make sure your passengers are properly restrained, even those sitting in the rear and pregnant women. cle to deactivate the front passenger airbag when it is properly installed. Otherwise they will be struck by the airbag when it inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious or fatal injury will result. If you are ever in an accident, your injuries can be considerably more severe without your seat belt properly buckled. Without your seat belt buckled, you are much more likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be ejected from it. You can be seriously injured or killed. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions. Infants and small children must ride in back seats and be seated in an appropriate infant or child restraint system, which is properly secured with the vehicle's seat belt and top tether strap, or secured via lower anchors and top tether strap, fully in accordance with the child seat manufacturer's instructions. In the same crash, the possibility of injury or death is lessened if you are wearing your seat belt. The airbags can only protect as expected if the occupants are using their seat belts ( page 78). Fastening the seat belts Warning! Failure to wear and properly fasten and position your seat belt greatly increases your risk of injuries and their likely severity in an accident. You and your passengers should always wear seat belts. Warning! G Children 12 years old and under must never ride in the front seat, except in a Maybach authorized BabySmartTM1 compatible child seat, which operates with the BabySmartTM system installed in the vehi1 BabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens Automotive Corp. A child's risk of serious or fatal injuries is significantly increased if the child restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle and the child is not properly secured in the child restraint. Warning! G Never let more people ride in the vehicle than there are seat belts available. Be sure everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly restrained with a separate seat belt. 63 Getting started Driving Warning! G Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat backrest in an excessively reclined position as this can be dangerous. You could slide under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide under it, the belt would apply force at the abdomen or neck. That could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The seat backrest and seat belt provide the best restraint when the wearer is in a nearly upright position and the belt is properly positioned on the body. Warning! Read and observe the additional warning notices printed in the "Safety and Security" section ( page 82). 64  Pull the seat belt smoothly from the seat belt outlet 1.  Place the shoulder portion of the belt across the top of your shoulder and the lap portion across your hips.  Push latch plate 2 into buckle 3 un- til it clicks.  If necessary, tighten the lap portion to a snug fit by pulling shoulder portion up. Proper use of seat belts: Only the reclining seat (in Maybach 62 rear cabin) can be used in a reclined position with seat belts properly fastened while the vehicle is in motion. The reclining seat in the Maybach 62 rear cabin includes a belt system and kinematic electronic controls that are designed to maintain proper support and restraint-system effectiveness in all seat settings in the event of a collision or similar situation. Keep the door storage compartments closed while the vehicle is in motion. Failure to do so may cause the seat belt to catch at the rear and prevent proper positioning of the seat belt. G 1 2 3 4 Seat belt outlet Latch plate Buckle Release button
Do not twist the belt when fastening.
Adjust seat belt so that the shoulder portion is located as close as possible to the middle of the shoulder (it should not touch the neck or pass under the arm).
Position the lap belt as low as possible on your hips (over hip joint) and not across the abdomen.
Place the seat backrest in a nearly upright position.
Never use a seat belt for more than one person at a time. Getting started Driving


Do not fasten a seat belt around a person and another object at the same time. When using a seat belt to secure infant or toddler restraints or children in booster seats, always follow the child seat manufacturer's instructions. Check your seat belt during travel to make sure it is properly positioned. Make sure the seat belt is always fitted snugly. You should avoid wearing bulky clothing, such as winter coats, when traveling in the vehicle. Place the seat backrest in a nearly upright position. Warning! G Do not pass belts over sharp edges. They could tear. Do not allow the belt to get caught in the door or in the seat adjustment mechanism. This could damage the belt. Never attempt to make modifications to seat belts. This could impair the effectiveness of the belts. Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may severely weaken them. In a crash they may not be able to provide adequate protection. Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly stressed in an accident must be replaced. Contact an authorized Maybach Studio. Starting the engine Warning! G Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide, and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness and lead to death. Do not run the engine in confined areas (such as a garage) which are not properly ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas fumes are entering the vehicle while driving, have the cause determined and corrected immediately. If you must drive under these conditions, drive with at least one window fully open. 65 Getting started Driving Automatic transmission Starting with the SmartKey Starting with KEYLESS-GO**  Make sure the gear selector lever is You can start your vehicle without a SmartKey using the KEYLESS-GO start/ stop button on the gear selector lever. set to P.  Do not depress the accelerator.  Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 3 and hold until the engine starts ( page 54). i Gearshift pattern for automatic transmission P Park position with gear selector lever lock R Reverse gear N Neutral D Drive position For more information, see "Automatic transmission" ( page 185). You can also use the "touch-start" function. Turn the SmartKey to position 3 and release it again immediately. The engine then starts automatically. In order to start the engine with the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO:
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be located in the vehicle.
All the doors must be closed.  Firmly depress the brake pedal. The gear selector lever lock is released. For more information, see "Turning off the engine with the SmartKey" ( page 75). KEYLESS-GO start/stop button 1 USA only 2 Canada only 66 Getting started Driving i Starting difficulties If the SmartKey’s battery is discharged, you cannot start the vehicle using the KEYLESS-GO function. Use the SmartKey instead. If the engine does not start as described, carry out the following steps:  If you are starting the engine with the SmartKey, turn SmartKey in starter switch to position 0 and repeat starting procedure.  Make sure the gear selector lever is set to P.  Do not depress the accelerator.  If you are starting the engine with KEYLESS-GO**, close any doors that may be open to allow for better detection of the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO**.  Firmly depress the brake pedal during the starting procedure. The gear selector lever lock is released.  Press KEYLESS-GO start/stop button 1 once. The engine starts automatically.  Repeat the starting procedure ( page 65). Remember that extend- ed starting attempts can drain the battery.  Get a jump start ( page 445). If the engine does not start after several starting attempts, there could be a malfunction in the engine electronics or in the fuel supply system.  Notify an authorized Maybach Studio. or  Start the engine with the SmartKey as radio signals from another source may be interfering with the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO**. For more information, see "Turning off the engine with KEYLESS-GO**" ( page 75). 67 Getting started Driving Parking brake Warning! G When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could release the parking brake, which could result in an accident and/or serious injury. 1 Parking brake release handle 2 Parking brake pedal  Release the parking brake by pulling on handle 1. The warning lamp ; (USA only) or 3 (Canada only) in the instrument cluster goes out. 68 Driving  Firmly depress brake pedal. The gear selector lever lock is released.  Move gear selector lever in position D or R. Warning! G It is dangerous to shift the gear selector lever out of P or N if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal. Getting started Driving ! ! ! In order to avoid damaging the transmission, If you hear a warning signal when driving off, you have forgotten to release the parking brake. Simultaneously depressing the accelerator pedal and applying the brake reduces engine performance and causes premature brake and drivetrain wear.

wait for the gear selection process to complete before setting the vehicle in motion place the gear selector lever in position R only when the vehicle is stopped.  Release the brake pedal.  Carefully depress the accelerator ped- Release the parking brake. ! Do not run cold engine at high engine speeds. Running a cold engine at high engine speeds may shorten the service life of the engine. al. i Once the vehicle is in motion, the automatic central locking system engages and the locking knobs move down. You can open a locked door from the inside. Open door only when conditions are safe to do so. You can deactivate the automatic locking using the control system ( page 181). Warning! G On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in order to obtain braking action. This could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control. For more information, see "Driving instructions" ( page 343). 69 Getting started Driving Switching on headlamps  Turn exterior lamp switch to position B. Low beam headlamps The exterior lamp switch is located on the dashboard to the left of the steering wheel. The green indicator lamp C in the exterior lamp switch comes on. High beam The combination switch is located on the left of the steering column. i The green indicator lamp C in the exterior lamp switch always comes on when the lights have been switched on. Combination switch Exterior lamp switch 1 Off 2 Low beam headlamps on 1 High beam 2 High beam flasher  Push combination switch in direction of arrow 1. The high beam headlamp indicator lamp A in the instrument cluster comes on ( page 24). For more information, see "Lighting" ( page 143). 70 Getting started Driving Turn signals The combination switch is located on the left of the steering column. i Switching on windshield wipers To signal minor directional changes, e.g. passing or changing lanes, move combination switch to point of resistance only and release. The turn signal flashes three times.  Turn the combination switch to the Windshield wipers The combination switch is located on the left of the steering column. desired position depending on the intensity of the rain. 0 Windshield wipers off I Intermittent wiping II Normal wiper speed III Fast wiper speed i Intermittent wiping interval is dependent on wetness of windshield. After the initial wipe, pauses between wipes are automatically controlled by the rain sensor. Combination switch 1 Turn signal, right 2 Turn signal, left  Press combination switch up 1 or down 2. The corresponding turn signal indicator lamp L or K flashes in the instrument cluster ( page 24). The combination switch resets automatically after major steering wheel movements. Combination switch 1 Single wipe 2 Switching on windshield wipers  Switch on ignition ( page 54). 71 Getting started Driving ! Single wipe Do not leave windshield wipers in intermittent setting when vehicle is taken to an automatic car wash or during windshield cleaning. Wipers will operate in the presence of water sprayed on the windshield, and wipers may be damaged as a result.  Press switch briefly in direction of The switch should not be left in intermittent setting as the wipers will wipe the windshield once every time the engine is started. Dust that accumulates on the windshield might scratch the glass and/or damage the wiper blades when wiping occurs on a dry windshield. Intermittent wiping  Set the wiper switch to position I. i Intermittent wiping is interrupted when the vehicle is at a standstill and a front door is opened. 72 or
arrow 1. The windshield wipers wipe one time without washer fluid. Wiping with windshield washer fluid  Push switch in direction of arrow 1 past the resistance point. The windshield wiper operates with washer fluid. For information on filling up the washer reservoir, see "Windshield washer and headlamp cleaning system" ( page 362). ! If anything blocks the windshield wipers (leaves, snow, etc.), switch them off immediately.
For safety reasons,
turn off the engine by turning the SmartKey to position 0 and withdraw SmartKey from starter switch. turn off the engine by pressing the KEYLESS-GO** start/stop button ( page 55) and open the driver’s door (with the driver’s door open, starter switch is in position 0, same as with SmartKey removed from starter switch) before attempting to remove any blockage.
Remove blockage.
Turn the windshield wipers on again. If windshield wipers fail to function at all in switch position I:
Set the combination switch to the next highest wiper speed.
Have the windshield wipers checked at the nearest authorized Maybach Studio. Getting started Driving Problems while driving The engine runs erratically and misfires
An ignition cable may be damaged.
The engine electronics may not be operating properly.
Unburned gasoline may have entered the catalytic converter and damaged it.  Give very little gas.  Have the problem repaired by an au- thorized Maybach Studio as soon as possible. The coolant temperature is above 248°F (120°C) In case of accident The coolant is too hot and is no longer cooling the engine.  Do not start the engine under any cir-  Stop the vehicle as soon as possible and turn off the engine. Allow engine and coolant to cool.  Check the coolant level and add coolant if necessary ( page 360).  If problem persists, call 1-866-FOR-MAYBach (in the USA) or 1-888-881-6611 (in Canada). If the vehicle is leaking gasoline: cumstances.  Notify local fire and/or police author- ities. If the extent of the damage cannot be determined:  Notify an authorized Maybach Studio. If no damage can be determined on the
major assemblies
fuel system
engine mount:  Start the engine in the usual manner. 73 Getting started Parking and locking You have now completed your first drive. You have properly stopped and parked your vehicle. End your drive as follows. Warning! G Wait until the vehicle is stationary before removing the SmartKey from the starter switch. The vehicle cannot be steered when the SmartKey is removed. Warning! G With the engine not running, there is no power assistance for the brake and steering systems. In this case, it is important to keep in mind that a considerably higher degree of effort is necessary to brake or steer the vehicle. 74 Warning! G Parking brake Do not park this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass, hay or leaves can come into contact with the hot exhaust system, as these materials could be ignited and cause a vehicle fire. To reduce the risk of personal injury as a result of inadvertent vehicle movement, before turning off the engine and leaving the vehicle always:
Keep right foot firmly on brake pedal.
Firmly depress parking brake pedal.
Move the gear selector lever to position P.
Slowly release brake pedal.
When parked on an incline, turn front wheels towards the road curb.
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 0 and remove the SmartKey from the starter switch, or press KEYLESS-GO** start/stop button ( page 55).
Take the SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** with you and lock vehicle when leaving. 1 Parking brake release handle 2 Parking brake pedal  Step firmly on parking brake 2. When the engine is running, the warning lamp ; (USA only) or 3 (Canada only) in the instrument cluster will be illuminated. Getting started Parking and locking Warning! G When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could release the parking brake and/or move the gear selector lever from position P, either of which could result in an accident and/or serious injury. Warning! G Getting out of your vehicle with the gear selector lever not fully engaged in position P is dangerous. Also, when parked on an incline, position P alone may not prevent your vehicle from moving, possibly hitting people or objects. Always set the parking brake in addition to shifting to position P ( page 66). When parked on an incline, turn front wheels towards the road curb. Switching off headlamps  Turn the exterior lamp switch to M ( page 70). For more information, see "Lighting" ( page 143). Turning off the engine  Place the gear selector lever in position P. i Always set the parking brake in addition to shifting to position P. On slopes, turn the front wheels towards the curb. Turning off the engine with the SmartKey  Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 0 and remove it. The immobilizer is activated.  Press the seat belt release button ( page 64). i The SmartKey can only be removed from the starter switch with the gear selector lever in position P. i With the SmartKey removed and the driver’s door open, a warning sounds if the vehicle’s exterior lamps are not switched off. Turning off the engine with KEYLESS-GO**  Place the gear selector lever in P.  Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button ( page 55) until the engine shuts off. With the driver’s door closed, the starter switch is now in position 1. With the driver‘s door open, the starter switch is set to position 0, same as SmartKey removed from the starter switch. The immobilizer is activated.  Press the seat belt release button ( page 64). 75 Getting started Parking and locking ! If you hear a warning signal, you have either
forgotten to switch off the vehicle’s exterior lamps, or
tried to turn off the engine while the gear selector lever is not in P. Turn off the lights or place the gear selector lever in P. Warning! G When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury. Locking Warning! G To prevent possible personal injury, always keep hands and fingers away from the door openings when closing the doors. Be especially careful when small children are around. Before closing doors, make sure there is no possibility of someone getting caught in a door during closing. 76 Locking with KEYLESS-GO** Locking with the SmartKey 1 Lock button on the door handle  After exiting the vehicle press lock  After exiting the vehicle, press lock button ‹ on the SmartKey ( page 52). button 1 on the outside door handle or on the trunk lid ( page 121). The turn signal indicators come on briefly. The vehicle locks. The locking knobs in the doors move down. The anti-theft alarm system is armed. The turn signal indicators come on briefly. The vehicle locks. The locking knobs in the doors move down. The anti-theft alarm system is armed. For more information, see "SmartKey" ( page 108). For more information, see "SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO**" ( page 111). Safety and Security Occupant safety Panic alarm Driving safety systems Anti-theft systems 77 Safety and Security Occupant safety In this section you will learn the most important facts about the restraint systems of the vehicle. The 1 indicator lamp in the instrument cluster comes on
The restraint systems are:
Airbags
Seat belts
Emergency tensioning device
Child seats
Child seat recognition
Lower anchors and tethers for children (LATCH) As independent systems, their protective effects work in conjunction with each other. i For information on infants and children traveling with you in the vehicle and restraint systems for infants and children, see "Children in the vehicle" ( page 87). 78
for about four seconds when you turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 1 or press the KEYLESS-GO** start/stop button ( page 55) once. It then goes out briefly, comes on again and remains lit until you start the engine. for about four seconds when you start the engine by turning the SmartKey or pressing the KEYLESS-GO** start/stop button. i The 1 indicator lamp comes on and remains lit if the SmartKey is turned to position 2 and left there or the KEYLESS-GO** start/stop button is pressed twice. The indicator lamp will go out when you start the engine. The restraint systems are fully operational if the 1 indicator lamp is not lit when the engine is running. A malfunction in the system has been detected if the 1 indicator lamp:
fails to go out after approximately four seconds.
does not come on at all.
comes on after the engine was started or while driving. For safety reasons, we strongly recommend that you visit an authorized Maybach Studio immediately to have the system checked. For more information on SRS, see "Practical hints" ( page 387). Safety and Security Occupant safety Warning! G In the event that the 1 indicator lamp comes on during driving or does not come on at all, the SRS self-check has detected a malfunction. For your safety, we strongly recommend that you visit an authorized Maybach Studio immediately to have the system checked; otherwise the SRS may not be activated when needed in an accident, which could result in serious or fatal injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily which could also result in injury. In addition, improper repair work on the SRS creates a risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or causing unintended airbag deployment. Work on the SRS must therefore only be performed by qualified technicians. Contact an authorized Maybach Studio. Airbags Warning! Warning! G Airbags are designed to reduce the potential of injury and fatality in certain frontal impacts (front airbags), side impacts (side impact airbags and head protection window curtain airbags) or rollovers (head protection window curtain airbags). However, no system available today can totally eliminate injuries and fatalities. The activation of the airbags temporarily releases a small amount of dust from the airbags. This dust, however, is neither injurious to your health, nor does it indicate a fire in the vehicle. The dust might cause some temporary breathing difficulty for people with asthma or other breathing trouble. To avoid this, you may wish to get out of the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. If you have any breathing difficulty but cannot get out of the vehicle after the airbag inflates, then get fresh air by opening a window or door. G To reduce the risk of injury when the front airbags inflate, it is very important for the driver and front passenger to always be in a properly seated position and to wear your seat belts. For maximum protection in the event of a collision always be in normal seated position with your back against the seat backrest. Fasten your seat belt and make sure it is properly positioned on your body. Since the airbag inflates with considerable speed and force, a proper seating and hands on steering wheel position will help to keep you at a safe distance from the airbag. Occupants who are unbelted, out of position or too close to the airbag can be seriously injured by an airbag as it inflates with great force in the blink of an eye:
Sit properly belted in a nearly upright position with your back against the seat backrest.  79 Safety and Security Occupant safety 

Adjust the driver seat as far as possible rearward, still permitting proper operation of vehicle controls. The distance from the center of the driver’s breastbone to the center of the airbag cover on the steering wheel must be at least 10 in (25 cm) or more. You should be able to accomplish this by a combination of adjustments to the seat and steering wheel. If you have any problems, please see an authorized Maybach Studio.
Occupants, especially children, should never lean their heads in the area of the door where the side airbag inflates. This could result in serious injuries or death should the airbag be triggered. Always sit nearly upright, properly use the seat belts and appropriate size infant or child restraint system.
Do not lean with your head or chest close to the steering wheel or dashboard.
Keep hands on the outside of steering wheel rim. Placing hands and arms inside the rim can increase the risk and potential severity of hand/arm injury when driver front airbag inflates. Children 12 years old and under must never ride in the front seat, except in a Maybach authorized BabySmartTM1 compatible child seat, which operates with the BabySmartTM system installed in the vehicle to deactivate the passenger front airbag when it is properly installed. Otherwise they will be struck by the airbag when it inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious or fatal injury will result.
Adjust the front passenger seat as far as possible rearward from the dashboard when the seat is occupied. Failure to follow these instructions can result in severe injuries to you or other occupants. If you sell your vehicle, it is important that you make the buyer aware of this safety information. Be sure to give the buyer this Operator's Manual. 1 80 BabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens Automotive Corp. Warning! G Accident research shows that the safest place for children in an automobile is in the rear seat. Should you choose to place a child 12 years old or under in the front passenger seat of your vehicle, you must properly use a BabySmartTM child restraint which will turn off the passenger front airbag. BabySmartTM will not, however, turn off any side impact airbag. It should be noted that with respect to both front and rear side impact airbags there is a possibility for a side airbag related injury if occupants, especially children, are not properly seated or restrained when next to a side airbag which needs to deploy rapidly in a side impact in order to do its job. To help avoid the possibility of injury, please follow these guidelines: (1) Occupants, especially children, should never place their bodies or lean their heads in the area of the door where the side airbag inflates. This could result in serious injuries or death should the side airbag be activated. Safety and Security Occupant safety (2) Always sit nearly upright, properly use the seat belts and use an appropriately sized infant or child restraint system for all children 12 years old or under. (3) Always wear seat belts properly. If you believe that, even with the use of these guidelines, it would be safer for your rear seat occupants to have both rear seat mounted side airbags deactivated, then deactivation can be accomplished upon your written request to do so at an authorized Maybach Studio at an additional cost. Please contact your local authorized Maybach Studio or call our Maybach Assistance Center at 1-866-FOR-MAYBach (in the USA), or 1-888-881-6611 (in Canada). i Airbags are designed to activate only in certain frontal impacts (front airbags), side impacts (side impact and head protection window curtain airbags) which exceed preset thresholds and in certain rollovers (head protection window curtain airbags). Only during these events will they provide their supplemental protection. The driver and passengers should always wear their seat belts. Otherwise it is not possible for airbags to provide their supplemental protection. In case of other types of impacts and impacts below airbag deployment thresholds, airbags will not be activated. The driver and passenger will then be protected to the extent possible by a properly fastened seat belt. A properly fastened seat belt is also needed to provide the best possible protection in a rollover. We caution you not to rely on the presence of the airbags in order to avoid wearing your seat belt. Your vehicle was originally equipped with airbags that are designed to activate in certain impacts exceeding a preset threshold to reduce the potential and severity of injury. It is important for your safety and the safety of your passengers that you replace deployed airbags and repair any malfunctioning airbags to make sure the vehicle will continue to provide supplemental crash protection for occupants. 81 Safety and Security Occupant safety Safety guidelines for the seat belt, emergency tensioning device and airbag Warning!


82 G Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly stressed in an accident must be replaced and their anchoring points must also be checked. Use only belts installed or supplied by an authorized Maybach Studio. Airbags and emergency tensioning devices (ETDs) are designed to function on a one-time-only basis. An airbag or ETD that was activated must be replaced. No modifications of any kind may be made to any components or wiring of the SRS. This includes changing or removing any component or part of the SRS, the installation of additional trim material, seat covers, badges etc. over the steering wheel hub, passenger front airbag cover, door trim panels, or door frame trims, and installation of additional electrical/electronic equipment on or near SRS components and wiring. Keep area between airbags and occupants free from objects (e.g. packages, purses, umbrellas, etc.).
Do not pass belts over sharp edges. They could tear.
Do not make any modification that could change the effectiveness of the belts.
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may severely weaken them. In a crash they may not be able to provide adequate protection.
Do not hang items such as coat hangers from the coat hooks or handles over the door. These items may turn into projectiles and cause head and other injuries when curtain airbag is deployed.
Never place your feet on the instrument panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always keep both feet on the floor in front of the seat.
Airbag system components will be hot after an air bag has inflated. Do not touch.
In addition, improper repair work on the SRS creates a risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or causing unintended airbag deployment. Work on the SRS must therefore only be performed by qualified technicians. Contact an authorized Maybach Studio.
For your protection and the protection of others, when scrapping the airbag unit or emergency tensioning device, our safety instructions must be followed. These instructions are available from your authorized Maybach Studio.
Given the considerable deployment speed and the textile structure of the airbags, there is the possibility of abrasions or other injuries resulting from airbag deployment. When you sell your vehicle, we strongly urge you to give notice to the subsequent owner that it is equipped with an SRS by alerting them to the applicable section in the Operator’s Manual. Safety and Security Occupant safety Warning! Side impact airbags G The side impact airbags are deployed: Only use seat covers which have been tested and approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles. Using other seat covers may interfere with or prevent the deployment of the side impact airbags. Contact an authorized Maybach Studio for availability. Front airbags Driver and front passenger airbags are deployed:
in the event of a frontal impact
if impact exceeds a preset deployment threshold The airbags will not deploy in impacts which do not exceed the system’s deployment thresholds. You will then be protected by the fastened seat belts. The passenger front airbag will only be deployed if:
the front passenger seat is occupied
the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp in the center console is not lit ( page 89)
in impacts exceeding a preset deployment threshold
on the impacted side of the vehicle The side impact airbags are not deployed in impacts which do not exceed the system’s deployment threshold.
the impact exceeds a preset deployment threshold The front passenger side impact airbag will only deploy if the system senses that the front passenger seat is occupied. 1 Driver airbag 2 Passenger airbag ! Do not place objects heavier than 20 lbs (9 kg) on the front passenger seat. This could cause the front or side impact airbag on the front passenger side to deploy in a crash which exceeds the system's deployment threshold. 1 Front side impact airbags 2 Rear side impact airbags 83 Safety and Security Occupant safety Window curtain airbags The side window curtain airbags are deployed:
in impacts exceeding a preset deployment threshold
on the impacted side of the vehicle
in certain vehicle rollovers Seat belts When the engine is started, the seat belt telltale < illuminates to remind you and your passengers to fasten your seat belts. If the driver’s seat belt is not fastened before the engine is started, the seat belt telltale < illuminates and a warning chime sounds for approximately six seconds when the engine is started. The use of seat belts and infant and child restraint systems is required by law in all 50 states, the District of Columbia, the U.S. territories and all Canadian provinces. Even where this is not the case, all vehicle occupants should have their seat belts fastened at all times when driving or riding in the vehicle. 1 Front window curtain airbag 2 Rear window curtain airbag The window curtain airbags fill up the area between the A and C pillars (see arrows). 84 For more information on fastening seat belts, see "Getting started" ( page 63). i For information on infants and children traveling with you in the vehicle and restraint systems for infants and children, see "Children in the vehicle" ( page 87). Warning! G Due to the considerably larger interior compared to other vehicles, for occupants in the rear of the vehicle not properly wearing their seat belts, the risk of injury in an accident is significantly increased. They are much more likely to be thrown around in the vehicle in slight frontal impacts or even during emergency braking maneuvers. Always fasten your seat belt before driving off. Always make sure your passengers are properly restrained, even those sitting in the rear and pregnant women. Failure to wear and properly fasten and position your seat belt greatly increases your risk of injuries and their likely severity in an accident. You and your passengers should always wear seat belts. If you are ever in an accident, your injuries can be considerably more severe without your seat belt properly buckled. Without your seat belt buckled, you are much more likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be ejected from it. You can be seriously injured or killed. Safety and Security Occupant safety In the same crash, the possibility of injury or death is lessened if you are properly wearing your seat belt. Airbags can only protect as they are designed if the occupants are properly wearing their seat belts. Warning! G Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat backrest in an excessively reclined position as this can be dangerous. You could slide under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide under it, the belt would apply force at the abdomen or neck. That could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The seat backrest and seat belt provide the best restraint when the wearer is in a nearly upright position and the belt is properly positioned on the body. that are designed to maintain proper support and restraint-system effectiveness in all seat settings in the event of a collision or similar situation. Keep the door storage compartments closed while the vehicle is in motion. Failure to do so may cause the seat belt to catch at the rear and prevent proper positioning of the seat belt. Warning! G Never let more people ride in the vehicle than there are seat belts available. Be sure everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly restrained with a separate seat belt. Never use a seat belt for more than one person at a time. Warning! G Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly stressed in an accident must be replaced and their anchoring points must also be checked. Only use seat belts which have been approved for Maybach vehicles. Do not make any modifications to the seat belts. This can lead to unintended activation or to failure. Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may severely weaken them. In a crash, they may not be able to provide adequate protection. Have all work carried out only by qualified technicians. Contact an authorized Maybach Studio. Only the reclining seat (in Maybach 62 rear cabin) can be used in a reclined position with seat belts properly fastened while the vehicle is in motion. The reclining seat in the Maybach 62 rear cabin includes a belt system and kinematic electronic controls 85 Safety and Security Occupant safety Warning! G
USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY

86 Seat belts can only work when used properly. Never wear seat belts in any other way than as described in this section, as that could result in serious injuries in case of an accident. Each occupant should wear their seat belt at all times, because seat belts help reduce the likelihood of and potential severity of injuries in accidents, including rollovers. The integrated restraint system includes SRS (driver airbag, passenger front airbag, side impact airbags, head protection window curtain airbags for side windows), ETD (seat belt emergency tensioning device), and front seat knee bolsters. The system is designed to enhance the protection offered to properly belted occupants in certain frontal (front airbags and ETD) and side (side impact, window curtain airbags and ETD) impacts which exceed preset deployment thresholds and in certain rollovers (window curtain airbags).
Never wear the shoulder belt under your arm, against your neck or off your shoulder. In a crash, your body would move too far forward. That would increase the chance of head and neck injuries. The belt would also apply too much force to the ribs or abdomen, which could severely injure internal organs such as your liver or spleen. Never wear belts over rigid or breakable objects in or on your clothing, such as eyeglasses, pens, keys, etc., as these might cause injuries.
Position the lap belt as low as possible on your hips and not across the abdomen. If the belt is positioned across your abdomen, it could cause serious injuries in a crash.
Never use a seat belt for more than one person at a time. Do not fasten a seat belt around a person and another person or other objects.
Belts should not be worn twisted. In a crash, you wouldn’t have the full width of the belt to manage impact forces. The twisted belt against your body could cause injuries.
Pregnant women should also use a lapshoulder belt. The lap belt portion should be positioned as low as possible on the hips to avoid any possible pressure on the abdomen.
Never place your feet on the instrument panel, dashboard or on the seat. Always keep both feet on the floor in front of the seat. Emergency tensioning device (ETD), seat belt force limiter The seat belts for the front and rear outer seats are equipped with emergency tensioning devices and belt force limiters. The ETD is designed to activate in the following cases when:
in frontal or rear-end impacts exceeding a preset severity level
in certain vehicle rollovers
if the restraint systems are operational and functioning correctly. See 1 indicator lamp ( page 78) Safety and Security Occupant safety ! In an impact, emergency tensioning devices remove slack from the belts in such a way that the seat belts fit more snugly against the body. Belt force limiters reduce the force exerted by the seat belts on occupants during a crash. Do not place objects heavier than 20 lbs (9 kg) on the front passenger seat. This could cause the front or side impact airbag on the front passenger side to deploy in a crash which exceeds the system's deployment threshold. i The ETDs for the front seats will only activate if the respective front seat belt is fastened (latch plate properly inserted into buckle). The ETDs for the rear outer seats will activate with or without the respective seat belt fastened. Warning! G An emergency tensioning device (ETD) that was activated must be replaced. When disposing of the emergency tensioning device, our safety instructions must be followed. These are available at your authorized Maybach Studio. Automatic comfort-fit feature seat belt An automatic comfort-fit feature for front seats reduces the retracting force of the seat belts when they are in normal use. Children in the vehicle If an infant or child is traveling with you in the vehicle:
Secure the child using an infant or child restraint appropriate to the age and size of the child.
Make sure the infant or child is properly secured at all times while the vehicle is in motion. Infant and child restraint seats and information on choosing an appropriate restraint system can be obtained from any Maybach Studio. Infant and child restraint systems Use only a BabySmartTM1 compatible child restraint for the front passenger seat in this vehicle. We recommend all infants and children be properly restrained at all times while the vehicle is in motion. All lap-shoulder belts except the driver’s seat belt have special seat belt retractors for secure fastening of child restraints. To fasten a child restraint, follow child restraint instructions for mounting. Then pull the shoulder belt out completely and let it retract. During seat belt retraction, a ratcheting sound can be heard to indicate that the special seat belt retractor is activated. The belt is now locked. Push down on child restraint to take up any slack. 1 BabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens Automotive Corp. 87 Safety and Security Occupant safety To deactivate, release seat belt buckle and let seat belt retract completely. The seat belt can again be used in the usual manner. i For more information on child seats with mounting fittings for tether anchorages ( page 91). For information on LATCH-type child seat mounts ( page 92). Warning! G Never release the seat belt buckle while the vehicle is in motion, since the special seat belt retractor will be deactivated. ! The use of infant or child restraints is required by law in all 50 states, the District of Columbia, the U.S. territories and all Canadian provinces. Infants and small children should be seated in an appropriate infant or child restraint system properly se- 88 cured by a lap-shoulder belt or, if so equipped, a child restraint lower anchorage system that complies with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 225 and Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 210.2. Warning! G Children 12 years old and under must never ride in the front seat, except in a Maybach authorized BabySmartTM1 compatible child seat, which operates with the BabySmartTM system installed in the vehicle to deactivate the passenger front airbag when it is properly installed. Otherwise they will be struck by the airbag when it inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious or fatal injury will result. A statement by the child restraint manufacturer of compliance with this standard can be found on the instruction label on the restraint and in the instruction manual provided with the restraint. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions. Infants and small children must ride in back seats and be seated in an appropriate infant or child restraint system, which is properly secured with the vehicle’s seat belt and top tether strap, or secured via lower anchors and top tether strap, fully in accordance with the child seat manufacturer’s instructions. When using any infant or child restraint system, be sure to carefully read and follow all manufacturer’s instructions for installation and use. Please read and observe warning labels affixed to inside of vehicle and to infant or child restraints. 1 BabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens Automotive Corp. Safety and Security Occupant safety Warning! G Infants and small children should never share a seat belt with another occupant. During an accident, they could be crushed between the occupant and seat belt. Children too big for child restraint systems must ride in back seats using regular seat belts. Position shoulder belt across chest and shoulder, not face or neck. A booster seat may be necessary to achieve proper belt positioning for children from 41 lbs until they reach a height where a lap/ shoulder belt fits properly without a booster. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle; even if the children are secured in a child restraint system. Unsupervised children in a child restraint system may use vehicle equipment and may cause serious personal injury. BabySmartTM airbag deactivation system The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is located on the upper part of the front center console. The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp 1 located on the upper part of the front center console will be illuminated, except with the SmartKey removed or in starter switch position 0. i The system does not deactivate the side impact airbag, the window curtain airbag and the emergency tensioning device. A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is significantly increased if the child restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle and the child is not properly secured in the child restraint. When the child restraint is not in use, remove it from the vehicle or secure it with the seat belt to prevent the child restraint from becoming a projectile in the event of an accident. Special BabySmartTM compatible child seats, designed for use with the Maybach system and available at any authorized Maybach Studio are required for use with the BabySmartTM airbag deactivation system. With the special child seat properly installed, the passenger front airbag will not deploy. 1 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp 89 Safety and Security Occupant safety Self-test BabySmartTM1 without special child seat installed After turning the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 1 or 2 or the KEYLESS-GO** start/stop button ( page 55) is pressed once or twice, PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp 1 located on the upper part of the front center console comes on for approximately six seconds and then goes out. If the indicator lamp should not come on or is continuously lit, the system is not functioning. You must see an authorized Maybach Studio before seating any child on the front passenger seat. For more information on PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp, see "Practical hints" ( page 390). 1 BabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens Automotive Corp. 90 Warning! G Warning! G The BabySmartTM airbag deactivation system will ONLY work with a special child seat designed to operate with it. It will not work with child seats which are not BabySmartTM compatible. When using a BabySmartTM compatible child seat on the front passenger seat, the passenger front airbag will not deploy only if the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp remains illuminated. Never place anything between seat cushion and child seat (e.g. pillow), since it reduces the effectiveness of the deactivation system. The bottom of the child seat must make full contact with the passenger seat cushion. An incorrectly mounted child seat could cause injuries to the child in case of an accident, instead of protecting the child. Please be sure to check the indicator every time you use the special system child seat. Should the light go out while the restraint is installed, please check installation. If the light remains out, do not use the BabySmartTM restraint to transport children on the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for installation of special child seats. Warning! G Do not place powered-on laptops, cell phones and like electronic devices on the front passenger seat. Signals from such devices may interfere with the BabySmartTM system. Such signal interference may cause the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp not to come on during self-test or be continuously lit, indicating that the system is not functioning. Safety and Security Occupant safety Installing infant and child restraint systems This vehicle is equipped with tether anchorages for a top tether strap at each of the rear seating positions. Head restraint must be positioned such that the top tether strap can pass freely between the head restraint and top of seat back. i For safety, please make sure the hook has attached to the ring beyond the safety catch, as illustrated.  Make sure the tether strap is not twisted. Once the top tether anchorage hook is attached, the child restraint itself can be secured. Tighten the top tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer's instructions.  Close cover after removing the tether strap. Warning! 1 Cover of top anchorage ring  Bring the rear seat backrest to a fully upright position.  Open cover 1 to access anchorage ring.  Guide tether strap between head re- straints and top of seat back. 2 Hook 3 Anchorage ring  Securely fasten hook 2, which is part of the tether strap, to anchorage ring 3. G Never adjust the rear seat position after installing the child restraint. Adjusting the rear seat position after installing the child restraint could damage the child restraint and/or introduce undesirable slack into the webbing and loosen or misposition the child restraint, lessening the effectiveness of the child restraint and thus increasing the chance or severity of injury in an accident. 91 Safety and Security Occupant safety Child seat anchors – LATCH-type Installing This vehicle is equipped with two LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) type anchors (at each of the outer rear seats) for the installation a LATCH child seat with the matching anchor fittings.  Bring the rear seat backrest to a fully If you have not installed a child seat, the LATCH anchors can be folded back between the seat cushion and seat backrest. upright position.  Adjust the seat angle to the lowest possible position.  Fold out anchors 3 until they en- gage.  Install the child seat restraint. Please refer to the manufacturer’s installation instructions. i When the anchors are folded out, seat adjustment is limited to:
seat, aft
seat cushion tilt, down
head restraint height, up
head restraint tilt, backwards i 1 Indicates the position of the anchors 2 Release button 3 Anchor 92 The child seat must be firmly attached in the right and left side anchors. Warning! G Never adjust the rear seat position after installing the child restraint. Adjusting the rear seat position after installing the child restraint could damage the child restraint and/or introduce undesirable slack into the webbing and loosen or misposition the child restraint, lessening the effectiveness of the child restraint and thus increasing the chance or severity of injury in an accident. Safety and Security Occupant safety Removing  Remove the child seat.  Press release button 2 and fold in anchors 3 until they engage. ! Vehicles with a rear center seat*: Make sure the seat belt for the center seat can operate freely with a child seat installed. Warning! G Children too big for child restraint systems must ride in back seats using regular seat belts. Position shoulder belt across chest and shoulder, not face or neck. A booster seat may be necessary to achieve proper belt positioning for children from 41 lbs until they reach a height where a lap/ shoulder belt fits properly without a booster. i Install child seat according to manufacturer’s instructions. Non-LATCH type child seats may also be used and can be installed using the vehicle’s seat belt system. Install child seat according to the manufacturer’s instructions. The child seat must be firmly attached in the right and left side anchors 3. An incorrectly mounted child seat may come loose during an accident which could result in serious injury or death to your child. Damaged or impact damaged child seats or child seat mounting fittings must be replaced. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, even if the children are secured in a child restraint system. 93 Safety and Security Occupant safety Override switch for rear passenger compartment You can disable select functions in the rear passenger compartment for added safety (for instance when you have children riding in the rear passenger compartment). The override switch is located in the driver’s door. rear door window operation ( page 218)
cigarette lighter in the rear ( page 274)
adjusting the front passenger seat position from the rear ( page 135)
12-V socket in the rear center console ( page 278)
closing the partition* from the rear ( page 284) Warning! G Activate the override switch when children are riding in the back seats of the vehicle. The children may otherwise injure themselves, e.g. by becoming trapped in the window opening. 1 Deactivating override switch 2 Activating override switch Activating override switch  Press switch 2. The functions in the rear are disabled. i The rear door windows can still be operated with the switches located in the driver’s door. 94  Press switch 1. The functions in the rear are enabled again. You can disable the following functions in the rear passenger compartment:
Deactivating override switch When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment can cause an accident and/or serious personal injury. For information, see "Power windows" ( page 218). Safety and Security Panic alarm  Panic alarm An audible alarm and flashing exterior lamps will operate for approximately 2½ minutes. Activating  Press and hold button 1 for at least one second. Deactivating  Press button 1 again. or  Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch. 1 Â Panic button i For operation in the USA only: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. 95 Safety and Security Driving safety systems i In this section you will find information on the following driving safety systems:
ABS (Antilock Brake System)
BAS (Brake Assist System)
ESP (Electronic Stability Program)
SBC (Sensotronic Brake Control) ABS In winter operation, the maximum effectiveness of the ABS, BAS, ESP and SBC is only achieved with winter tires (M + S tires), or snow chains as required. I Warning! G The following factors increase the risk of accidents: 96
Excessive speed, especially in turns
Wet and slippery road surfaces
Following another vehicle too closely Warning! G Do not pump the brake pedal. Use firm, steady brake pedal pressure instead. Pumping the brake pedal defeats the purpose of the ABS and significantly reduces braking effectiveness. The ABS regulates the brake pressure so that the wheels do not lock during braking. This allows you to maintain the ability to steer your vehicle. The ABS, BAS, ESP and SBC cannot reduce this risk. The ABS is functional above a speed of approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) independent of road surface conditions. Always adjust your driving style to the prevailing road and weather conditions. On slippery road surfaces, the ABS will respond even to light brake pressure. Safety and Security Driving safety systems Continuous steady brake pedal pressure yields the advantages provided by the ABS, namely braking power and the ability to steer the vehicle. If the ABS activates during braking, the ABS/ESP warning lamp v in the instrument cluster dial flashes. Because of the SBC brake system, you will not feel any pulsation in the brake pedal. Warning! G The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded. The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. ABS control The - indicator lamp in the instrument cluster comes on when you switch on ignition. It goes out when the engine is running. For more information on ABS, see "Practical hints" ( page 384). BAS The Brake Assist System (BAS) operates in emergency situations. If you apply the brakes very quickly, the BAS automatically provides full brake boost, thereby potentially reducing the braking distance.  Apply continuous full braking pres- sure until the emergency braking situation is over. The ABS will prevent the wheels from locking. When you release the brake pedal, the brakes function again as normal. The BAS is then deactivated. Warning! G If the BAS is malfunctioning, the brake system is still functioning normally, but without the additional brake boost available that BAS would normally provide in an emergency braking maneuver. Therefore, the braking distance may increase. Warning! G The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction. The BAS cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. 97 Safety and Security Driving safety systems ESP Warning! The Electronic Stability Program (ESP) is operational as soon as the engine is running and monitors the vehicle's traction (force of adhesive friction between the tires and the road surface) and handling. The ESP recognizes when a wheel is spinning or if the vehicle starts to skid. By applying brakes to the appropriate wheel and by limiting engine output, the ESP works to stabilize the vehicle. The ESP is especially useful while driving off and on wet or slippery road surfaces. The ESP also stabilizes the vehicle during braking maneuvers. The ABS/ESP warning lamp v in the instrument cluster flashes when the ESP is engaged. The ABS/ESP warning lamp v in the instrument cluster comes on when you switch on ignition. It goes out when the engine is running. 98 G Never switch off the ESP when you see the ABS/ ESP warning lamp v flashing in the instrument cluster. In this case proceed as follows:
While driving off, apply as little throttle as possible
While driving, ease up on the accelerator
Adapt your speed and driving style to the prevailing road conditions Failure to observe these guidelines could cause the vehicle to skid. The ESP cannot prevent accidents resulting from excessive speed. Warning! G The ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded. The ESP cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESP equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. i The ESP will only function properly if you use wheels of the recommended tire size ( page 459). Safety and Security Driving safety systems ! Switching off the ESP Because of the ESP’s automatic operation, the engine must be shut off (SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or 1) when
the parking brake is being tested on a brake test dynamometer
the vehicle is being towed with the front/rear axle raised. Active braking action through the ESP may otherwise seriously damage the brake system. For more information on ESP, see "Practical hints" ( page 384). Warning! When you switch off the ESP G The ESP should not be switched off during normal driving other than in the circumstances described below. Disabling of the system will reduce vehicle stability in driving maneuvers. To improve the vehicle's traction, turn off the ESP in driving situations where it would be advantageous to have the drive wheels spin and thus cut into surfaces for better grip such as:
starting out on slippery surfaces and in deep snow in conjunction with snow chains
in sand or gravel
the ESP does not stabilize the vehicle
the engine output is not limited, which allows the drive wheels to spin and thus cut into surfaces for better grip
the traction control will still brake a spinning wheel
the ESP continues to operate when you are braking i When the ESP is switched off and one or more drive wheels are spinning, the ABS/ESP warning lamp v in the speedometer flashes. However, the ESP will then not stabilize the vehicle. 99 Safety and Security Driving safety systems The switch is located on the lower part of the front center console. Warning! G When the ABS/ESP warning lamp v is illuminated continuously, the ESP is switched off. Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions and to the non-operating status of the ESP. ! 1 ESP switch (on/off)  Press switch 1 until the ABS/ESP warning lamp v in the speedometer comes on. The ESP is deactivated. 100 Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an extended period with the ESP switched off. This may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Maybach Limited Warranty. Switching on the ESP  Press switch 1 again. The ABS/ESP warning lamp v in the speedometer goes out. You are now again in normal driving mode with the ESP switched on. ! Turn on the ESP immediately if the aforementioned circumstances do not apply anymore. Safety and Security Driving safety systems The SBC brake system The SBC brake system combines a hydraulic brake circuit with electronically controlled brake servo assistance. You have increased braking safety and improved braking comfort. Warning! G Never ignore a brake malfunction indicated in the instrument cluster, for example by the ; (USA only) or 3 (Canada only) red brake warning lamp. Refer to the "Practical hints" section ( page 388). Also read and observe the messages in the instrument cluster display ( page 391). Warning! G The SBC brake system requires electrical power to operate. A malfunction in the vehicle’s power supply or electrical system may impair brake system operation and switch it into its emergency operation mode. In such a case, the red brake warning lamp ( page 388) and warning messages in the instrument cluster come on while driving (see page 400 to page 401). To brake, the driver must then apply significantly greater brake pedal pressure and depress the pedal much further to obtain the expected braking effect. If necessary, apply full pressure to the brake pedal. Brakes may only be applied to the front wheels. Stopping distance is increased! If there is a malfunction in the SBC brake system, we recommend that the vehicle be transported with all wheels off the ground using flatbed or appropriate wheel lift/dolly equipment. A tow bar must be used if circumstances do not permit the use of the recommended towing methods and the vehicle requires towing with all four wheels on the ground. Towing the vehicle with all four wheels on the ground is only permissible for distances up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a speed not to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). For more information, refer to "Towing the vehicle" ( page 447). 101 Safety and Security Driving safety systems The SBC brake system is automatically activated when you:
unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey or the KEYLESS-GO**
open the driver’s or passenger door
turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 1
in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO**, press the start/stop button ( page 55) on gear selector lever once
depress the brake pedal
release the parking brake i If the SBC brake system is activated when the brake pedal is first depressed, you may feel a reduced pedal resistance and longer pedal travel than normal. When releasing the pedal, you may also feel the brake pedal pulsate and you may hear a sound which is caused by the activation of the SBC pump. This is normal and not an indication of a malfunction. Pedal travel returns to normal when you release the brake pedal and the sound soon ceases. If you experience the above while driving and the red brake warning lamp ( page 388) illuminates and/or warning messages appear in the instrument cluster (see page 400 to page 401), the brake system is malfunctioning. Follow the instructions of the warning message(s) and have the brake system checked immediately. 102 Warning! G Have brake pad replacement and other work on the SBC brake system carried out by qualified technicians only. Contact an authorized Maybach Studio for further information. The SBC brake system must be deactivated prior to working on the system. High pressure is intermittently built up in the system as part of its automatic self-test. In addition, the system is automatically activated when the vehicle is unlocked by remote control, when the driver or passenger door is opened, when the starter switch is in position 1, when the brake pedal is depressed or when the parking brake is released. Failure to deactivate the system prior to maintenance will cause brake pistons to extend and brake fluid to leak, which may result in injuries (contusions and acid burns). Extended brake pistons may also cause injury. Safety and Security Driving safety systems The SBC brake servo assistance switches off automatically:
approximately two minutes after you turned the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 0 or removed the SmartKey
approximately two minutes after you pressed the KEYLESS-GO** start/stop button ( page 55) to turn off the engine or power supply and opened the driver’s door (with driver’s door open, the starter switch is set to position 0, same as SmartKey removed from starter switch)
approximately 20 seconds after you locked the vehicle from outside. Note on driving with the SBC
Following extended periods of only minor loads to your brake system, you should occasionally apply the brakes when traveling at high speeds. This improves the grip of the brake pads. Warning!
After driving on wet or snow-covered roads, you should apply your brakes firmly before parking your vehicle. This produces heat which serves to dry the brake disks and help prevent corrosion.
On long and steep grades, shift to a lower gear (gear range 1, 2 or 3) to prevent the brakes from overheating and to reduce brake wear.
After hard braking, it is advisable to drive on for some time so that the air stream will cool down the brakes faster.
Only components approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles (e.g. brake pads) should be installed on your vehicle. Brake pads not approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles may impair the safety of your vehicle. G Be very careful not to endanger other road users when you apply the brakes. 103 Safety and Security Anti-theft systems Immobilizer The immobilizer prevents unauthorized persons from starting your vehicle. With KEYLESS-GO**  Start the engine by means of the The alarm system will also be triggered when KEYLESS-GO start/stop button on the gear selector lever.
someone attempts to raise the vehicle Activating The immobilizer is deactivated.
With the SmartKey i the vehicle is opened with the mechanical key  Remove the SmartKey from the start- In case the engine cannot be started (yet the vehicle’s battery is charged), the system is not operational. Contact an authorized Maybach Studio or call 1-866-FOR-MAYBach (in the USA) or 1-888-881-6611 (in Canada).
someone opens a door from the inside if the vehicle was locked from the outside with the SmartKey
someone opens the trunk lid with the emergency release button er switch. The immobilizer is activated. With KEYLESS-GO**  Turn off the engine by means of the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button ( page 55) on the gear selector lever.  Open the driver’s door. The immobilizer is activated. Deactivating With the SmartKey  Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch. The immobilizer is deactivated. 104 Anti-theft alarm system Once the alarm system has been armed, a visual and audible alarm is triggered when someone opens
a door
the trunk
the hood The alarm will stay on even if the activating element (a door, for example) is immediately closed. i If the alarm stays on for more than 30 seconds, a call to the Response Center is initiated automatically by the Tele Aid system provided Tele Aid service was subscribed to and properly activated, and that necessary cellular service and GPS coverage are available. Safety and Security Anti-theft systems Arming the alarm system i Canceling the alarm The indicator lamp located below the hazard warning flasher switch in on the upper part of the front center console. If the turn signal lamps do not flash three times, one of the following elements may not be properly closed: To cancel the alarm:
a door  Insert the SmartKey in the starter
the trunk
the hood Close the respective element and lock the vehicle again. 1 Indicator lamp  Lock your vehicle. The turn signal lamps flash three times to indicate that the alarm system is activated. The indicator lamp 1 flashes to indicate that the alarm system is armed. With the SmartKey switch. or  Press button Œ or ‹. The alarm is canceled. Disarming the alarm system With KEYLESS-GO**  Unlock your vehicle.  Grasp the outside door handle. The turn signal lamps flash once to indicate that the alarm system is deactivated. i The alarm system will rearm automatically again after approximately 40 seconds if no door was opened. The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be within 3 ft (1 m) of the vehicle. or  Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button ( page 55). The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be inside the vehicle. The alarm is canceled. 105 Safety and Security Anti-theft systems Tow-away alarm Once the tow-away alarm is armed, a visual and audible alarm will be triggered when someone attempts to raise the vehicle. i The tow-away protection alarm is triggered, for example, if the vehicle is lifted on one side. Disarming the tow-away alarm To prevent triggering the tow-away alarm feature, switch off the tow-away alarm before towing the vehicle, or when parking on a surface subject to movement, such as a ferry or auto train. The button is located on the overhead control panel. If the alarm stays on for more than 30 seconds, a call to the Response Center is initiated automatically by the Tele Aid system provided Tele Aid service was subscribed to and properly activated, and that necessary cellular service and GPS coverage are available. Arming the tow-away alarm  Lock your vehicle. The tow-away alarm is automatically armed after about 30 seconds. 106  Switch off the ignition and remove the SmartKey from the starter switch. i You cannot disarm the tow-away alarm if the ignition is switched on.  Press button 1. The indicator lamp in the button comes on briefly.  Exit the vehicle and lock it with the SmartKey or (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO**) with the lock button at each outside door handle or trunk lid. i 1 Tow-away alarm off button When you unlock your vehicle, the tow-away protection disarms automatically. The tow-away alarm remains disarmed until you lock your vehicle again. Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Seats Memory function Lighting Instrument cluster Control system Automatic transmission Good visibility Automatic climate control Power windows Power tilt/sliding sunroof Electrotransparent roof* Driving systems Loading Useful features Pocket PC remote control* 107 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking In the "Controls in detail" section, you will find detailed information on how to operate the equipment installed on your vehicle. If you are already familiar with the basic functions of your vehicle, this section will be of particular interest to you. To quickly familiarize yourself with the basic functions of the vehicle, refer to the "Getting started" section of this manual. The corresponding page numbers are given at the beginning of each segment. For more information on locking and unlocking, see "Getting started" ( page 52) and ( page 74). SmartKey Your vehicle comes supplied with two SmartKeys, each with remote control and a removable mechanical key. The locking tabs for the mechanical key portion of the two SmartKeys are a different color to help distinguish each SmartKey unit. The SmartKey provides an extended operating range. To prevent theft, however, it is advisable to only unlock the vehicle when you are in close proximity to it. The SmartKey centrally locks and unlocks: 108
the doors
the trunk
the fuel filler flap SmartKey with remote control 1 2 3 4 5 6  Panic button ( page 95) ‹ Lock button Š Opening button for trunk Mechanical key locking tab Œ Unlock button Battery check lamp Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Warning! G When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. It is possible for children to open a looked door from the inside, which could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury. ! To prevent possible malfunction, avoid exposing the SmartKey to high levels of electromagnetic radiation. Factory setting Global unlocking  Press button Œ. All turn signal lamps flash once. The locking knobs in the doors move up. The anti-theft alarm system is switched off. The vehicle will lock again automatically and reactivate the anti-theft alarm system within approximately 40 seconds of unlocking if:
neither door nor trunk is opened
the SmartKey is not inserted in the starter switch i
When you unlock the vehicle, the SBC brake system is activated ( page 101). the central locking switch is not activated. Global locking Selective setting If you frequently travel alone, you may wish to reprogram the SmartKey so that pressing Œ only unlocks the driver's door and the fuel filler flap.  Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹ simultaneously for about six seconds until battery check lamp 6 flashes twice. The SmartKey will then function as follows: Unlocking driver's door and fuel filler flap  Press button Œ once. All turn signal lamps flash once. The locking knob in the driver's door moves up. The anti-theft alarm system is switched off.  Press button ‹. i You can also open and close the power windows ( page 220) and tilt/ sliding sunroof ( page 220) using the SmartKey. All turn signal lamps flash three times. The locking knobs in the doors move down. The anti-theft alarm system is activated. 109 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Global unlocking ! Checking the batteries  Press button Œ twice. If you can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey, then either the batteries in the SmartKey are discharged, the SmartKey is malfunctioning or the vehicle batteries are drained.  Press button Œ or ‹. All turn signal lamps flash once. The locking knobs in the doors move up. The anti-theft alarm system is switched off. Global locking
Check the batteries in the SmartKey and replace them if necessary ( page 429).
Use the mechanical key to unlock the driver’s door ( page 423) and trunk ( page 424).  Press button ‹. All turn signal lamps flash three times. The locking knobs in the doors move down. The anti-theft alarm system is activated.
Use the mechanical key to lock the driver’s door ( page 423).
Have the vehicle batteries and their connections checked ( page 441). Restoring to factory setting  Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹ simultaneously for about six seconds until battery check lamp 6 flashes twice. 110 If the SmartKey is malfunctioning, contact an authorized Maybach Studio. Battery check lamp 6 comes on briefly to indicate that the SmartKey batteries are in order. i If battery check lamp 6 does not come on briefly during check, then the SmartKey batteries are discharged. Replace the batteries ( page 429). You can obtain the required batteries at any authorized Maybach Studio. i If the batteries are checked within signal range of the vehicle, pressing button Œ or ‹ will lock or unlock the vehicle accordingly. Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Unlocking and opening the trunk Loss of SmartKey or mechanical key You can unlock and open the trunk separately. If you lose a SmartKey or mechanical key, you should do the following: A minimum height clearance of 6.2 ft (1.89 m) is required to open the trunk lid.  Have the SmartKey deactivated by an  Press and hold button Š until the  Report the loss of the SmartKey or trunk lid unlocks and begins to open. ! The trunk lid swings open upwards automatically. Always make sure there is sufficient overhead clearance. To stop the opening procedure, press button Š. The trunk lid stops moving. authorized Maybach Studio. the mechanical key immediately to your car insurance company.  If necessary, have the mechanical lock replaced. Your authorized Maybach Studio will be glad to supply you with a replacement. SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** Vehicles equipped with KEYLESS-GO come with two SmartKeys with KEYLESS-GO, each with remote control and a removable mechanical key. The locking tabs for the mechanical key portion of the two SmartKeys with KEYLESS-GO are a different color to help distinguish each SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO unit. The function of the SmartKey overrules the KEYLESS-GO function. The KEYLESS-GO function is integrated into the SmartKey. On these vehicles, the validity of the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is checked every time you grasp an outside door handle. If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is valid, your vehicle unlocks
the doors
the trunk
the fuel filler flap 111 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Warning! G When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO with you and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. It is possible for children to open a looked door from the inside, which could result in an accident and/ or serious personal injury. SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO 1 2 3 4 5 6  Panic button ( page 95) ‹ Lock button Š Opening button for trunk Mechanical key locking tab Œ Unlock button Battery check lamp ! i i When any outside door handle other than the driver’s outside door handle is grasped, the vehicle is centrally unlocked. 112 To prevent possible malfunction, avoid exposing the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO to high levels of electromagnetic radiation. If the vehicle has been parked for a longer period of time, you must grasp the outside door handle in order to activate the KEYLESS-GO function. i You can also open and close the power windows ( page 220) and tilt/ sliding sunroof ( page 220) using the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO. i When you unlock the vehicle, the SBC brake system is activated ( page 101). Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Important notes on using KEYLESS-GO

You can also use the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO like a normal SmartKey ( page 108). You can combine KEYLESS-GO functions with normal SmartKey functions (e.g. unlocking with KEYLESS-GO and locking with button ‹).
Always carry the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO with you.
Never store the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO together with:

electronic items such as a cellular phone or another SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO metallic objects such as coins or metal foil Doing so could impair the function of the KEYLESS-GO system.

To lock or unlock the vehicle, the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be located outside the vehicle within approximately 3 ft (1 m) of a door or the trunk lid.
In order to start the engine with the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO:
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be located in the vehicle.
All the doors must be closed.
The brake pedal must be firmly depressed. Do not depress the accelerator.
If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is positioned farther away from the vehicle, the system may no longer recognize the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO. The vehicle then cannot be locked or the engine started via the KEYLESS-GO system.
If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is removed from the vehicle while the ignition is switched on (e.g. if passenger exits the vehicle with the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO), the message KEY NOT RECOGNIZED will appear in the multifunction display while driving off. If you have started the engine with the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button ( page 55), you can only turn it off again with this button, even if you have put the SmartKey in the starter switch in the meantime. This does not apply if, after starting, the gear selector lever is still in position P and the SmartKey is then inserted in the starter switch. The SmartKey will then have priority over the KEYLESS-GO function and the vehicle’s electrical system will operate according to the position of the SmartKey in the starter switch, even stopping the engine. Find the SmartKey or change its present location immediately (e.g. place it on the front passenger seat or insert it in shirt pocket).
Remember that the engine can be started by anyone with a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO that is left inside the vehicle. If you leave the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO behind when exiting and locking the vehicle, the message KEY STILL IN VEHICLE will appear in the multifunction display. 113 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Factory setting Global unlocking  Grasp the outside door handle. All turn signal lamps flash once. The locking knobs in the doors move up. The anti-theft alarm system is switched off. The vehicle will lock again automatically and reactivate the anti-theft alarm system within approximately 40 seconds of unlocking if:
neither door nor trunk is opened
the central locking switch is not activated. i The vehicle could be inadvertently unlocked if the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is within 3 ft (1 m) of the vehicle and
the outside door handle is splashed with water, or
you attempt to clean the outside door handle. 114 Global locking  Press the lock button at the outside door handle ( page 76) or trunk lid ( page 115). All turn signal lamps flash three times. The locking knobs in the doors move down. The anti-theft alarm system is activated. Unlocking driver's door and fuel filler flap  Grasp the driver’s outside door han- dle. All turn signal lamps flash once. The locking knob in the driver's moves up. The anti-theft alarm system is switched off. Selective setting Global unlocking If you frequently travel alone, you may wish to reprogram the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO so when you grasp the driver’s outside door handle only the driver’s door and the fuel filler flap unlocks.  Grasp any outside door handle other  Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹ simultaneously for about five seconds until battery check lamp 6 flashes twice. The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO will then function as follows: than the driver’s outside door handle. All turn signal lamps flash once. The locking knobs in the doors move up. The anti-theft alarm system is switched off. Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Global locking i  Press the lock button at outside door handle ( page 76). You can also lock the vehicle using the lock button at outside door handle ( page 76) or KEYLESS-GO locking/closing switch ( page 122). All turn signal lamps flash three times. The locking knobs in the doors move down. The anti-theft alarm system is activated. Restoring to factory setting  Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹ i You can also lock the vehicle using the lock button at trunk lid ( page 115) or KEYLESS-GO locking/ closing switch ( page 122). Global locking using the lock button at trunk lid i To prevent a possible inadvertent lockout, the trunk will open automatically if a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is recognized inside the vehicle or in the trunk. 1 Lock button at trunk lid simultaneously for about six seconds until battery check lamp 6 flashes twice.  Press lock button at trunk lid 1. ! All turn signal lamps flash three times. The locking knobs in the doors move down. The anti-theft alarm system is activated. i If the vehicle was previously centrally locked with KEYLESS-GO, the trunk will lock automatically after closing it. The turn signals flash three times to confirm locking. If you can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO, then either the batteries in the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO are discharged, the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is malfunctioning or the vehicle batteries are drained.
Check the batteries in the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO and replace them if necessary ( page 429).
Use the mechanical key to unlock the driver’s door ( page 423) and  trunk ( page 424). 115 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking 
Use the mechanical key to lock the driver’s door ( page 423).
Have the vehicle batteries and their connections checked ( page 441). If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is malfunctioning, contact an authorized Maybach Studio. Checking the batteries  Press button Œ or ‹. Battery check lamp 6 comes on briefly to indicate that the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO batteries are in order. i If battery check lamp 6 does not come on briefly during check, then the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO batteries are discharged. Replace the batteries ( page 429). You can obtain the required batteries at any authorized Maybach Studio. 116 i Loss of the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO If the batteries are checked within signal range of the vehicle, pressing button Œ or ‹ will lock or unlock the vehicle accordingly. If you lose your SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO or mechanical key, you should do the following: Unlocking and opening the trunk You can unlock and open the trunk separately. A minimum height clearance of 6.2 ft (1.89 m) is required to open the trunk lid.  Press and hold button Š until the trunk lid unlocks and begins to open. ! The trunk lid swings open upwards automatically. Always make sure there is sufficient overhead clearance. To stop the opening procedure, press button Š. The trunk lid stops moving.  Have the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO deactivated by an authorized Maybach Studio.  Report the loss of the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO or the mechanical key immediately to your car insurance company.  Have the mechanical lock replaced if necessary. Your authorized Maybach Studio will be glad to supply you with a replacement. Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Opening the doors from the inside You can open a locked door from the inside. Open door only when conditions are safe to do so.  Pull on door handle 2 on the respec- tive rear door to open door. i If the vehicle has previously been locked from the outside using the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO**, opening a door from the inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm system. To cancel the alarm, do one of the following: 1 Locking knob 2 Inside door handle
Press button Œ or ‹ on the SmartKey.
Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch. G To prevent possible personal injury, always keep hands and fingers away from the door opening when closing the door. Be especially careful when small children are around. In case of danger, release the remote rear door closing switch to stop the closing procedure. Grasp the outside door handle. The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be within 3 ft (1 m) of the vehicle.  Pull on door handle 2 on the respec- tive front door to open door. Rear doors Warning! In vehicles with KEYLESS-GO**:
Front doors If door was locked, locking knob 1 will move up. Closing the rear doors automatically from the inside (Maybach 62) You can close the rear doors automatically.
Press the KEYLESS-GO** start/stop button ( page 55). The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be inside the vehicle.  Pull up locking knob 1 on the re- spective rear door to unlock door. 117 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking The remote rear door closing switch is above the rear door. i You can also close the rear doors by hand. In vehicles without KEYLESS-GO**: The vehicle must be unlocked.  Pull on handle 1. The trunk lid opens. Opening the trunk Opening the trunk from the outside A minimum height clearance of 6.2 ft (1.89 m) is required to open the trunk lid. The handle is located above the rear license plate recess. 1 Remote rear door closing switch  If necessary, pull the door into its lock by hand.  Release switch 1 to interrupt proce- dure. Only drive with the doors closed. Otherwise, one or more of the doors could open while the vehicle is in motion, putting you and/or others at risk. 118 To stop the opening procedure, press button Š on the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*. The trunk can also be opened using button Š on the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO**, or from its inside in an emergency, see "Trunk lid emergency release" ( page 123). pletely closed. G The trunk lid swings open automatically. Always make sure there is sufficient overhead clearance. i  Pull switch 1 until the door is com- Warning! ! 1 Handle Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Opening the trunk from the inside ! You can open the trunk from the inside if the vehicle is stationary. The trunk lid swings open automatically. Always make sure there is sufficient overhead clearance. A minimum height clearance of 6.2 ft (1.89 m) is required to open the trunk lid. The remote trunk lid switch is located on the dashboard to the left of the steering wheel. To stop the opening procedure, press or pull remote trunk lid switch 1. The trunk can also be opened using button Š on the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO**, or from its inside in an emergency, see "Trunk lid emergency release" ( page 123). Closing the trunk Closing the trunk from the inside  Press the remote trunk lid switch ( page 119) until the message TRUNK OPEN disappears from the instrument cluster and the trunk is closed. 1 Remote trunk lid switch  Pull remote trunk lid switch 1 until the trunk lid begins to open. The trunk lid opens. You will see the message TRUNK OPEN appear in the instrument cluster until you close the trunk. To interrupt the closing procedure:  Release the remote trunk lid switch. i You can also close the trunk by hand. Warning! G Maintain sight of trunk area while operating the remote trunk lid switch. Monitor the closing procedure carefully to make sure no one is in danger of being injured. To interrupt the closing procedure, release the remote trunk lid switch. Even with the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** removed from the starter switch or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** removed from the vehicle, the remote trunk lid switch can be operated. Therefore, do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury. Warning! G Only drive with the trunk closed as, among other dangers such as visibility blockage, exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle interior. 119 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking If the trunk lid comes into contact with an object while closing (e.g. luggage that has been piled too high) in the upper motion sequence, the closing procedure is stopped and the trunk re-opens slightly. Closing the trunk from the outside (vehicles without KEYLESS-GO**) i You can also close the trunk by hand. If the trunk lid comes into contact with an object while closing (e.g. luggage that has been piled too high) in the upper motion sequence, the closing procedure is stopped and the trunk re-opens slightly. You can close the trunk separately. Warning! G Monitor the closing procedure carefully to make sure no one is in danger of being injured. To prevent possible personal injury, always keep hands and fingers away from the trunk opening when closing the trunk. Be especially careful when small children are around. To stop the closing procedure, do one of the following:
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury. Warning! G Only drive with the trunk closed as, among other dangers such as visibility blockage, exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle interior. i Do not place the SmartKey in the open trunk. You may lock yourself out. press the trunk lid closing switch 1 1 Trunk lid closing switch
press button Š on the SmartKey i  Press trunk lid closing switch 1 brief-
press or pull the remote trunk lid switch (on the dashboard to the left of the steering wheel). If the vehicle was previously centrally locked, the trunk will lock automatically after closing it. The turn signals flash three times to confirm locking. ly. The trunk lid closes. 120 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Closing the trunk from the outside (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO**) You can close the trunk separately. If the trunk lid comes into contact with an object while closing (e.g. luggage that has been piled too high) in the upper motion sequence, the closing procedure is stopped and the trunk re-opens slightly. i To prevent a possible inadvertent lockout, the trunk lid will open automatically if a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is recognized inside the vehicle or in the trunk. 1 Trunk lid closing switch Warning! G  Make sure you have the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO with you.  Press switch 1 briefly. The trunk lid closes. i You can also close the trunk by hand. Monitor the closing procedure carefully to make sure no one is in danger of being injured. To prevent possible personal injury, always keep hands and fingers away from the trunk opening when closing the trunk. Be especially careful when small children are around. To stop the closing procedure, do one of the following:
press the trunk lid closing switch 1
press button Š on the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
press or pull the remote trunk lid switch (on the dashboard to the left of the steering wheel). When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO with you and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury. Warning! G Only drive with the trunk closed as, among other dangers such as visibility blockage, exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle interior. i If the vehicle was previously centrally locked, the trunk lid will lock automatically after closing it. The turn signals flash three times to confirm locking. 121 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Closing the trunk and locking the vehicle from the outside (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO**) You can close the trunk and lock the vehicle simultaneously. i
press the trunk lid closing switch 1 You can also close the trunk by hand.
press button Š on the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO If the trunk lid comes into contact with an object while closing (e.g. luggage that has been piled too high) in the upper motion sequence, the closing procedure is stopped and the trunk re-opens slightly.
press or pull the remote trunk lid switch (on the dashboard to the left of the steering wheel). i To prevent a possible inadvertent lockout, the trunk lid will open automatically if a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is recognized inside the vehicle or in the trunk. 1 KEYLESS-GO locking/closing switch  Make sure you have the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO with you.  Press switch 1 briefly. The vehicle is locked and the trunk lid closes automatically. All turn signal lamps flash three times. The locking knobs in the doors move down. The anti-theft alarm system is activated. 122 Warning! G Monitor the closing procedure carefully to make sure no one is in danger of being injured. To prevent possible personal injury, always keep hands and fingers away from the trunk opening when closing the trunk. Be especially careful when small children are around. To stop the closing procedure, do one of the following: When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO with you and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury. Warning! G Only drive with the trunk closed as, among other dangers such as visibility blockage, exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle interior. Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Trunk lid emergency release The emergency release button is located on the inside of the trunk lid.  Briefly press emergency release button 1. The trunk lid unlocks and opens slightly.  Push up the trunk lid to fully open. i The emergency release button unlocks the trunk while the vehicle is standing still or in motion. Illumination of the emergency release button: 1 Emergency release button

i If the vehicle has previously been locked from the outside using the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO**, opening the trunk from the inside using the emergency release button will trigger the anti-theft alarm system. To cancel the alarm, do one of the following:
Press button Œ or ‹ on the SmartKey.
Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch. The button flashes for 30 minutes after opening the trunk. The button flashes for 60 minutes after closing the trunk. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO**:
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be within 3 ft. (1 m) of the vehicle. i The emergency release button does not unlock the trunk if the vehicle battery is discharged or disconnected. Grasp the outside door handle.
Press the KEYLESS-GO** start/stop button ( page 55). The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be inside the vehicle. 123 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Power closing assist for doors and trunk lid It is not necessary to slam the door or trunk lid closed. A pneumatic power assist mechanism draws doors and trunk lid closed quietly and automatically once the door or trunk lid has been latched. When the pneumatic power-assisted mechanism has stopped, doors and/or trunk can be re-opened. Warning! G To prevent possible personal injury, always keep hands and fingers away from the door or trunk opening when closing a door or the trunk lid. Be especially careful when small children are around. In case of danger, pull the inside or outside door handle, or pull on trunk lid handle. To prevent personal injury, never activate the closing assist mechanism by tampering with the door or trunk lid latch. 124 Power closing assist for doors  Press the doors gently past the initial engage position into the lock. The doors close automatically. Warning! G Only drive with the doors closed. Otherwise, one or more of the doors could open while the vehicle is in motion, putting you and/or others at risk. Power closing assist for trunk lid  Press the trunk lid gently into its lock. The trunk closes automatically. Warning! G Only drive with the trunk closed as, among other dangers such as visibility blockage, exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle interior. Automatic central locking The doors and the trunk automatically lock when the ignition is switched on and the wheels are turning at speeds of approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or more. You can open a locked door from the inside. Open door only when conditions are safe to do so. i The doors unlock automatically after an accident if the force of the impact exceeds a preset threshold. The vehicle locks automatically when the ignition is switched on and the wheels are turning at vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or more. You could therefore lock yourself out when the vehicle
is pushed or towed
is on a test stand You can deactivate the automatic locking using the control system ( page 181). Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Locking and unlocking from the inside You can lock or unlock the doors and the trunk from inside using the central locking switch. This can be useful, for example, if you want to lock the vehicle before starting to drive. Your vehicle is equipped with locking and unlocking switches for the driver and rear seat passengers. The rear seat passengers switches are located on the rear center console between the rear seats. The driver’s switches are located on the upper part of the front center console. The fuel filler flap will not be locked or unlocked with the central locking or unlocking switch, respectively. Warning! G When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury. Rear seat passengers switches (example illustration from Maybach 57) Driver’s switches 1 Central locking switch 2 Central unlocking switch 1 Central locking switch 2 Central unlocking switch 125 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Locking i  Press central locking switch 1. You can open a locked door from the inside. Open door only when conditions are safe to do so. If all doors are closed, the vehicle locks. Unlocking  Press central unlocking switch 2. The vehicle unlocks. 126 If the vehicle was previously centrally locked using the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO**, it will not unlock using the central unlocking switch 2. If the vehicle was previously locked with the central locking switch 1:
While in the global remote control mode, the vehicle is unlocked when a door is opened from the inside.
While in the selective remote control mode, only the door opened from inside is unlocked. Controls in detail Seats  Seats For more information on seat adjustment, see "Adjusting" ( page 57). Easy-entry/exit feature This feature allows for easier entry into and exit from the vehicle. The easy-entry/exit feature can be activated or deactivated in the CONVENIENCE submenu of the control system ( page 183). Warning! G You must make sure no one can become trapped or injured by the moving steering wheel and driver’s seat when the easy-entry/exit feature is activated. When exiting the vehicle, with the easyentry/exit feature activated and depending on your selection, the steering wheel tilts upwards and/or the driver’s seat moves a few inches to the rear when you
To cancel seat/steering wheel movement, do one of the following: or

Press seat adjustment switch ( page 58).
Move steering column stalk ( page 60).
Press one of the memory position buttons or the memory button M ( page 141). remove the SmartKey from the starter switch, open the driver’s door with the SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or 1 or the KEYLESS-GO** start/stop button ( page 55) in position 1. The steering wheel and driver’s seat stop moving. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could open the driver’s door and unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit feature, which could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury. 127 Controls in detail Seats i If the current position for the steering wheel is in the uppermost tilt position, the steering wheel will no longer be able to move upward when the easy-entry/exit feature is activated. If the current seat position falls into a factory-set position range and the system recognizes the current seat position to be rearward enough for easy entry and exit, the driver’s seat will not move to the rear when the easy-entry/exit feature is activated. 128 When entering the vehicle with the easy-entry/exit feature activated, the steering wheel or, depending on your selection, the steering wheel and driver’s seat will return to their last set position or a factory-set maximum forward position when you
close the driver’s door with the ignition switched on
insert the SmartKey into the starter switch or press the KEYLESS-GO** start/stop button ( page 55) once with the driver’s door closed. i For safety reasons, the driver’s seat will not return to its last set position with the easy-entry/exit feature activated if the system recognizes the last set position as an extreme forward position. Instead, the driver’s seat will remain at or move to a factory-set maximum forward position. To again fully return the driver’s seat to your last set position or to memory position, adjust the seat to the desired position or press and hold the respective memory position button ( page 141). Controls in detail Seats  In addition to adjusting the head re- Rear seats straint tilt using the corresponding power control on the rear door control panel, the angle of the head restraint can also be adjusted manually. Push or pull on the lower edge of the head restraint cushion. Head restraint tilt For information on front seat head restraint adjustment, see "Adjusting" ( page 59). i Maybach 62 1 Head restraints 2 Head restraint side cushions  Adjust the side cushions of the head restraints by hand. Maybach 57 1 Head restraints 2 Head restraint side cushions Adjust the head restraint in such a way that it is as close to the head as possible. Rear seat adjustment (Maybach 57) i To adjust settings for the right rear passenger seat, make sure the right rear passenger seat adjustment button is selected ( page 135).  Switch on ignition ( page 54). or  Open the respective door.  129 Controls in detail Seats  Warning! i G Adjust the head restraint in such a way that it is as close to the head as possible. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. The seats can also be operated with the door open. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury. i The rear center seat* cannot be adjusted. Warning! For your protection, drive only with properly positioned head restraints. 1 2 3 4 5 Head restraint height Head restraint tilt Seat backrest tilt Seat fore and aft adjustment Seat cushion tilt Head restraint height  Press switch up or down in direction of arrow 1. Head restraint tilt  Press switch forward or backward in direction of arrow 2. 130 G Adjust head restraint so that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at eye level. This will reduce the potential for injury to the head and neck in the event of an accident or similar situation. Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head restraints. Head restraints are intended to help reduce injuries during an accident. Controls in detail Seats Seat backrest tilt Seat fore and aft adjustment  Press switch forward or backward in  Press switch forward or backward in direction of arrow 3 until your arms are slightly angled when holding the steering wheel. i Tilt the seat backrest to the rear for easier removal and installation of the head restraints. direction of arrow 4. i When moving the seat, be sure that there are no items in the footwell or behind the seats. Otherwise you could damage the seats. The functions for adjusting backrest tilt and seat fore and aft are linked functions. When the seat is adjusted fore and aft, the backrest tilt is adjusted simultaneously, and vice versa. i To adjust settings for the right rear passenger seat, make sure the right rear passenger seat adjustment button is selected ( page 135)  Switch on ignition ( page 54). or Seat cushion tilt i Rear seat adjustment (Maybach 62)  Open the respective door.  Press switch up or down in direction of arrow 5 until your upper legs are lightly supported. Warning! G When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. The seats can also be operated with the respective door open. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury. 131 Controls in detail Seats Fully reclined/upright position  To adjust seat to fully reclined posi- tion, press switch 1.  Press and hold switch 1 until seat is in desired position. To stop the seat adjustment procedure, release switch 1.  To adjust seat to upright position, press switch 2. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 a Fully reclined position Upright position Head restraint height Head restraint tilt Seat backrest tilt Seat cushion depth Seat cushion tilt Seat fore and aft adjustment Leg rest length Leg rest tilt i The rear center seat* cannot be adjusted.  Press and hold switch 2 until seat is in desired position. To stop the seat adjustment procedure, release switch 2. Head restraint height  Press switch up or down in direction G For your protection, drive only with properly positioned head restraints. Adjust head restraint so that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at eye level. This will reduce the potential for injury to the head and neck in the event of an accident or similar situation. Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head restraints. Head restraints are intended to help reduce injuries during an accident. Seat backrest tilt  Press switch forward or backward in Head restraint tilt direction of arrow 5 until your arms are slightly angled when holding the steering wheel.  Press switch forward or backward in i of arrow 3. direction of arrow 4. i Adjust the head restraint in such a way that it is as close to the head as possible. 132 Warning! The functions for adjusting backrest tilt and seat fore and aft are linked functions. When the seat is adjusted fore and aft, the backrest tilt is adjusted simultaneously, and vice versa. Controls in detail Seats Seat cushion depth Leg rest tilt Retracting rear seat head restraints  Press switch forward or backward in  Press switch up or down in direction The switch is located on the lower part of the front center console. direction of arrow 6 until your legs are supported comfortably. Seat cushion tilt of arrow a to adjust the leg rest tilt. Extending and retracting the rear seat head restraints  Press switch up or down in direction of arrow 7 until your upper legs are lightly supported. Seat fore and aft adjustment  Press switch forward or backward in direction of arrow 8. i When moving the seat, be sure that there are no items in the footwell or behind the seats. Otherwise you could damage the seats. Leg rest length  Press switch up or down in direction of arrow 9 to adjust the leg rest length. Warning! G For your protection, drive only with properly positioned head restraints. Adjust head restraint so that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at eye level. This will reduce the potential for injury to the head and neck in the event of an accident or similar situation. Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head restraints. Head restraints are intended to help reduce injuries during an accident. 1 Switch for rear seat head restraints  Switch on ignition ( page 54).  Press switch 1. The rear seat head restraints retract. i You can only retract the rear seat head restraints when no rear seat passenger is wearing a seat belt. 133 Controls in detail Seats Extending rear seat head restraints  Press switch 1 again. or  A rear seat passenger fastens a seat Extending/retracting the rear center seat* head restraint The switch is on the lower right side of the rear center seat.  Press switch 1 and hold it. The rear seat head restraint retracts until you release the switch.  Press switch 2 and hold it. belt. The rear seat head restraint extends until you release the switch. The rear seat head restraints extend. i i You can also adjust head restraints with the seat adjustment switches in the rear passenger compartment ( page 130) or ( page 132). Vehicles with rear center seat*: For operation with the Pocket PC remote control* ( page 331). 1 Extending 2 Retracting 134  Switch on ignition ( page 54). Controls in detail Seats Setting front passenger seat position from rear This function lets you adjust the position of the front passenger seat from the right rear passenger seat. The switch is located on the right rear passenger door. Warning! G When adjusting the passenger seat, make sure the seat, if occupied, is as far from the passenger front airbag as possible. Otherwise, the passenger could be seriously or even fatally injured in the event of an accident or braking maneuver. Make sure no one is caught or injured while the seat is being adjusted. Example illustration from Maybach 57 1 2 3 4 5 6 Front passenger seat adjustment Right rear passenger seat adjustment Seat fore and aft adjustment Seat cushion tilt Seat backrest tilt Head restraint height Even with the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** removed from the starter switch or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** removed from the vehicle, the power seats can be operated when the respective door is open. Therefore, do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury.  Switch on ignition ( page 54). or  Open the right rear passenger door.  Press switch 1.  Adjust passenger seat to desired posi- tion using switches 3 through 6.  To adjust right rear passenger seat, press button 2. i Adjusting the front passenger seat position from the rear is not possible if you activate the override switch ( page 94). ! Do not move the front passenger seat completely forward if objects are stored in the parcel net in the front passenger-side footwell. Items in the net may be damaged. 135 Controls in detail Seats Multicontour seats The multicontour seat has a movable seat cushion and inflatable air cushions built into the seat backrest to provide additional lumbar and side support. The switches for the front seats are located on the inner side of the seat. The switches for the rear seats on Maybach 57 are located on the inner side of the seat. The seat cushion movement, seat backrest cushion height and curvature can be continuously varied with regulators on the right side of the seat after switching on ignition. i Vehicles with rear center seat*: The rear center seat is not a multicontour seat. 136 Driver’s seat/front passenger seat 1 2 3 4 Lumbar region support Shoulder region support Side bolster adjustment Massage function (PULSE) Rear seats (Maybach 57) 1 2 3 4 Lumbar region support Shoulder region support Side bolster adjustment Massage function (PULSE) Controls in detail Seats The switches for the rear seats on Maybach 62 are located on the outer side of the seat. Lumbar region support Massage function (PULSE)  Press k or j on rocker You can reduce muscle tension during long trips by periodically using the massage function. switch 1. This selects the air cushion you wish to adjust.  Press æ or ç on rocker switch 1. The air cushion inflates or deflates. i  Press æ or ç on switch 2. The massage function switches off automatically after approximately eight minutes. The indicator lamp goes out. Rear seats (Maybach 62) Lumbar region support Shoulder region support Side bolster adjustment Massage function (PULSE)  Switch on ignition ( page 54). The indicator lamp on button 4 comes on. The air cushions in the lumbar region inflate and deflate rhythmically. Shoulder region support The air cushion inflates or deflates. 1 2 3 4  Press button 4. Side bolster adjustment  Adjust the side bolsters so that they provide good lateral support using switch 3. i When the engine is turned off, the last cushion setting is retained in memory, and the cushion is automatically adjusted to this setting when the engine is restarted. 137 Controls in detail Seats Seat heating The red indicator lamps in the switch show the heating level selected: The switch is located on the respective door. i If one or all of the lamps on the seat heating switch are flashing, there is insufficient voltage due to too many electrical consumers are turned on. The seat heating switches off automatically. Three indicator lamps on. After approximately five minutes, seat heating is automatically switched to level 2. 2 1 off Two indicator lamps on. After approximately ten minutes, seat heating is automatically switched to level 1. Example illustration from Maybach with seat ventilation* One indicator lamp on.  Switch on ignition ( page 54). After approximately 20 minutes, seat heating is automatically switched off. Switching on seat heating No indicator lamp on. i The rear center seat* cannot be heated. 138  Press switch 1 repeatedly until all in- dicator lamps go out. Level 3 Switching off seat heating 1 Seat heating switch  Press switch 1 twice. Three red indicator lamps in the switch come on.  Continue pressing switch 1 until de- sired seat heating level is reached. The seat heating will switch back on again automatically as soon as sufficient voltage is available. Controls in detail Seats Seat ventilation* The switch is located on the respective door. i Switching off seat ventilation The rear center seat* cannot be ventilated.  Press switch 1 repeatedly until all in-  Switch on ignition ( page 54). Switching on seat ventilation  Press switch 1. Three blue indicator lamps in the switch come on.  Continue pressing switch 1 until the desired seat ventilation level is reached. 1 Seat ventilation switch i The blue indicator lamps in the switch show the ventilation level selected: The seat ventilation for the driver’s seat can be activated using summer opening feature ( page 220). Level 3 Three indicator lamps on. 2 Two indicator lamps on. 1 One indicator lamp on. off No indicator lamp on. dicator lamps go out. i If one or all of the lamps flash on the seat ventilation switch, there is insufficient voltage due to too many electrical consumers being switched on. The seat ventilation switches off automatically. The seat ventilation will switch back on again automatically as soon as sufficient voltage is available. 139 Controls in detail Memory function ! Prior to operating the vehicle, the driver should check and adjust the seat height, seat position fore and aft, and seat backrest angle if necessary, to ensure adequate control, reach and comfort. The head restraint should also be adjusted for proper height. See also the section on airbags ( page 79) for proper seat positioning. In addition, adjust the steering wheel to ensure adequate control, reach, operation and comfort. Both the inside and outside rear view mirrors should be adjusted for adequate rear vision. Fasten seat belts. Infants and small children should be seated in a properly secured restraint system that complies with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 and 225 and Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 and 210.2. 140 You can store up to five different settings for each SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO**. The following settings are saved for each stored position:
Seat and seat backrest position
Settings for multicontour seat The following additional settings can be saved in the driver’s seat:
Steering wheel position
Interior rear view mirror position
Exterior rear view mirror position
Automatic climate control In the driver’s seat, you can program keydependent memory settings. You can store up to five different settings per SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO**. The key-dependent memory functions as soon as you:
insert the SmartKey into the starter switch or in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO**
press the start/stop button ( page 55) on the gear selector lever. These key-dependent memory settings can be deactivated if desired. For more information, see "Setting key dependency" ( page 182). Controls in detail Memory function Warning! G Do not activate the memory function while driving. Activating the memory function while driving could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. The memory button and stored position switch are located on the respective door.  Switch on ignition ( page 54). Recalling positions from memory or !  Open the respective door. Do not operate the power seats using the memory button if the seat backrest is in an extremely reclined position. Doing so could cause damage to front or rear seats. Storing positions in memory  Adjust the seats, steering wheel and mirrors to the desired position ( page 57).  Press memory button M. First move seat backrest to an upright position.  Release memory button M and push memory position button 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 within three seconds. All the settings are stored at the selected position.  Press and hold memory position button 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 until the seat, steering wheel and mirrors have fully moved to the stored positions. i Releasing the button immediately stops movement to the stored positions. Example illustration from Maybach 57 1 Memory button M 2 Memory position buttons 1 - 5 141 Controls in detail Memory function Storing exterior rear view mirror parking position For easier parking you can adjust the passenger exterior rear view mirror so that you can see the right rear wheel as soon as you engage reverse gear R. The buttons are located on the driver’s door. with button 2 so that you see the rear wheel and the road curb.  Press memory button 3.  Within three seconds, press bottom of adjustment button 2. The parking position is stored if the mirror does not move. i 1 Exterior rear view mirror (passengerside) 2 Adjustment button 3 Memory button M  Stop the vehicle.  Switch on ignition ( page 54). 142 The passenger-side exterior rear view mirror is selected.  Adjust the exterior rear view mirror For information on activating the parking position, see "Setting parking position for exterior rear view mirror" ( page 184). You can store a parking position for the passenger side exterior rear view mirror for each SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO**.  Press button 1. i If the mirror does move, repeat the above steps. After the setting is stored, you can move the mirror again. Controls in detail Lighting  Lighting For information on how to switch on the headlamps and use the turn signals, see "Switching on headlamps" ( page 70) and "Turn signals" ( page 71). Exterior lamp switch The exterior lamp switch is located on the dashboard to the left of the steering wheel. M Off Daytime running lamp mode ( page 145) U Automatic headlamp mode Daytime running lamp mode ( page 145) i If you drive in countries where vehicles drive on the other side of the road than the country where the vehicle is registered, you must have the headlamps modified for symmetrical low beams. Relevant information can be obtained at an authorized Maybach Studio. Exterior lamp switch C Parking lamps (also side marker lamps, tail lamps, license plate lamps, instrument panel lamps) B Low beam headlamps (or high beam headlamps when the combination switch is pushed forward) and parking lamps ˆ Standing lamps, right (turn left one stop) ‚ Standing lamps, left (turn left two stops) C Indicator lamp for parking lamps ‡ Indicator lamp for front fog lamps † Indicator lamp for rear fog lamp 143 Controls in detail Lighting i G With the SmartKey removed from the starter switch or the engine turned off with KEYLESS-GO** and the driver’s door open, a warning sounds if the parking lamps or low beam headlamps are switched on. Warning!
the headlamps may switch off unexpectedly when the system senses bright ambient light, for example light from oncoming traffic. The message TURN OFF LIGHTS appears in the multifunction display.
the headlamps will not be automatically switched on under foggy conditions. Manual headlamp mode The low beam headlamps and parking lamps can be switched on and off with the exterior lamp switch. Automatic headlamp mode The following lamps switch on and off automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light:
Low beam headlamps
Tail and parking lamps
License plate lamps
Side marker lamps 144 If the exterior lamp switch is set to U, To minimize risk to you and to others, activate headlamps by turning exterior lamp switch to B when driving or when traffic and/or ambient lighting conditions require you to do so. In low ambient lighting conditions, only switch from position U to B with the vehicle at a standstill. Switching from U to B will briefly switch off the headlamps. Doing so while driving in low ambient lighting conditions may result in an accident. The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid to the driver. The driver is responsible for the operation of the vehicle's lights at all times. i The front fog lamps and rear fog lamp cannot be switched on manually with exterior lamp switch in position U. To activate the fog lamps, turn exterior lamp switch to position B and pull the exterior lamp switch to first or second stop ( page 146).  Turn the exterior lamp switch to position U. With the SmartKey in starter switch position 1 or the KEYLESS-GO** start/ stop button pressed once, only the parking lamps will switch on and off automatically. When the engine is running, the low beam headlamps, the tail and parking lamps, the license plate lamps, and the side marker lamps will switch on and off automatically. Controls in detail Lighting Daytime running lamp mode Canada only USA only  Turn exterior lamp switch to The daytime running lamp mode is mandatory and therefore in a constant mode. By default, the daytime running lamp mode is deactivated. Activate the daytime running lamp mode using the control system, see "Setting daytime running lamp mode (USA only)" ( page 177). position M or U. When the engine is running, the low beam headlamps are switched on. In low ambient light conditions, the following lamps will switch on additionally:
tail and parking lamps
license plate lamps
side marker lamps For nighttime driving you should turn the exterior lamp switch to position B to permit activation of the high beam headlamps. i With the daytime running lamp mode activated and the exterior lamp switch in position M, the high beam headlamps cannot be switched on. When the engine is running, and you shift from a driving position to position N or P, the low beam headlamps will switch off with a three-minute delay. When the engine is running, and you
turn the exterior lamp switch to position C, the parking lamps switch on additionally.
turn the exterior lamp switch to position B, the manual headlamp mode has priority over the daytime running lamp mode. The corresponding exterior lamps switch on ( page 430). When the engine is running, and you turn the exterior lamp switch to position C or B, the manual headlamp mode has priority over the daytime running lamp mode. The corresponding exterior lamps switch on ( page 430). Locator lighting and night security illumination Locator lighting and night security illumination are described in the control system section under "Setting locator lighting" ( page 178) and "Setting night security illumination" ( page 179). The high beam flasher is available at all times. 145 Controls in detail Lighting i Switching on fog lamps Warning! G In low ambient lighting or foggy conditions, only switch from position U to B with the vehicle at a standstill. Switching from U to B will briefly switch off the headlamps. Doing so while driving in low ambient lighting conditions may result in an accident. Fog lamps cannot be switched on with exterior lamp switch in position U. For switching on the fog lamps, turn exterior lamp switch to position B first.  Switch on the front fog lamps ( page 146).  Pull out exterior lamp switch to sec- ond stop. Switching on front fog lamps The rear fog lamps are switched on.  Switch on the low beam headlamps ( page 70). The green indicator lamp † in the exterior lamp switch comes on ( page 143).  Pull out exterior lamp switch to first i stop. Fog lamps will operate with the parking lamps and/or the low beam headlamps on. Fog lamps should only be used in conjunction with low beam headlamps. Consult your State or Province Motor Vehicle Regulations regarding permissible lamp operation. The front fog lamps are switched on. 146 Switching on rear fog lamp (driver’s side only) The green indicator lamp ‡ in the exterior lamp switch comes on ( page 143).  Push down the exterior lamp switch. The front fog lamps are switched off. The green indicator lamp ‡ in the exterior lamp switch goes out.  Push down the exterior lamp switch to first stop. The rear fog lamps are switched off. The green indicator lamp † in the exterior lamp switch goes out. The front fog lamps remain lit. Controls in detail Lighting Combination switch The combination switch is located on the left side of the steering column. High beam  Turn exterior lamp switch to position B or U ( page 143).  Push the combination switch in direc- tion of arrow 1 to switch on the high beam. The high beam indicator lamp A in the instrument cluster comes on.  Pull the combination switch in direc- tion of arrow 2 to its original position to switch off the high beam. 1 High beam 2 High beam flasher The high beam headlamp indicator lamp A in the instrument cluster goes out. Hazard warning flasher The hazard warning flasher can be switched on at all times, even with the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** removed from the starter switch or with the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** removed from the vehicle. The hazard warning flasher switches on automatically when an airbag deploys. The hazard warning flasher switch is located on the upper part of the front center console. High beam flasher  Pull the combination switch briefly in direction of arrow 2. 1 Hazard warning flasher switch 147 Controls in detail Lighting Switching on the hazard warning flasher  Press the hazard warning flasher switch 1. Interior lighting in the front The controls are located in the overhead control panel. The interior lighting switches on in darkness when you: i With the hazard warning flasher activated and the combination switch set for either left or right turn, only the respective left or right turn signal will operate when the SmartKey in the starter switch is in position 1 or 2 or the KEYLESS-GO** start/stop button ( page 55) is pressed once or twice.  Press hazard warning flasher switch 1 again. 1 2 3 4 5 Left front reading lamp on/off Rear interior lighting on/off Automatic control on/off Front interior lighting on/off Right front reading lamp on/off i i If the hazard warning flasher was activated automatically, also press hazard warning flasher switch 1 to switch off the hazard warning flasher. Leaving an interior light switch in the ON position for extended periods of time with the engine turned off could result in a discharged battery. 148 Activating  Press automatic control switch 3. All turn signals flash. Switching off the hazard warning flasher Automatic control
the vehicle is unlocked
remove the SmartKey from the starter switch
open a door The interior lighting switches off automatically following an adjustable time delay. For more information, see "Setting interior lighting delayed shut-off" ( page 180). i If the door remains open, the interior lighting switches off automatically after approximately five minutes. Controls in detail Lighting Deactivating  Press automatic control switch 3 again. The interior lighting remains switched off in darkness, even when you:
unlock the vehicle
remove the SmartKey from the starter switch
open a door Manual control or 5 again to switch off the respective front reading lamp. Front interior lighting  Press front interior lighting switch 4. The front interior lighting switches on.  Press front interior lighting switch 4 again. The front interior lighting switches off. i Rear interior lighting The trunk lighting switches on when you open the trunk. It switches off when you close the trunk.  Press rear interior lighting switch 2. If the trunk lid remains open, the trunk lighting switches off automatically after approximately ten minutes.  Press front reading lamp switch 1 The rear interior lighting switches on.  Press rear interior lighting switch 2 again. The rear interior lighting switches off. Front reading lamps The front reading lamps are located in the overhead control panel. Courtesy lighting For better orientation in the dark, courtesy lamps will illuminate the interior of your vehicle as follows. With the automatic control activated:
the inside door handles
the driver and passenger footwells With the automatic control activated and the SmartKey in the starter switch position 1:
the inside door handles
the center console i If you turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 0 and switch off the exterior headlamps, the door entry lamps will remain lit for approximately five minutes.  Press front reading lamp switch 1 or 5 to switch on the desired front reading lamp. 149 Controls in detail Lighting Interior lighting in the rear The control panel is located between the rear seats. i Leaving an interior light switch in the ON position for extended periods of time with the engine turned off could result in a discharged battery. i Vehicles with rear center seat*: For operation with the Pocket PC remote control* ( page 320). 150 Maybach 57 with rear side window curtains* 1 2 3 4 Left rear reading lamp on/off Right rear reading lamp on/off Ambient lighting on/off Thumbwheel for dimming ambient lighting 5 Rear interior lighting on/off Maybach 57 without rear side window curtains* 1 2 3 4 Left rear reading lamp on/off Right rear reading lamp on/off Rear interior lighting on/off Thumbwheel for dimming ambient lighting 5 Ambient lighting on/off Controls in detail Lighting Maybach 62 with tilt/sliding sunroof Maybach 62 with electrotransparent roof* 1 Left rear reading lamp on/off 2 Right rear reading lamp on/off 3 Headliner lamps and pillar uplights on/off 4 Thumbwheel for dimming ambient lighting and headliner lamps and pillar uplights 5 Ambient lighting on/off 6 Rear interior lighting on/off 1 2 3 4 Left rear reading lamp on/off Right rear reading lamp on/off Roof lighting on/off Thumbwheel for dimming ambient lighting and roof lighting 5 Ambient lighting on/off 6 Rear interior lighting on/off 151 Controls in detail Lighting Manual control Ambient lighting Headliner lamps and pillar uplights* Rear interior lighting The ambient lighting switches on and off automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light. In Maybach 62 with tilt/sliding sunroof, the headliner and pillar can be illuminated. You can switch on or off ambient lighting manually.  Press switch 3 to switch the headlin-  Press the switch at the ð symbol to  Press switch 3 to switch the headlin-  Press the switch at the ò symbol to switch the rear interior lighting on.  Press the switch at the ò symbol again to switch the rear interior lighting off. Rear reading lamps  Press respective switch 1 or 2 at X symbol to switch the corresponding rear reading lamps on.  Press respective switch 1 or 2 at X symbol again to switch the corresponding rear reading lamps off. 152 switch the ambient lighting on.  Press the switch at the ð symbol to switch the ambient lighting off. Dimming ambient lighting, headliner lamps and pillar uplights* and roof lighting*  Turn thumbwheel 4 until the cur- rent ambient lighting has reached the desired intensity. er lamps and pillar uplights on. er lamps and pillar uplights off. Electrotransparent roof lighting* In Maybach 62 with an electrotransparent roof, the roof lining can be illuminated when the screen is closed.  Press switch 3 to switch the roof lighting on.  Press switch 3 to switch the roof lighting off. Controls in detail Instrument cluster  Instrument cluster For a full view illustration of the instrument cluster, see "At a glance" ( page 24). Warning! The instrument cluster is activated when you: No messages will be displayed if either the instrument cluster or the multifunction display is inoperative.
open a door
switch on ignition ( page 54)
press reset button J ( page 25) in the instrument cluster
switch on the exterior lamps If you open a door or press reset button J without turning on the ignition or the light, the multifunction display is only illuminated for approximately 30 seconds. You can change the instrument cluster settings in the Instrument cluster submenu of the control system ( page 175). G Contact your nearest authorized Maybach Studio. Instrument cluster illumination Use the knob for instrument cluster illumination ( page 25) to adjust the illumination brightness for the instrument cluster. i  Press the knob for instrument cluster illumination. The knob will pop out. To brighten illumination  Turn the knob clockwise. The instrument cluster illumination will brighten. To dim illumination  Turn the knob in the instrument clus- ter counterclockwise. The instrument cluster illumination will dim. The instrument cluster illumination is dimmed or brightened automatically to suit ambient light conditions. The instrument cluster illumination will also be adjusted automatically when you switch on the vehicle’s exterior lamps. 153 Controls in detail Instrument cluster i Coolant temperature gauge Warning!

G Driving when your engine is badly overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. You could be seriously burned. Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns and can occur just by opening the hood. Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it. Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until the engine has cooled down. 154 Excessive coolant temperature trigger a warning in the multifunction display ( page 404). During severe operating conditions, e.g. stop-and-go traffic, the coolant temperature may rise close to 248°F (120°C), i.e. close to the red zone of the coolant temperature gauge. The engine should not be operated with the coolant temperature above 248° F (120°C), i.e. in the red zone of the coolant temperature gauge. Doing so may cause serious engine damage which is not covered by the Maybach Limited Warranty. Trip odometer  Make sure you are viewing the trip odometer display ( page 157).  If it is not displayed, press button è or ÿ on the multifunction steering wheel repeatedly until the trip odometer appears ( page 157).  Press and hold reset button J ( page 25) in the instrument cluster until the trip odometer is reset. Controls in detail Instrument cluster Tachometer The red marking on the tachometer denotes excessive engine speed. ! Avoid driving at excessive engine speeds, as it may result in serious engine damage that is not covered by the Maybach Limited Warranty. To help protect the engine, the fuel supply is interrupted if the engine is operated within the red marking. Outside temperature indicator Warning! G The outside temperature indicator is not designed to serve as an ice-warning device and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. Indicated temperatures just above the freezing point do not guarantee that the road surface is free of ice. The road may still be icy, especially in wooded areas or on bridges. The outside temperature is indicated in the instrument cluster for the driver ( page 25) and in the roof lining for the rear seat passengers ( pages 33, 35 or 37). For information on how to select the unit of the displayed temperature, i.e. degrees Celsius (°C) or degrees Fahrenheit (°F), see "Selecting temperature display mode" page 175). Due to its location, the sensor can be affected by road or engine heat during idling or slow driving. Therefore, the accuracy of the displayed temperature can only be verified by comparison to a thermometer placed next to the sensor, not by comparison to external displays (e.g. bank signs etc.). When moving the vehicle into colder ambient temperatures (e.g. when leaving your garage), you will notice a delay before the lower temperature is displayed. A delay also occurs when ambient temperatures rise. This prevents inaccurate temperature indications caused by heat radiated from the engine during idling or slow driving. 155 Controls in detail Instrument cluster Speedometer The speed is indicated in the instrument cluster for the driver ( page 25) and in the roof lining for the rear seat passengers ( pages 33, 35 or 37). The segments in the speedometer of the instrument cluster show you which speed range is available to you.
Cruise control operation: Segments come on from the stored speed to the maximum speed.
Distronic** operation: One or two segments come on in the range for the stored speed. 156 Clock The time is indicated in the instrument cluster for the driver in the tachometer display ( page 25) and in the roof lining for the rear seat passengers ( pages 33, 35 or 37). You can adjust the clock using the COMAND system. Refer to the separate COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions. Controls in detail Control system  Control system The control system is activated as soon as the SmartKey in the starter switch is turned to position 1. The control system enables you to
call up information about your vehicle
change vehicle settings For example, you can use the control system to find out when your vehicle is next due for service, to set the language for messages in the multifunction display, and much more. i The displays for the audio systems (radio, CD player) will appear in English, regardless of the language selected. Warning! G Multifunction display A driver’s attention to the road and traffic conditions must always be his/her primary focus when driving. For your safety and the safety of others, selecting features through the multifunction steering wheel should only be done by the driver when traffic and road conditions permit it to be done safely. 1 Trip odometer 2 Main odometer Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second. The control system relays information to the multifunction display. 157 Controls in detail Control system Multifunction steering wheel The displays in the multifunction display and the settings in the control system are controlled by the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel. 1 Multifunction display Operating control system 2 Selecting the submenu or setting the volume: Press button æ up/to increase ç down/to decrease 3 Telephone: Press button s to take a call to dial a call t to end a call to reject an incoming call 4 Menu systems: Press button è for next menu ÿ for previous menu 5 Moving within a menu: Press button 158 j for next display k for previous display Controls in detail Control system Pressing any of the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel will alter what is shown in the multifunction display. It is helpful to think of the menus, and the functions within each menu, as being arranged in a circular pattern. The information available in the multifunction display is arranged in menus, each containing a number of functions or submenus.
If you press button è or ÿ repeatedly, you will pass through each menu one after the other.
If you press button k or j repeatedly, you will pass through each function display, one after the other, in the current menu. The individual functions are then found within the relevant menu (radio or CD operations under AUDIO, for example). These functions serve to call up relevant information or to customize the settings for your vehicle. In the SETTINGS menu, instead of functions you will find a number of submenus for calling up and changing settings. For instructions on using these submenus, see "Settings menu" ( page 172). The number of menus available in the system depends on which optional equipment is installed in your vehicle. The menus are described on the following pages. 159 Controls in detail Control system Menus 160 This is what you will see when you scroll through the menus. The table on the next page provides an overview of the individual menus. Controls in detail Control system Menus, submenus and functions Menu 1 Menu 2 Menu 3 Menu 4 Menu 5 Menu 6 Standard display Audio Telephone Navigation Distronic** Trip computer Vehicle status mes- Settings sage memory ( page 162) ( page 163) ( page 165) ( page 168) ( page 168) ( page 169) Commands/submenus Call up main- Select radio tenance ser- station vice display Check tire pressure Select satel- Search for lite radio sta- name in tion* phone book Check enOperate the gine oil level CD player Digital speedometer Load phone book Activate route guidance Call up settings Menu 7 ( page 171) Menu 8 ( page 172) Fuel consump- Call up vehicle mal- Reset to faction statistics function, warning tory settings after start and system status messages stored in memory Fuel consumption statistics since the last reset Instrument cluster submenu Call up range Lighting submenu Vehicle submenu Convenience submenu 161 Controls in detail Control system i The headings used in the menus table are designed to facilitate navigation within the system and are not necessarily identical to those shown in the control system displays. Standard display menu In basic mode, the multifunction display shows the trip odometer and the main odometer. This is known as the standard display. The first function displayed in each menu will automatically show you which part of the system you are in. The following functions are available: Function Page Calling up maintenance service display 373 Checking tire pressure 365 Checking engine oil level 357 Calling up digital speedometer 162 Calling up digital speedometer  Press button k or j repeatedly 1 Trip odometer 2 Main odometer until you see the digital speedometer appear in the multifunction display. In case you see another display, press button è or ÿ repeatedly until the standard display appears. The current vehicle speed is shown in the multifunction display. You can select the functions in the standard display menu with button k or j. Current vehicle speed 162 Controls in detail Control system Audio menu The functions in the AUDIO menu operate the audio equipment which you currently have turned on. If no audio equipment is currently turned on, the message AUDIO OFF is shown in the multifunction display. Selecting radio station  Turn on the radio. Refer to the sepa- rate COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions. Page Selecting radio station 163 The SIRIUS satellite radio is treated as a radio application.  Press button è or ÿ repeatedly  Select satellite radio with the corre- until you see the currently tuned station in the multifunction display. sponding key  on the COMAND control panel.  Press button è or ÿ repeatedly The following functions are available: Function Selecting satellite radio station (USA only) until you see the currently tuned station in the multifunction display. Selecting satellite radio sta- 163 tion (USA only) Operating the CD player 164 1 Station frequency 2 Waveband  Press button k or j repeatedly until the desired station is found. i You can only store new stations using the corresponding feature on the radio. Refer to the separate COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions. 1 SAT mode and preset number 2 Channel name or number  Press button k or j repeatedly until the desired channel is found. 163 Controls in detail Control system i Operating the CD player A subscription to satellite radio service provider is required for satellite radio operation. Contact an authorized Maybach Studio for details.  Turn on the radio and select the CD For more information, refer to the separate COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions.  Press button è or ÿ repeatedly player. Refer to the separate COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions. until the settings for the CD currently being played are shown in the multifunction display. 1 Current track 164  Press button k or j repeatedly until the desired track is selected. i You can only choose a CD using COMAND. Refer to the separate COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions. Controls in detail Control system Telephone menu Warning! G A driver’s attention to the road and traffic conditions must always be his/her primary focus when driving. For your safety and the safety of others, we recommend that you pull over to a safe location and stop before making or taking a telephone call. If you choose to use the telephone while driving, please use the hands-free device and only use the telephone when weather, road and traffic conditions permit. Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a cellular telephone while driving a vehicle. Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second. Never operate radio transmitters equipped with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. without being connected to an external antenna) from inside the vehicle while the engine is running. Doing so could lead to a malfunction of the vehicle’s electronic system, possibly resulting in an accident and/ or personal injury. You can use the functions in the PHONE menu to operate your telephone, provided it is connected to a hands-free system and switched on.  Switch on the telephone and COMAND.  Press button ÿ or è on the steering wheel repeatedly until you see the PHONE menu in the multifunction display. The standby message indicates that your telephone is ready for use and you can operate it using the control system. Which messages will appear in the multifunction display field depends on whether your telephone is switched on or off:
If the telephone is off, the message in the multifunction display is: PLEASE TURN PHONE ON.
If the telephone is on: The telephone will then search for a network. During this time the multifunction display reads NO SERVICE. As soon as the telephone has found a network, READY is indicated in the multifunction display. 165 Controls in detail Control system Answering a call When your telephone is ready to receive calls, you can answer a call at any time. In the multifunction display you will then see the message:  Press button s. You have answered the call. In the multifunction display you see the length of the call positioned above the number. i If you do not wish to accept a call, press button t. Ending a call  Press button t. i The caller’s number appears only if it is transmitted. The caller’s name appears only if the number and the name are stored in the phone book. 166 You have ended the call. In the multifunction display you will again see the standby message. Dialing a number from the phone book If your telephone is ready to receive calls, you may select and dial a number from the phone book at any time.  Press button ÿ or è repeatedly until you see the PHONE menu in the multifunction display.  Press button j or k. The control system reads the phone book which is stored in the telephone. This may take up to 30 seconds. In the multifunction display you will see the message LOADING PHBOOK!. When the message LOADING PHBOOK! disappears, the phone book has been  loaded. Controls in detail Control system   Press button j or k repeatedly until the desired name appears in the multifunction display. The stored names are displayed in ascending or descending alphabetical order.  Press button s. The system dials the selected phone number.
i If the connection is successful, the name of the party you called and the duration of the call will appear in the multifunction display. If you press and hold button j or k for longer than one second, the system scrolls rapidly through the list of names until you release the button again. Cancel the quick search mode by pressing t. Redialing The control system stores the most recently dialed phone numbers. This eliminates the need to search through your entire phone book.  Press button ÿ or è repeatedly until you see the PHONE menu in the multifunction display.  Press button s. In the multifunction display you see the first number in the redial memory.  Press button j or k repeatedly 1 Caller’s name
If no connection is made, the control system stores the dialed number in the redial memory. until the desired name appears in the multifunction display. i If you do not want to use the telephone, press button t.  Press button s. The control system dials the selected phone number. 167 Controls in detail Control system Navigation menu The NAVI menu contains the functions needed to operate your navigation system. until you see NAVI in the multifunction display. Distronic** menu Use the DISTRONIC menu to display the current settings for your Distronic system. What information is shown in the multifunction display depends on whether the Distronic system is active or inactive.
If the navigation system is switched off, the message NAVI OFF is shown in the multifunction display. Please refer to the "Driving systems" section of this manual ( page 236) for instructions on how to activate Distronic.
If the navigation system is on and no destination has been entered, you will see the current direction in which the vehicle is moving and the names of streets in the multifunction display.  Press button è or ÿ repeatedly Please refer to the separate COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System manual for instructions on how to activate the route guidance system.  Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until you see one of the following two pictures in the multifunction display. 1 Vehicle ahead, if detected 2 Actual distance to vehicle ahead 3 Preset distance threshold to vehicle ahead 4 Your vehicle 5 Symbol for activated distance warning function Distronic activated Distronic deactivated When Distronic is deactivated, you will see the standard display. When you activate Distronic, you will see the set speed for about five seconds in the Distronic display. The following display then appears: 1 Distronic activated 168 Controls in detail Control system i Trip computer menu Use the trip computer menu to call up statistical data on your vehicle. The following information is available: Function Page Fuel consumption statistics after start 169 Fuel consumption statistics since last reset 170 When you restart the engine, the AFTER START display flashes for:
a distance of approximately 1.25 miles (two kilometers) or Resetting fuel consumption sta- 170 tistics Call up range (distance to empty) Each time you call up the trip computer, the last function used appears as the first display. Incorporating statistics from the previous journey in the consumption statistics 170
1 2 3 4 Distance driven since start Time elapsed since start Average fuel consumption since start Average speed since start a duration of two minutes During this period, the data from the previous journey can be incorporated as follows:  Press reset button J ( page 25) in the instrument cluster. Fuel consumption statistics after start The statistics will be incorporated.  Press button ÿ or è repeatedly i until you see the first function of the trip computer menu.  Press button j or k repeatedly If you do not press reset button J, the consumption statistics will be reset to 0. until you see AFTER START in the multifunction display. 169 Controls in detail Control system Fuel consumption since last reset Resetting fuel consumption statistics Call up range (distance to empty)  Press button ÿ or è repeatedly  Press button ÿ or è repeatedly  Press button ÿ or è repeatedly until you see the first function of the trip computer menu. until you see the first function of the trip computer menu. until you see the first function of the trip computer menu.  Press button j or k repeatedly  Press button j or k repeatedly  Press button j or k repeatedly until you see AFTER RESET in the multifunction display. until you see the reading that you want to reset in the multifunction display.  Press and hold reset button J ( page 25) in the instrument cluster until the value is reset to 0. 1 Distance driven since last reset 2 Time elapsed since last reset 3 Average fuel consumption since last reset 4 Average speed since last reset 170 until you see RANGE in the multifunction display. In the multifunction display you will see the calculated range based on the current fuel tank level. Controls in detail Control system Vehicle status message memory menu Use the vehicle status message memory menu to scan malfunction and warning messages that may be stored in the system. Such messages appear in the multifunction display and are based on conditions or system status the vehicle’s system has recorded. Warning! G Malfunction and warning messages are only indicated for certain systems and are intentionally not very detailed. The malfunction and warning messages are simply a reminder with respect to the operation of certain systems and do not replace the owner’s and/or driver’s responsibility to maintain the vehicle’s operating safety by having all required maintenance and safety checks performed on the vehicle and by bringing the vehicle to an authorized Maybach Studio to address the malfunction and warning messages ( page 391).  Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until the vehicle status message memory appears in the multifunction display. No vehicle status messages If no conditions are recorded in the memory, the message in the multifunction display is: NO MESSAGES Vehicle status messages have been recorded If conditions have occurred causing status messages to be recorded, the number of messages appears in the multifunction display:  Press button k or j. The stored messages will now be displayed in order. See the "Practical hints" section for malfunction and warning messages ( page 391). Should the vehicle’s system record any conditions while driving, the number of messages will reappear in the multifunction display when the SmartKey in the starter switch is turned to position 0 or removed from the starter switch. If you press reset button J ( page 25) on the right hand side of the instrument cluster, the next message will be displayed immediately. i The vehicle status message memory will be cleared when you switch on ignition. You will then only see highpriority messages in the multifunction display. These are highlighted in red color ( page 391). 1 Number of messages 171 Controls in detail Control system Settings menu In the SETTINGS menu there are two functions:
The function TO RESET PRESS R BUTTON FOR 3 SEC., with which you can reset all the settings to the original factory settings.
A collection of submenus with which you can make individual settings for your vehicle.  Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until you see SETTINGS in the multifunction display. Function Page i Resetting all settings 172 Submenus in the Settings menu 173 The settings you have changed will not be reset unless you confirm the action by pressing reset button J a second time. After approximately five seconds, the SETTINGS menu appears again. Resetting the functions of a sub- 173 menu Instrument cluster submenu 175 Lighting submenu 176 Vehicle submenu 181 Convenience submenu 182 Resetting all settings You can reset all the functions of all submenus to the factory settings.  Press reset button J ( page 25) in the instrument cluster for approximately three seconds. In the display you will see the request to press reset button J again to confirm.  Press reset button J again. The functions of all the submenus will reset to factory settings. 172 Due to safety reasons, resetting all of the settings while driving will not reset all of the values in the LIGHTING or the VEHICLE menu. Controls in detail Control system Submenus in the Settings menu Resetting the functions of a submenu i  Press button k or j. For each submenu you can reset all the functions to the factory settings. The settings you have changed will not be reset unless you confirm the action by pressing reset button J a second time. After approximately five seconds, the SETTINGS menu appears again. The various submenus appear in the display.  Move to a function in the submenu.  Press reset button J ( page 25) in the instrument cluster for approximately three seconds. In the display you will see the request to press reset button J again to confirm.  Press button æ or ç. The selection marker moves to the next submenu. Due to safety reasons, resetting all of the settings while driving will not reset all of the values in the LIGHTING or the VEHICLE menu.  Press reset button J again. All functions of the submenu will reset to factory settings. The submenus are arranged by hierarchy. Scroll down with button ç, scroll up with button æ. Move within the submenus with button k or j to the individual functions. The settings themselves are made with button æ or ç. 173 Controls in detail Control system The table below shows what settings can be changed within the various menus. Detailed instructions on making individual settings can be found on the following pages. : INSTRUMENT CLUSTER LIGHTING VEHICLE CONVENIENCE Selecting temperature display Setting daytime running lamp Setting automatic locking mode mode (USA only) Setting key dependency Selecting speedometer display Setting locator lighting mode Activating easy-entry/exit feature Selecting language Setting night security illumination Setting parking position for exterior rear view mirrors Setting interior lighting delayed shut-off Setting fold-in function for exterior rear view mirrors Setting ambient lighting 174 Controls in detail Control system Instrument cluster submenu Selecting temperature display mode Selecting speedometer display mode Access the INST. CLUS. submenu via the SETTINGS menu. Use the INST. CLUS. submenu to change the instrument cluster display settings. The following functions are available:  Move the selection marker with  Move the selection marker with Function Page Selecting temperature display mode 175 Selecting speedometer display mode 175 Selecting language 176 button æ or ç to the INST. CLUS. submenu. button æ or ç to the INST. CLUS. submenu.  Press button j or k repeatedly  Press button j or k repeatedly until you see TEMP. INDICATOR in the multifunction display. until you see DISPLAY VALUES IN in the multifunction display. The selection marker is on the current setting. The selection marker is on the current setting.  Press button æ or ç to set the temperature unit to degrees Celsius (°C) or degrees Fahrenheit (°F).  Press button æ or ç to set speedometer unit to MILES or KM. 175 Controls in detail Control system Selecting language  Move the selection marker with  Press button æ or ç to select the language to be used for the multifunction display messages. Lighting submenu
German until you see LANGUAGE in the multifunction display.
English Access the LIGHTING submenu via the SETTINGS menu. Use the LIGHTING submenu to change the lamp and lighting settings on your vehicle. The following functions are available: The selection marker is on the current setting.
French Function Page
Italian Spanish Setting daytime running lamp mode (USA only) 177
Setting locator lighting 178 button æ or ç to the INST. CLUS. submenu.  Press button j or k repeatedly Available languages: Setting night security illumina- 179 tion 176 Setting interior lighting delayed shut-off 180 Setting ambient lighting 180 Controls in detail Control system Setting daytime running lamp mode (USA only)  Press button æ or ç to select MANUAL or daytime running lamp (CONSTANT) mode. This function is not available in countries where daytime running lamps are mandatory. i This function is not available in countries where the daytime running lamp mode is mandatory and therefore in a constant mode.  Move the selection marker with button æ or ç to the LIGHTING submenu.  Press button j or k repeatedly until you see LIGHTING CIRCUIT HEADLAMP MODE in the multifunction display. The selection marker is on the current setting. With daytime running lamp mode activated and the exterior lamp switch in position M or U, the low beam headlamps are switched on when the engine is running. In low ambient light conditions the following lamps will switch on additionally:
Parking lamps
Tail lamps
License plate lamps
Side marker lamps i If you turn the exterior lamp switch to another position, the respective lamp(s) will switch on. For safety reasons, resetting the LIGHTING submenu to factory settings ( page 173) while driving will not reset the daytime running lamp mode. In the display you will then see the message: LIGHTING – CANNOT BE COMPLETELY RESET TO FACTORY SETTINGS WHILE DRIVING. For more information on the daytime running lamp mode, see "Lighting" ( page 145). 177 Controls in detail Control system Setting locator lighting With the locator lighting feature activated and the exterior lamp switch in position U, the following lamps will switch on when the vehicle is unlocked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO** during darkness:
Parking lamps
Tail lamps
License plate lamps
Side marker lamps
Front fog lamps
Exterior rear view mirrors 178 The locator lighting switches off when the driver’s door is opened. The selection marker is on the current setting. If you do not open a door after unlocking with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO**, the lamps will switch off automatically after approximately 40 seconds.  Move the selection marker with button æ or ç to the LIGHTING submenu.  Press button j or k repeatedly until you LOCATOR LIGHTING in the multifunction display.  Press button æ or ç to switch the locator lighting function ON.  Turn the exterior lamp switch to position U when exiting the vehicle ( page 143). The locator lighting feature is activated. Controls in detail Control system Setting night security illumination (Headlamps delayed shut-off) Use this function to set whether and how long you would like the exterior lamps to illuminate during darkness after exiting the vehicle and all doors closed. With the delayed shut-off feature activated and the exterior lamp switch in position U before the engine is turned off, the following lamps will switch on after you have removed the SmartKey from the starter switch: To select delayed shut-off period:  Move the selection marker with button æ or ç to the LIGHTING submenu.  Press button æ or ç to select the desired lamp-on period. You can select:
0 S, the delayed shut-off feature is deactivated.
15 S, 30 S, 45 S, or 60 S, the delayed shut-off feature is activated.  Press button j or k repeatedly until you see HEADLAMPS DELAYED SWITCH-OFF in the multifunction display. The selection marker is on the current setting.  Turn the exterior lamp switch to position U before turning off the engine.
Parking lamps You can temporarily deactivate the delayed shut-off feature:
Tail lamps  Before leaving the vehicle, turn the
License plate lamps
Side marker lamps
Front fog lamps If you do not open a door after removing the SmartKey, the lamps will automatically shut off after 60 seconds. i You can reactivate this function within ten minutes by opening a door. SmartKey in the starter switch to position 0.  Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 2 and back to 0. The delayed shut-off feature is deactivated. It will reactivate as soon as you reinsert the SmartKey in the starter switch. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO**:  Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop but- ton on the gear selector lever ( page 55). 179 Controls in detail Control system Setting interior lighting delayed shutoff Use this function to set whether and how long you would like the interior lighting to remain lit during darkness after you have removed the SmartKey from the starter switch.  Move the selection marker with button æ or ç to the LIGHTING submenu.  Press button j or k repeatedly until you see INTERIOR LIGHTING DELAYED SWITCH-OFF in the multifunction display. The selection marker is on the current setting.  Press button æ or ç to select the desired lamp-on time period. 180 You can select:
0 S, the delayed shut-off feature is deactivated.
5 S, 10 S, 15 S, or 20 S, the delayed shut-off feature is activated with the desired lamp-on period. The selection marker is on the current setting. Setting ambient lighting Using this function, you can adjust the brightness of the ambient lighting.  Move the selection marker with button æ or ç to the LIGHTING submenu.  Press button j or k repeatedly until you see AMBIENT LIGHT in the multifunction display.  Press button æ or ç to select the brightness of the lighting. The setting LEVEL 1 represents the darkest level and setting LEVEL 5 the brightest level. The ambient light is switched off at setting OFF. Controls in detail Control system Vehicle submenu Setting automatic locking Access the VEHICLE submenu via the SETINGS menu. Use the VEHICLE submenu to make general vehicle settings. The following functions are available: Function Page Use this function to activate or deactivate the automatic central locking. With the automatic central locking system activated, the vehicle is centrally locked at vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph (15 km/h). Set automatic locking 181  Move the selection marker with  Press button j or k repeatedly until you see AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK in the multifunction display. The selection marker is on the current setting. button æ or ç to the Vehicle submenu.  Press button æ or ç to switch AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK ON or OFF. 181 Controls in detail Control system Convenience submenu Setting key dependency Access the CONVENIENCE submenu via the SETTINGS menu. Use the CONVENIENCE submenu to change the settings for a number of convenience features. The following functions are available: Function Page Setting key dependency 182 Use this function to set whether the memory settings for the seats, the steering wheel, the mirrors, the automatic climate control, the audio system and other settings of the control system should be stored separately for each SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO ( page 140). Activating easy-entry/exit feature 183  Move the selection marker with Setting parking position for ex- 184 terior rear view mirrors Setting fold-in function for ex- 184 terior rear view mirrors 182  Press button j or k repeatedly until you see SETTINGS KEY-DEPENDENT in the multifunction display. The selection marker is on the current setting. button æ or ç to the CONVENIENCE submenu.  Press button æ or ç to set key dependency to ON or OFF. Controls in detail Control system  Move the selection marker with Activating easy-entry/exit feature Use this function to activate and deactivate the easy-entry/exit feature ( page 127). Warning! G You must make sure no one can become trapped or injured by the moving steering wheel and driver’s seat when the easy-entry/exit feature is activated. button æ or ç to the CONVENIENCE submenu. The following settings are available for the easy-entry/exit feature: OFF until you see EASY-ENTRY FEATURE ACTIVATE in the multifunction display. The easy-entry/exit feature is deactivated. STEER. COL The selection marker is on the current setting. Only the steering column is moved. ST.COL+SEAT Both the steering column and the driver’s seat are moved.  Press button j or k repeatedly To cancel seat/steering wheel movement, do one of the following:


Press seat adjustment switch ( page 58). Move steering column stalk ( page 60).  Press button æ or ç to change the easy-entry/exit setting. Press the memory button ( page 141). The steering wheel and driver’s seat stop moving. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could open the driver’s door and unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit feature, which could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury. 183 Controls in detail Control system Setting parking position for exterior rear view mirror Setting fold-in function for exterior rear view mirrors Use the MIRROR SETTING WHEN PARKING function to select whether the passenger side exterior rear view mirror should be turned downward during parking maneuvers when reverse gear is engaged. For additional information ( page 194). Using this function, you can set the exterior rear view mirrors to be automatically folded in when you lock your vehicle ( page 195).  Move the selection marker to the CONVENIENCE submenu using button æ or ç.  Press button j or k repeatedly until the message MIRROR SETTING WHEN PARKING appears in the display. The selection marker is on the current setting.  Press button æ or ç to switch function ON or OFF. 184 The selection marker is on the current setting.  Move the selection marker to the CONVENIENCE submenu using button æ or ç.  Press button j or k repeatedly until the message FOLD IN MIRRORS WHEN LOCKING appears in the display.  Press button æ or ç to switch the automatic fold-in setting for the mirrors ON or OFF when the vehicle is locked. Controls in detail Automatic transmission  Automatic transmission For information on driving with an automatic transmission, see "Automatic transmission" ( page 66). Your vehicles transmission adapts its gear shifting process to your individual driving style by continually adjusting the shift points up or down. These shift point adjustments are performed based on current operating and driving conditions. If the operating conditions change, the automatic transmission reacts by adjusting its gear shift program. i During the brief warm-up the transmission upshifting is delayed. This allows the catalytic converter to heat up more quickly to operating temperature. Gearshift pattern for automatic transmission The automatic transmission selects individual gears automatically, depending on:
the gear selector lever position D ( page 188) with gear ranges 4, 3, 2, 1 ( page 187)
the selected program mode (C/S) ( page 189)
the position of the accelerator pedal ( page 190)
the vehicle speed 1 Current gear range/gear selector lever position 2 Current program mode The current gear range/gear selector lever position 1 and program mode 2 appear in the tachometer display. 185 Controls in detail Automatic transmission Warning! G It is dangerous to shift the gear selector lever out of P or N if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal. When the gear selector lever is in position D, you can influence transmission shifting by:
limiting the gear range
changing gears manually One-touch gearshifting Even with an automatic transmission you can change the gears manually when the gear selector lever is in position D. 186 Downshifting Upshifting  Briefly press the gear selector lever to  Briefly press the gear selector lever to the left in the D– direction. the right in the D+ direction. The transmission will shift from the current gear to the next lower gear. This action simultaneously limits the gear range of the transmission ( page 187). The transmission will shift from the current gear to the next higher gear as permitted by the shift program. This action simultaneously extends the gear range of the transmission. Warning! G On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in order to obtain braking action. This could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control. i To avoid overrevving the engine when the gear selector lever is moved to the D– direction, the transmission will not shift to a lower gear if the engine's max. speed would be exceeded. Canceling gear range limit  Press and hold the gear selector lever in the D+ direction until D reappears in the tachometer display. The transmission will shift from the current gear range directly to gear range D. Shifting into optimal gear range  Press and hold the gear selector lever in the D– direction. The transmission will automatically select the gear range suited for optimal acceleration and deceleration. This will involve shifting down one or more gears. Controls in detail Automatic transmission Gear ranges With the gear selector lever in position D, you can limit the transmission’s gear range by pressing the lever to the left (D-), and reverse the gear range limit by pressing the lever to the right (D+). The selected gear range will appear in the tachometer display ( page 185). If you press on the accelerator when the engine has reached its rpm limit, the transmission will upshift beyond any gear range limit selected. Effect Effect é The transmission shifts through fourth gear only. ç è The transmission shifts through third gear only. Allows the use of engine’s braking power when driving With this selection you can use the braking effect of the engine.
on steep downgrades
in mountainous regions
under extreme operating conditions æ The transmission shifts through second gear only. The transmission operates in first gear only. For maximum use of engine’s braking effect on very steep or lengthy downgrades. 187 Controls in detail Automatic transmission Gear selector lever position Effect ì ë Gear selector position when the vehicle is parked. Only place gear selector lever in position P when vehicle is stopped. The park position is not intended to serve as a brake when the vehicle is parked. Rather, the driver should always set the parking brake in addition to placing the gear selector lever in position P to secure the vehicle. í Reverse gear Place gear selector lever in position R only when vehicle is stopped. 188 ! Neutral Coasting the vehicle, or driving for any other reason with gear selector lever in N can result in transmission damage that is not covered by the Maybach Limited Warranty. No power is transmitted from the engine to the drive axle. When the brakes are released, the vehicle can be moved freely (pushed or towed). Park position The SmartKey can only be removed from the starter switch with the gear selector lever in position P. With the SmartKey removed, the gear selector lever is locked in position P. Effect To avoid damage to the transmission, never engage N while driving. If the ESP is deactivated or malfunctioning: Only move gear selector lever to N if the vehicle is in danger of skidding, e.g. on icy roads. ê Drive The transmission shifts automatically. All five forward gears are available. Warning! G Getting out of your vehicle with the gear selector lever not fully engaged in position P is dangerous. Also, position P alone is not intended to or capable of preventing your vehicle from moving, possibly hitting people or objects. Always set the parking brake in addition to shifting to position P ( page 68). When parked on an incline, turn the front wheels towards the road curb. Do not park this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass, hay or leaves can come into contact with the hot exhaust system, as these materials could be ignited and cause a vehicle fire. Controls in detail Automatic transmission Warning! G When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could move the gear selector lever from position P, which could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury. Automatic shift program The program mode selector switch is located on the lower part of the front center console. ! Never change the program mode when the gear selector lever is out of position P. This could result in a change of driving characteristics for which you may not be prepared. i The last selected program mode (C or S) is switched on when the engine is restarted in the automatic program mode. 1 Program mode selector switch C Comfort For comfort driving S Sport For standard driving 189 Controls in detail Automatic transmission  Press program mode selector switch 1 repeatedly until the letter of the desired program mode appears in the tachometer display ( page 185). Select C for comfort driving: Stopping Driving tips Accelerator position When you stop briefly, e.g. at traffic lights: Your driving style influences the transmission’s shifting behavior:  Leave the transmission in gear. Less throttle Earlier upshifting Later upshifting  Hold the vehicle with the brake. When you stop longer with the engine idling or on an uphill gradient:
Traction and driving stability are improved on icy roads. More throttle
Upshifts occur earlier even when you give more gas. The engine then operates at lower rpms and the wheels are less likely to spin. Kickdown  Move gear selector lever to position Use kickdown when you want maximum acceleration.  Set the parking brake.  Press the accelerator past the point of resistance. The transmission shifts into a lower gear.  Ease up on the accelerator when you have reached the desired speed. The transmission shifts up again. 190 P. Controls in detail Automatic transmission Maneuvering When you maneuver in tight areas, e.g. when pulling into a parking space:  Control the vehicle speed by gradual- ly releasing the brakes.  Accelerate gently.  Never abruptly step on the accelera- tor. Emergency operation (Limp Home Mode) If vehicle acceleration worsens or the transmission no longer shifts, the transmission is most likely operating in limp home mode (emergency operation). In this mode, only second gear and reverse gear can be activated.  Restart the engine.  Move gear selector lever to position D (for second gear) or R.  Have the transmission checked at an authorized Maybach Studio as soon as possible.  Stop the vehicle.  Move gear selector lever to P. Working on the vehicle  Turn off the engine. Warning! G  Wait at least ten seconds before re- starting. When working on the vehicle, set the parking brake and move gear selector lever to position P. Otherwise the vehicle could roll away. 191 Controls in detail Good visibility For information on the windshield wipers, see "Windshield wipers" ( page 71). Headlamp cleaning system The switch is located on the left side of the dashboard.  Switch on ignition ( page 54).  Press button 1. The headlamps are cleaned with a high-pressure water jet. For information on filling up the washer reservoir, see "Windshield and headlamp washer system" ( page 469). Rear view mirrors For information on setting the rear view mirrors, see "Mirrors" ( page 61). Automatic antiglare rear view mirrors The reflection brightness of the exterior rear view mirror on the driver’s side and the interior rear view mirror will respond automatically to glare when
the automatic antiglare function is activated ( page 193)
the ignition is switched on and
1 Headlamp washer button 192 incoming light from headlamps falls on the sensor in the interior rear view mirror The rear view mirror will not react if
reverse gear is engaged
the interior lighting is turned on Controls in detail Good visibility Warning! G The automatic antiglare function does not react if incoming light is not aimed directly at sensors in the interior rear view mirror. The interior rear view mirror and the exterior rear view mirror on the driver’s side do not react, for example, if the rear window curtain is closed. Glare can endanger you and others. Warning! G In the case of an accident liquid electrolyte may escape from the mirror housing if the mirror glass breaks. ! Deactivating Electrolyte drops coming into contact with the vehicle paint finish can be completely removed only while in the liquid state by applying plenty of water. Warning! G Exercise care when using the passenger side exterior rear view mirror. The mirror surface is convex (outwardly curved surface for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror are closer than they appear. Check your interior rear view mirror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes.  Switch on ignition ( page 54).  Press button 1. The green indicator lamp in button 1 goes out. Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not allow the liquid to come into contact with eyes, skin, clothing, or respiratory system. In case it does, immediately flush affected area with water, and seek medical help if necessary. 193 Controls in detail Good visibility Activating  Press button 1 again. The green indicator lamp in button 1 comes on. Activating exterior rear view mirror parking position The buttons are located on the driver’s door. Follow these steps to activate the mirror parking position so that the passengerside exterior rear view mirror will be turned downward to the stored position.  Make sure you have stored a parking i position for the passenger-side exterior rear view mirror ( page 142). The setting will remain stored even when you remove the SmartKey from the starter switch.  Make sure the MIRROR SETTING WHEN PARKING function in the CONVENIENCE submenu in the control system is switched to ON ( page 184).  Switch on ignition ( page 54).  Press button 2 for the passenger- side exterior rear view mirror. 1 Driver’s side exterior rear view mirror 2 Passenger-side exterior rear view mirror 194  Place the gear selector lever in re- verse gear R. The passenger-side exterior rear view mirror will be turned downward to the stored position. Controls in detail Good visibility The exterior rear view mirror returns to its previously stored driving position:
10 seconds after you put the gear selector lever out of position R
immediately once you exceed a vehicle speed of approximately 6 mph (10 km/h)
immediately when you press the button for driver’s side exterior rear view mirror 1 Electrically folding exterior rear view mirrors ! Before you drive the vehicle through an automatic car wash, fold the exterior mirrors in. Otherwise they may be damaged. Folding exterior rear view mirrors in and out automatically When the corresponding function in the control system is activated ( page 184):
The exterior rear view mirrors automatically fold in as soon as the vehicle is locked from the outside.
The exterior rear view mirrors automatically fold out as soon as the vehicle is unlocked and the driver’s or passenger door are subsequently opened. 195 Controls in detail Good visibility Folding the exterior rear view mirrors in and out manually The exterior rear view mirrors can vibrate if they are not completely folded out. The button is located on the driver’s door.  Switch on ignition ( page 54).  Briefly press button 1.  Press button 1 again. The mirrors fold out. The mirrors fold in. ! i If an exterior mirror housing is forcibly pushed forward (hit from the rear), reposition it manually by applying firm pressure until it snaps back into place. If you are driving at more than approximately 9 mph (15 km/h), you will not be able to fold the exterior mirrors in. If an exterior mirror is forcibly pushed rearward (hit from the front) press button 1 to fold mirrors in, then press button 1 to fold mirrors out. Do not force mirror by hand as it may damage the adjustment mechanism. 1 Button for folding exterior mirrors in and out 196 The mirror housing is now properly positioned and you can adjust the mirror normally. Controls in detail Good visibility Glare from the front Glare from the front and sides i 1 Sun visor For information on vanity mirrors ( page 257).  Swing sun visor 1 down. 1 Sun visor 2 Mounting 3 Additional sun visor Sun visors The sun visors protect you from sun glare while driving. Warning! G Do not use the vanity mirror while driving. Keep the mirrors in the sun visors closed while the vehicle is in motion. Reflected glare can endanger you and others.  Swing sun visor 1 down.  Disengage sun visor 1 from mounting 2.  Pivot sun visor to the side. The sun visors are extendable.  Adjust the sun visors by pushing or pulling in the direction of the arrows.  Swing additional sun visor 3 down. 197 Controls in detail Good visibility Rear window defroster The rear window defroster consumes high levels of energy. To keep battery drain to a minimum, switch off the defroster as soon as the rear window is clear. The heating time varies depending on outside temperature and driving conditions, ranging from approximately six minutes at temperatures above 43°F to over 20 minutes at temperatures below -14°F and at high speed.  Switch on ignition ( page 54). Activating  Press button F ( page 202). The indicator lamp on the button comes on. Deactivating Warning! G Any accumulation of snow and ice should be removed from the rear window before driving. Visibility could otherwise be impaired, endangering you and others.  Press button F again. The indicator lamp on the button goes out. ! If the indicator lamp F is flashing, there is insufficient voltage due to too many electrical consumers are turned on. The rear window defroster switches off automatically. The rear window defroster will switch back on again automatically as soon as sufficient voltage is available. 198 Controls in detail Automatic climate control  Automatic climate control The automatic climate control is a 4-zone intelligent climate control system. Your vehicle interior is divided into four zones. With the help of a sun sensor, the automatic climate control determines the relation of the sun to the vehicle and automatically adjusts the inside temperature for every individual zone. You can set the temperature for each of the four zones separately. These settings can be assigned to a SmartKey and stored in memory ( page 140). The automatic climate control is operational whenever the engine is running. It cools the vehicle’s interior according to the angle and intensity of the sun’s rays, the outside temperature and the selected temperature. i The activated charcoal filter, when switched on, markedly reduces odors and removes pollutants from the air entering the passenger compartment. Warning! G Follow the recommended settings for heating and cooling given on the following pages. Otherwise the windows could fog up, impairing visibility and endangering you and others. Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and odors are filtered out before outside air enters the passenger compartment through the air distribution system. i Severe conditions (e.g. strong air pollution) may require replacement of the filter before its scheduled interval. A clogged filter will reduce the air volume to the interior. If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate the interior before driving off. Keep the air intake grille in front of the windshield free of snow, leaves, sticks and any other debris. Do not obstruct air volume by placing objects on the air flow-through exhaust slots below the rear window. The air conditioning will not engage (no cooling) if the AC OFF mode is selected ( page 208). Condensation may drip from underneath the vehicle. This is normal and not an indication of a malfunction. 199 Controls in detail Automatic climate control Cockpit 200 Controls in detail Automatic climate control 1 Side air vent, left, adjustable 7 Thumbwheel for right center air vent 2 Center air vent, left, adjustable 3 Fixed air vent 8 Automatic climate control panel 4 Center air vent, right, adjustable 9 5 Side air vent, right, adjustable Thumbwheel for left center air vent 6 Thumbwheel for right side air vent a Thumbwheel for left side air vent Warning! G When operating the automatic climate control, the air that enters the passenger compartment through the air vents in the footwell can be very hot or very cold (depending on the set temperature). This may cause burn or frostbite on unprotected skin in the immediate area of the air vents. Always keep sufficient distance between unprotected parts of the body and the footwell air vents. If necessary, change the air flow using the air distribution controls to direct the air away from the footwell air vents ( page 203). 201 Controls in detail Automatic climate control 1 Air distribution and air volume, left (automatic) 8 Air distribution, right (manual) d AC cooling on/off 2 Air distribution, left (manual) 9 Air distribution and air volume, right (automatic) e Residual heat and ventilation 3 f Activated charcoal filter Air volume, left a Rear window defroster g Air recirculation 4 Temperature control, left b h 5 Display Rear air-conditioning remote control Windshield and side window defroster 6 Temperature control, right c 7 Air volume, right Automatic climate control on/off button 202 Controls in detail Automatic climate control Activating the climate control system i Adjusting air distribution  Switch on ignition ( page 54). When operating the climate control system in automatic mode, you will only rarely need to adjust the temperature, air volume and air distribution. Use the air distribution controls 2 and 8 ( page 202) to separately adjust the air distribution on each side of the passenger compartment. The following symbols are found on the controls:  Press button M or U. Deactivating the climate control system It is possible to completely deactivate the automatic climate control system.  Press button M. ! The fresh air supply to the vehicle interior is shut off. While driving, use this setting only temporarily, otherwise the windshield could fog up. Increasing  Push top of temperature control 4 and/or 6 until the display shows the desired temperature. The automatic climate control system will accordingly adjust the interior air temperature. Decreasing Setting the temperature Use temperature controls 4 for the left side or 6 ( page 202) for the right side to separately adjust the air temperature on each side of the passenger compartment. You should raise or lower the temperature setting in small increments, preferably starting at 72°F (22°C).  Push bottom of temperature Symbol Function Ô Directs air to the windows Ø Directs air to the windows, footwells, center and side air vents Ó Directs air to the footwell air vents Õ Directs air to the center and side air vents control 4 and/or 6 until the display shows the desired temperature. The automatic climate control system will accordingly adjust the interior air temperature. 203 Controls in detail Automatic climate control Adjusting manually  Press left or right air distribution controls 2 and/or 8 ( page 202). The indicator lamp on the U button goes out. The air volume is controlled automatically while the air distribution is controlled manually in the respective zone. The selected air distribution is shown in the display. Adjusting automatically  Press left or right U button. The indicator lamp on the button comes on. The air distribution is adjusted automatically.  Press button , to switch off the air recirculation ( page 202). The indicator lamp on the button goes out.  Adjust left and right center air vents 2 and 4 upwards ( page 201).  Set blower to the maximum speed.  Increase temperature setting.  Open the side air vents 1 and 5 and direct them onto the side windows ( page 201). i In automatic mode, the automatic climate control is regulated to prevent the windows from fogging up on the inside. Windshield fogged on the outside Windows fogged on the inside  Press button AC OFF to switch on the air conditioning ( page 202). The indicator lamp on the button goes out. 204  Switch the windshield wipers on.  Press on both U buttons. The indicator lamp on the button goes out. Adjusting air volume Adjusting manually Seven blower speeds are available.  Press
to decrease or Q to in- crease air volume to the desired level. The indicator lamp on the U button goes out. The air volume is controlled manually while the air distribution is controlled automatically in the respective zone. The selected blower speed is shown in the display. Adjusting automatically  Press left or right U button. The indicator lamp on the button comes on. The selected blower speed in the display disappears. The air volume is adjusted automatically. Controls in detail Automatic climate control Maximum cooling MAXCOOL If the left and right air distribution controls as well as the air volume control are set to U and there is a high need for cooling, the display "AUTO MAXCOOL" appears. This provides the fastest possible cooling of the vehicle interior (when windows and tilt/sliding sunroof are closed). Defrosting i These settings should only be selected for a short time. Activating  Press button P ( page 202). The indicator lamp on the button comes on.  Press button , ( page 202). The indicator lamp on the button goes out.  Close center air vents.  Adjust side air vents upwards. Warning! G When the outside temperature is below 41°F (5°C), only switch to air recirculation mode for short periods to prevent window fogging. Deactivating  Press button P ( page 202). The indicator lamp on the button goes out. Defrosting is turned off. Air recirculation mode Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle from the outside. This setting cuts off the intake of outside air and recirculates the air in the passenger compartment. Activating  Press button , ( page 202). The indicator lamp on the button comes on. i If you press button , for approximately two seconds, the side windows and the tilt/sliding sunroof will  close.  Switch off air recirculation, if select- ed. 205 Controls in detail Automatic climate control  Warning! G Never operate the side windows and the tilt/sliding sunroof if there is the possibility of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure. In the event that the procedure causes potential danger, the closing of the side windows can be immediately halted by pressing the respective window switch. The closing of the tilt/sliding sunroof can be immediately halted by moving the tilt/ sliding sunroof switch in the overhead control panel in any direction. The closing of the side windows and the tilt/sliding sunroof can be reversed by again pressing and holding the , button. i i The air recirculation mode is activated automatically: If you press button , for approximately two seconds, the side windows and the tilt/sliding sunroof will return to their previous position.
at high outside temperatures
if the concentration of carbon monoxide and nitrogen oxide in the outside air increases beyond a predetermined level, for example in a tunnel. Please note that the charcoal filter must be activated ( page 202) for the air recirculation mode to be activated automatically. If you have turned off the air conditioning ( page 202) or the outside temperature is below 41°F (5°C), the air recirculation mode will not switch on automatically. Deactivating  Press button , ( page 202). The indicator lamp on the button goes out. 206 The air recirculation mode is deactivated automatically:
after five minutes if the outside temperature is below approximately 41°F (5°C)
after five minutes if the air conditioning is turned off
after 30 minutes if the outside temperature is above approximately 41°F (5°C)
if you press button AC OFF At outside temperatures above 79°F (26°C) the system will not automatically switch back to outside air. A quantity of outside air is added after approximately 30 minutes. Controls in detail Automatic climate control Charcoal filter An activated charcoal filter markedly reduces bad odors and removes pollutants from air entering the passenger compartment. Activating  Press button e ( page 202). The indicator lamp on the button comes on. i If you press button e for approximately two seconds, the side windows and the tilt/sliding sunroof will close. Warning! G Never operate the side windows and the tilt/sliding sunroof if there is the possibility of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure. In the event that the procedure causes potential danger, the closing of the side windows can be immediately halted by pressing the respective window switch. The closing of the tilt/sliding sunroof can be immediately halted by moving the tilt/ sliding sunroof switch in the overhead control panel in any direction. The closing of the side windows and the tilt/sliding sunroof can be reversed by again pressing and holding the e button. Deactivating  Press button e ( page 202). The indicator lamp on the button goes out. i If you press button e for approximately two seconds, the side windows and the tilt/sliding sunroof will return to their previous position. The system switches automatically to the air recirculation mode if the carbon monoxide (CO) or nitrogen oxide (NOX) concentration of the outside air increases beyond a predetermined level, for example in a tunnel. The automatic air recirculation mode does not function if AC OFF mode is selected or if the outside temperature has fallen below 41°F (5°C). The activated charcoal filter should be switched off when windows fog up on the inside, or if the passenger compartment needs to be quickly heated or cooled down. 207 Controls in detail Automatic climate control Air conditioning The air conditioning is operational while the engine is running and cools the interior air to the temperature set by the operator. i Condensation may drip out from underneath the vehicle. This is normal and not an indication of a malfunction. Deactivating It is possible to deactivate the air conditioning (cooling) function of the automatic climate control system. The air in the vehicle will then no longer be cooled or dehumidified.  Press AC OFF again ( page 202). The indicator lamp on the button AC OFF goes out. The air conditioning uses the refrigerant R134a. This refrigerant is free of CFCs which are harmful to the ozone layer. Activating Moist air can fog up the windows. You can dehumidify the air with the air conditioning. 208  Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 1 or 0 or remove it from the starter switch.  Press button T ( page 202). The indicator lamp on button T comes on. i If the AC OFF button on the automatic climate control panel starts to flash, this indicates that the air conditioning is losing refrigerant. The compressor has turned itself off. The air conditioning cannot be turned on again. Have the air conditioning checked at the nearest authorized Maybach Studio.  Press button AC OFF ( page 202). The indicator lamp on the button AC OFF comes on. Activating Residual heat and ventilation With the engine switched off, it is possible to continue to heat or ventilate the interior for up to 30 minutes. This feature makes use of the residual heat produced by the engine. Deactivating  Press button T ( page 202). The indicator lamp on button T goes out. The residual heat is automatically turned off:
when the ignition is switched on
after about 30 minutes
if the battery voltage drops i How long the system will provide heating depends on the coolant temperature and the temperature set by the operator. The blower will run at speed setting 1 regardless of the air distribution control setting. Controls in detail Automatic climate control Temperature-controlled glove box The glove box can be heated or cooled. The air temperature is regulated according to the outside temperature and the temperature set in the front air-conditioning control panel on the right. The adjustable vent is in the glove box.  Turn adjustable vent 1 clockwise. The glove box will be heated or cooled. Operating rear passenger compartment settings at the cockpit control panel  Press the ™ button ( page 202) on the front control panel.  Turn adjustable vent 1 counterclock- wise. The display switches over to show the rear passenger compartment settings. At the same time, the indicator lamps in the air distribution buttons come on according to the air distribution set for the rear compartment. The glove box will neither be heated nor cooled. i If you are transporting perishable goods (e.g. groceries) in the glove box, close the air vent while heating the passenger compartment. You can adjust all settings for the rear passenger compartment at the cockpit control panel. Standard display 1 Adjustable vent Approximately five seconds after the last button was pressed, the current display disappears and the standard display is called back up. or  Press the ™ button again. 209 Controls in detail Automatic climate control Rear passenger compartment Overview of Maybach 57 210 Controls in detail Automatic climate control 1 Thumbwheel for upper left air vent 7 Fixed air vent 8 Center air vent, right, adjustable 2 Upper left air vent 9 Thumbwheel for center air vent 3 Upper right air vent a Automatic climate control panel 4 Thumbwheel for upper right air vent b Thumbwheel for center air vent 5 Thumbwheel for lower right air vent c Center air vent, left, adjustable d Lower left air vent 6 Lower right air vent e Thumbwheel for lower left air vent Warning! G When operating the automatic climate control, the air that enters the passenger compartment through the air vents in the footwell can be very hot or very cold (depending on the set temperature). This may cause burn or frostbite to unprotected skin in the immediate area of the air vents. Always keep sufficient distance between unprotected parts of the body and the footwell air vents. If necessary, change the air flow using the air distribution controls to direct the air away from the footwell air vents ( page 215). 211 Controls in detail Automatic climate control Overview of Maybach 62 212 Controls in detail Automatic climate control 1 Thumbwheel for upper left air vent 7 Fixed air vent 8 Center air vent, right, adjustable 2 Upper left air vent 9 Thumbwheel for center air vent 3 Upper right air vent a Automatic climate control panel 4 Thumbwheel for upper right air vent b Thumbwheel for center air vent 5 Thumbwheel for lower right air vent c Center air vent, left, adjustable d Lower left air vent 6 Lower right air vent e Thumbwheel for lower left air vent Warning! G When operating the automatic climate control, the air that enters the passenger compartment through the air vents in the footwell can be very hot or very cold (depending on the set temperature). This may cause burn or frostbite to unprotected skin in the immediate area of the air vents. Always keep sufficient distance between unprotected parts of the body and the footwell air vents. If necessary, change the air flow using the air distribution controls to direct the air away from the footwell air vents ( page 215). 213 Controls in detail Automatic climate control Automatic climate control panel 214 1 Air volume, left (manual) 7 Air distribution, right (manual) 2 Temperature control, left 8 AC cooling on/off 3 Display 9 4 Temperature control, right 5 Air volume, right (manual) Residual heat and ventilation/ Automatic climate control on/off button 6 Air distribution, right (automatic) a Air distribution, left (manual) b Air distribution, left (automatic) Controls in detail Automatic climate control Activating the climate control system Increasing Adjusting air distribution  Switch on ignition ( page 54).  Push top of temperature control 4 and/or 6 ( page 214) until the dis- Use the air distribution controls 7 and a ( page 214) to separately adjust the air distribution on each side of the passenger compartment. The following symbols are found on the controls:  Press button M or U. Deactivating the climate control system It is possible to completely deactivate the automatic climate control system.  Press button M. ! The fresh air supply to the vehicle interior is shut off. Setting the temperature Use temperature controls 2 for the left side or 4 ( page 214) for the right side to separately adjust the air temperature on each side of the passenger compartment. You should raise or lower the temperature setting in small increments, preferably starting at 72°F (22°C). play shows the desired temperature. The automatic climate control system will accordingly adjust the interior air temperature. Decreasing  Push bottom of temperature control 4 and/or 6 ( page 214) un- til the display shows the desired temperature. The automatic climate control system will accordingly adjust the interior air temperature. Symbol Function Ü Directs air to roof vents or upper side, center and lower side vents Û Directs air to roof vents or upper side, footwell, center and lower side vents Ú Directs air to footwell, center and lower side vents a Directs air to center and lower side vents Y Directs air to the footwell air vents i When operating the climate control system in automatic mode, you will only rarely need to adjust the temperature, air volume and air distribution. 215 Controls in detail Automatic climate control Adjusting manually Adjusting air volume  Press the desired air distribution control 7 and/or a ( page 214). Adjusting manually The indicator lamp on the U button goes out. The air volume is controlled automatically while the air distribution is controlled manually in the respective zone. The selected air distribution is shown in the display. Adjusting automatically  Press left or right U button. The indicator lamp on the button comes on. The air distribution is adjusted automatically. Seven blower speeds are available.  Press
to decrease or Q ( page 214) to increase air volume to the desired level. The indicator lamp on the U button goes out. The air volume is controlled manually while the air distribution is controlled automatically in the respective zone. The selected blower speed is shown in the display. Adjusting automatically  Press left or right U button. The indicator lamp on the button comes on. The selected blower speed in the display disappears. The air volume is adjusted automatically. 216 Air conditioning The air conditioning is operational while the engine is running and cools the interior air to the temperature set by the operator. i Condensation may drip out from underneath the vehicle. This is normal and not an indication of a malfunction. Deactivating It is possible to deactivate the air conditioning (cooling) function of the automatic climate control system. The air in the vehicle will then no longer be cooled or dehumidified.  Press button AC OFF ( page 214). The indicator lamp on the button AC OFF comes on. Controls in detail Automatic climate control Activating Residual heat and ventilation i Moist air can fog up the windows. You can dehumidify the air with the air conditioning. With the engine switched off, it is possible to continue to heat or ventilate the interior for up to 30 minutes. This feature makes use of the residual heat produced by the engine. How long the system will provide heating depends on the coolant temperature and the temperature set by the operator. The blower will run at speed setting 1 regardless of the air distribution control setting.  Press AC OFF again ( page 214). The indicator lamp on the button AC OFF goes out. The air conditioning uses the refrigerant R134a. This refrigerant is free of CFCs which are harmful to the ozone layer. i If the AC OFF button on the automatic climate control panel starts to flash, this indicates that the air conditioning is losing refrigerant. The compressor has turned itself off. The air conditioning cannot be turned on again. Have the air conditioning checked at the nearest authorized Maybach Studio. Activating  Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 1 or 0 or remove it from the starter switch.  Press button T ( page 214). The indicator lamp on button T comes on. Deactivating  Press button T ( page 214). The indicator lamp on button T goes out. Solar panel* The solar cells convert natural light into electrical energy. When the engine is switched off, the energy generated automatically switches on the ventilation fan. The constant air flow creates a cooler temperature for cars parked in the sunlight. The air flow depends on the intensity of the solar radiation. The ventilation starts two minutes after switching off the engine. The residual heat is automatically turned off:
when the ignition is switched on
after about 30 minutes
if the battery voltage drops 217 Controls in detail Power windows Opening and closing the windows The side windows can be opened and closed electrically. The switches for all of the side windows are on the driver’s door. The switches for the respective windows are on the front passenger door and the rear doors. Power window switches on the driver’s door 1 2 3 4 5 Left front window Right front window Right rear window Left rear window Rear window override switch ( page 94) 218 Warning! G When closing the windows, make sure there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure. The closing of the door windows can be immediately halted by releasing the switch or, if switch was pressed past the resistance point and released, by pressing the respective switch. The door windows are equipped with the express-close and automatic reversal function. If a door window encounters an obstruction that blocks its path in a circumstance where you pressed the switch past the resistance point and released it to close the window, the automatic reversal function will stop the window and open it slightly. If the window encounters an obstruction that blocks its path in a circumstance where you are closing the window by pressing and holding the switch, by pressing and holding button ‹ on the SmartKey, or by pressing and holding the lock button (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO**) on the outside door handle, the automatic reversal function will not operate. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment can cause an accident and/or serious personal injury. i You can also open or close the windows using the SmartKey, see "Summer opening feature" ( page 220) and "Convenience closing feature" ( page 221). You can close and reopen the windows using the air recirculation button , ( page 205) or the charcoal filter button e ( page 207). Controls in detail Power windows i Opening the windows Operating the windows from the rear is not possible if you activate the override switch ( page 94).  Press switch 1 to 4 at the i With the SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or removed from the starter switch, the power windows can be operated

until you open the driver’s or passenger door Fully opening the windows (Express-open) symbol k to resistance point. The corresponding window will move downwards until you release the switch. Vehicles with rear side window curtains* ( page 281): When opening a side window with the rear side window curtain not completely opened, the curtain will open first.  Switch on ignition ( page 54). symbol k past the resistance point and release. The corresponding window opens completely. Closing the windows  Press switch 1 to 4 at the symbol j to resistance point. The corresponding window will move upwards until you release the switch. for at least five minutes. i  Press switch 1 to 4 at the Warning! G If you press and hold the switch up when closing the window, and upward movement of the window is blocked by some obstruction including but not limited to arms, hands, fingers, etc., the automatic reversal will not operate. Fully closing the windows (Express-close)  Press switch 1 to 4 at the symbol j past the point of resistance and release. The corresponding window closes completely. Warning! G Driver's door only: If within five seconds you again press the switch past the resistance point and release, the automatic reversal will not func tion. 219 Controls in detail Power windows  ! If the upward movement of the window is blocked during the closing procedure, the window will stop and open slightly. Remove the obstruction, press the respective power window switch at the symbol j again past the resistance point and release. If the window still does not close when there is no obstruction, press and hold the respective power window switch at the symbol j. The side window will then close without the obstruction sensor function. Stopping the power windows during Express-operation  Briefly press the respective power window switch again. 220 Synchronizing power windows The power windows must be synchronized

after the battery has been disconnected if the power windows cannot be fully opened (Express-open) or closed (Express-close) Each power window must be synchronized.  Switch on ignition ( page 54).  Press and hold the power window switches at the symbol j until the windows are completely closed.  Keep pressing the switches for ap- proximately one second. The power windows are synchronized. Summer opening feature If the weather is warm, you can ventilate the vehicle before driving off by simultaneously:
opening the side windows
opening the tilt/sliding sunroof
turning on the seat ventilation* for the driver’s seat i The seat ventilation* for the driver’s seat is automatically set to the highest level if activated via summer opening feature. Controls in detail Power windows Convenience closing feature When you lock the vehicle, you can close the windows and tilt/sliding sunroof simultaneously.  Aim transmitter eye of the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** at the front outside door handle ( page 220).  Press and hold button ‹ until the  Aim transmitter eye of the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** at the front outside door handle.  Press and hold button Œ until the windows and tilt/sliding sunroof have reached the desired position.  Release button Œ to interrupt pro- cedure. Warning! When closing the windows and the tilt/ sliding sunroof, be sure that there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure. If potential danger exists, proceed as follows:
windows and tilt/sliding sunroof are completely closed.  Release button ‹ to interrupt pro- cedure. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO**:  Press and hold button ‹ or the lock button on the door handle ( page 76) until the windows and tilt/sliding sunroof are completely closed. G Release button ‹. To reverse direction of movement, press Œ for opening or ‹ for closing. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO**:
Release lock button on the outside door handle ( page 76).
Pull on the outside door handle and hold firmly. The side windows and the tilt/sliding sunroof will open for as long as the outside door handle is held but the door not opened.  Release button ‹ or the lock but- ton at door to interrupt procedure. 221 Controls in detail Power tilt/sliding sunroof Opening and closing the power tilt/ sliding sunroof (Maybach 57) The tilt/sliding sunroof can be opened and closed electrically. The switch for the tilt/sliding sunroof is on the overhead control panel. Warning! When closing the tilt/sliding sunroof, make sure there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure. 5 Screen With the sunroof closed or tilted open, screen 5 can be slid into the roof opening to guard against sun rays. When sliding the sunroof open, the screen will also retract. Sunroof switch 1 2 3 4 Push back to slide sunroof open Push forward to slide sunroof closed Pull down to lower sunroof at rear Push up to raise sunroof at rear 222 G The opening/closing procedure of the tilt/ sliding sunroof can be immediately halted by releasing the switch or, if the switch was moved past the resistance point and released, by moving the switch in any direction. The tilt/sliding sunroof is made out of glass. In the event of an accident, the glass may shatter. This may result in an opening in the roof. In a vehicle rollover, occupants not wearing their seat belts or not wearing them properly may be thrown out of the opening. Such an opening also presents a potential for injury for occupants wearing their seat belts properly as entire body parts or portions of them may protrude from the passenger compartment. Controls in detail Power tilt/sliding sunroof When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment can cause an accident and/or serious personal injury. ! To avoid damaging the seals, do not transport any objects with sharp edges which can stick out of the tilt/sliding sunroof. Do not open the tilt/sliding sunroof if there is snow or ice on the roof, as this could result in malfunctions. The tilt/sliding sunroof can be opened or closed manually should an electrical malfunction occur ( page 425). i You can also open or close the tilt/ sliding sunroof using the SmartKey, see "Summer opening feature" ( page 220) and "Convenience closing feature" ( page 221). You can close and reopen the tilt/sliding sunroof using the air recirculation button , ( page 205) or the charcoal filter button e ( page 207). i With the SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or removed from the starter switch, the tilt/sliding sunroof can be operated

until you open the driver’s or passenger door for up to approximately five minutes Opening and closing the power tilt/sliding sunroof  To open, close, raise or lower the tilt/ sliding sunroof, move the switch to the resistance point in the required direction 1 to 4.  Release the sunroof switch when the tilt/sliding sunroof has reached the desired position. Fully opening (Express-open) and closing (Express-close) the power sliding/ pop-up roof  To open, close, raise or lower the tilt/ sliding sunroof, move the switch past the resistance point in the required direction 1 to 4 and release. The tilt/sliding sunroof opens or closes completely.  Switch on ignition ( page 54). 223 Controls in detail Power tilt/sliding sunroof Stopping the power tilt/sliding sunroof  Move the switch in any direction. i If the movement of the tilt/sliding sunroof is blocked during the closing procedure, the roof will stop and reopen slightly. Synchronizing the power tilt/sliding sunroof (Maybach 57) The tilt/sliding sunroof must be synchronized  Remove the respective fuse from the fuse box ( page 451).
after the consumer battery has been disconnected  Switch on ignition ( page 54).
the tilt/sliding sunroof has been closed manually
a malfunction
the tilt/sliding sunroof does not open smoothly  Reinsert the fuse in the main fuse box.  Move and hold the sunroof switch in direction of arrow 4 until the tilt/ sliding sunroof is fully raised at the rear.  Keep holding the sunroof switch in direction of arrow 4 for approximately one second.  Check the Express-open feature ( page 223). If the tilt/sliding sunroof opens completely, the roof is synchronized. Otherwise repeat the above steps. 224 Controls in detail Power tilt/sliding sunroof Opening and closing the power tilt/sliding sunroof (Maybach 62) The tilt/sliding sunroof can be opened and closed electrically. You can operate the tilt/sliding sunroof from the cockpit or from the rear passenger compartment. Warning! G When closing the tilt/sliding sunroof, make sure there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure. The opening/closing procedure of the tilt/ sliding sunroof can be immediately halted by releasing the switch or, if the switch was moved past the resistance point and released, by moving the switch in any direction. The tilt/sliding sunroof is made out of glass. In the event of an accident, the glass may shatter. This may result in an opening in the roof. In a vehicle rollover, occupants not wearing their seat belts or not wearing them properly may be thrown out of the opening. Such an opening also presents a potential for injury for occupants wearing their seat belts properly as entire body parts or portions of them may protrude from the passenger compartment. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment can cause an accident and/or serious personal injury. Warning! G When closing the screen, make sure no one can be caught and/or injured. In case of danger, release the switch and, if necessary, push the switch in direction "open". ! To avoid damaging the seals, do not transport any objects with sharp edges which can stick out of the tilt/sliding sunroof. Do not open the tilt/sliding sunroof if there is snow or ice on the roof, as this could result in malfunctions. The tilt/sliding sunroof can be opened or closed manually should an electrical malfunction occur ( page 425). i You can also open or close the tilt/ sliding sunroof using the SmartKey, see "Summer opening feature" ( page 220) and "Convenience closing feature" ( page 221). You can close and reopen the tilt/sliding sunroof using the air recirculation button , ( page 205) or the charcoal filter button e ( page 207). 225 Controls in detail Power tilt/sliding sunroof i Operating from the cockpit i With the SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or removed from the starter switch, the tilt/sliding sunroof can be operated The switch for the tilt/sliding sunroof is on the overhead control panel. If the screen is closed, the screen opens first when you push the sunroof switch in direction of arrow 1.
until you open the driver’s or passenger door Push the sunroof switch again in direction of arrow 1 to open the tilt/ sliding sunroof.
for up to approximately five minutes The screen only operates with the tilt/ sliding sunroof closed.  Switch on ignition ( page 54). Opening and closing the screen  To open or close the screen, move the Sunroof switch, front 1 Push back to slide screen or sunroof open 2 Push forward to slide screen or sunroof closed 3 Pull down to lower sunroof at rear 4 Push up to raise sunroof at rear 226 sunroof switch to the resistance point in the required direction of arrow 1 or 2. Release the sunroof switch when the screen has reached the desired position. Controls in detail Power tilt/sliding sunroof Opening and closing the power tilt/sliding sunroof Stopping the power tilt/sliding sunroof during Express-operation Operating from the rear passenger compartment  Open the screen if it is closed.  Move the switch in any direction. The switches are in the storage compartment under the rear center armrest.  To open, close, raise, or lower the tilt/ sliding sunroof, move the sunroof switch to resistance point in the required direction of arrows 1 to 4.  Release the sunroof switch when the i If the movement of the tilt/sliding sunroof is blocked during the closing procedure, the tilt/sliding sunroof will stop and reopen slightly. tilt/sliding sunroof has reached the desired position. Fully opening (Express-open) and closing (Express-close) the power tilt/sliding sunroof  Open the screen if it is closed. Sunroof switch, rear  To open, close, raise, or lower the tilt/ 1 2 3 4 sliding sunroof, move the sunroof switch past the resistance point in the required direction of arrows 1 to 4 and release. The tilt/sliding sunroof opens or closes completely. Press to lower sunroof at rear Press to slide screen or sunroof closed Press to slide screen or sunroof open Switch for screen and sliding portion of roof 5 Press to raise rear roof at rear 6 Switch for tilt portion of roof 227 Controls in detail Power tilt/sliding sunroof i If the screen is closed, the screen will open first when you press sunroof switch 4 at 3. Opening and closing the power tilt/sliding sunroof Stopping the power tilt/sliding sunroof during Express-operation  Open the screen if it is closed.  Press sunroof switch 4 again.  To open or close the tilt/sliding sun- Press sunroof switch 4 again at 3 to open the tilt/sliding sunroof. roof, press sunroof switch 4 to the resistance point at 3 or 2. The screen only operates with the tilt/ sliding sunroof closed.  Release sunroof switch 4 when the tilt/sliding sunroof has reached the desired position.  Switch on ignition ( page 54). Opening and closing the screen  To open or close the screen, press Fully opening (Express-open) and closing (Express-close) the power tilt/sliding sunroof sunroof switch 4 at 3 or 2.  Open the screen if it is closed. Release the sunroof switch when the screen has reached the desired position.  To open or close the tilt/sliding sun- Fully opening (Express-open) and closing (Express-close) the screen  To open or close the screen, press sunroof switch 4 past the resistance point at 3 or 2 and release.  The screen opens or closes complete- ly. 228 roof, press sunroof switch 4 past the resistance point at 3 or 2 and release. The rear tilt/sliding sunroof opens or closes completely. i If the movement of the tilt/sliding sunroof is blocked during the closing procedure, the tilt/sliding sunroof will stop and reopen slightly. Raising and lowering the power tilt/sliding sunroof  Open the screen if it is closed.  To raise or lower the tilt/sliding sun- roof, press sunroof switch 6 to the resistance point at 1 or 5.  Release sunroof switch 6 when the tilt/sliding sunroof has reached the desired position. Controls in detail Power tilt/sliding sunroof Synchronizing the power tilt/sliding sunroof (Maybach 62) The tilt/sliding sunroof must be synchronized  Remove the respective fuse from the fuse box ( page 451).
after the consumer battery has been disconnected  Switch on ignition ( page 54).
the tilt/sliding sunroof has been closed manually switch again.
a malfunction i
the tilt/sliding sunroof does not open smoothly Fully raising and lowering the power tilt/ sliding sunroof  Open the screen if it is closed.  To raise or lower the tilt/sliding sun- roof, press sunroof switch 6 past the resistance point at 1 or 5 and release.  To stop the procedure, press the Vehicles with rear center seat*: For operation with the Pocket PC remote control* ( page 332).  Reinsert the fuse in the main fuse box.  If the tilt/sliding sunroof is raised at the rear, lower and close it.  Move and hold the sunroof switch in direction of arrow 4 ( page 226) or press sunroof switch 6 at 5 ( page 227) until the tilt/sliding sunroof is fully raised at the rear.  Keep pressing the respective switch for approximately one second.  Check the Express-open feature ( page 227). If the tilt/sliding sunroof opens completely, the roof is synchronized. Otherwise repeat the above steps. 229 Controls in detail Electrotransparent roof* Operating the electrotransparent roof You can operate the electrotransparent roof from the cockpit or from the rear passenger compartment. Warning! G When closing the screen, make sure no one can be caught and/or injured. In case of danger, release the switch and, if necessary, push the switch in direction "open". The electrotransparent roof is made out of glass. In the event of an accident, the glass may shatter. This may result in an opening in the roof. In a vehicle rollover, occupants not wearing their seat belts or not wearing them properly may be thrown out of the opening. Such an opening also presents a potential for injury for occupants wearing their seat belts properly as entire body parts or portions of them may protrude from the passenger compartment. 230 When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment can cause an accident and/or serious personal injury. Operating from the cockpit The switch for the electrotransparent roof is on the overhead control unit. i With the SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or removed from the starter switch, the electrotransparent roof can be operated
until you open the driver’s or passenger door
for up to approximately five minutes  Switch on ignition ( page 54). 1 Push back to slide screen closed 2 Push forward to slide screen open 3 Pull down to make the electrotransparent roof opaque/switch off roof lighting 4 Push up to make the electrotransparent roof transparent/switch on roof lighting Controls in detail Electrotransparent roof* Opening the screen Fully opening the screen (Express-open)  Slide the switch to the resistance  Move the switch past the resistance point in direction of arrow 2.  Release the switch when the screen has reached the desired position. point in direction of arrow 2 and release. The screen opens completely. Closing the screen Fully closing the screen (Express-close)  Move the switch to the resistance  Move the switch past the resistance point in direction of arrow 1.  Release the switch when the screen has reached the desired position. point in direction of arrow 1 and release. The electrotransparent roof turns opaque and the screen closes completely. Stopping the screen during Express-operation  Move the switch in any direction. Making the electrotransparent roof transparent The screen must be completely open.  Push the switch in direction of arrow 4. Making the electrotransparent roof opaque The screen must be completely open.  Pull the switch in direction of arrow 3. Switching on roof lighting The screen must be completely closed.  Press the switch in direction of arrow 4. Switching off roof lighting  Pull the switch in direction of arrow 3. 231 Controls in detail Electrotransparent roof* Operating from the rear passenger compartment The switches are in the storage compartment under the rear center armrest. Opening and closing the screen  To open or close the screen, press switch 4 to the resistance point at 3 or 2. Release the switch when the screen has reached the desired position. 232 The screen opens automatically and the electrotransparent roof turns transparent. Making the electrotransparent roof opaque  To open or close the screen, press  If the screen is closed, open it com- The screen opens or closes completely. Press to make roof opaque Press to slide screen closed Press to slide screen open Switch for screen Press to make roof transparent Switch for electrotransparent roof  Press switch 6 at 5. Fully opening (Express-open) and closing (Express-close) the screen switch 4 past the resistance point at 3 or 2 and release. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Making the electrotransparent roof transparent Stopping the screen during Express-operation  Press switch 4 again. pletely.  Press switch 6 at 1.  The electrotransparent roof turns opaque. i Vehicles with rear center seat*: For operation with the Pocket PC remote control* ( page 330). Controls in detail Driving systems  Driving systems The driving systems of your vehicle are described on the following pages:
Cruise control and Distronic**, with which the vehicle can maintain a preset speed. Cruise control Cruise control automatically maintains the speed you set for your vehicle.
Airmatic DC adjusts the vehicle suspension characteristics automatically and controls the vehicle level. Use of cruise control is recommended for driving at a constant speed for extended periods of time. You can set or resume cruise control at any speed over 20 mph (30 km/h).
Vehicle level control, with which you can change the vehicle level The cruise control function is operated by means of the cruise control lever.
Parktronic, which serves as a parking assistant. The cruise control lever is the uppermost lever on the left-hand side of the steering column ( page 234). For information on the BAS, ABS, ESP and SBC driving systems, see "Driving safety systems" ( page 96). Warning! G Cruise control is a convenience system designed to assist the driver during vehicle operation. The driver is and must remain at all times responsible for the vehicle speed and for safe brake operation. Only use cruise control if the road, traffic and weather conditions make it advisable to travel at a steady speed.
The use of cruise control can be dangerous on winding roads or in heavy traffic because conditions do not allow safe driving at a steady speed.
The use of cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads. Rapid changes in tire traction can result in wheel spin and loss of control.
Deactivate cruise control when driving in fog. The "Resume" function should only be operated if the driver is fully aware of the previously set speed and wishes to resume this particular preset speed. 233 Controls in detail Driving systems The selected speed appears in the multifunction display for approximately 5 seconds, and the corresponding speedometer segments from the selected speed to the vehicle maximum speed are illuminated. i 1 2 3 4 Sets current or higher speed Sets current or lower speed Cancels cruise control Resumes at last set speed Setting current speed  Accelerate or decelerate to the de- On uphill or downhill grades, cruise control may not be able to maintain the set speed. Once the grade eases, the set speed will be resumed. Canceling cruise control There are several ways to cancel cruise control:  Step on the brake pedal. Cruise control is canceled. The last speed set is stored for later use. sired speed.  Briefly lift the cruise control lever in direction of arrow 1 or depress in direction of arrow 2. The current speed is set.  Remove your foot from the accelera- tor pedal. Cruise control is activated. 234 or  Briefly push the cruise control lever in direction of arrow 3. Cruise control is canceled. The last speed set is stored for later use. ! Moving the gear selector lever to position N while driving also cancels cruise control. However, the gear selector lever should not be moved to position N while driving, except to coast when the vehicle is in danger of skidding (e.g. on icy roads). i The last stored speed is canceled when you turn off the engine. Controls in detail Driving systems Setting a higher speed i  Lift the cruise control lever in direc- When you use the cruise control lever to decelerate, the transmission will automatically downshift if the engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle sufficiently. tion of arrow 1 and hold it until the desired speed is reached.  Release the cruise control lever. The new speed is set. i Depressing the accelerator pedal does not deactivate cruise control. After brief acceleration (e.g. for passing), cruise control resumes the last speed set. Fine adjustment in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h) increments Faster  Briefly tip the cruise control lever in direction of arrow 1. Setting a lower speed Slower  Depress the cruise control lever in di-  Briefly tip the cruise control lever in rection of arrow 2 and hold it until the desired speed is reached.  Release the cruise control lever. The new speed is set. direction of arrow 2. Setting to last stored speed ("Resume" function) Warning! G The speed stored in memory should only be set again if prevailing road conditions permit. Possible acceleration or deceleration differences arising from returning to preset speed could cause an accident and/ or serious injury to you and others.  Briefly push the cruise control lever in direction of arrow 4. The cruise control resumes the last set speed.  Remove your foot from the accelera- tor pedal. The selected speed appears in the multifunction display for approximately 5 seconds, and the corresponding speedometer segments from the selected speed to the vehicle maximum speed are illuminated. 235 Controls in detail Driving systems Distronic** When activated, the Distronic adaptive cruise control system increases driving convenience afforded by the cruise control during travel on expressways and other major roads.

If the Distronic distance sensor detects a slower moving vehicle directly ahead, your vehicle speed will be reduced so that you follow that vehicle at a preset distance. If there is no vehicle directly ahead of you, Distronic will function in the same way as cruise control ( page 233). Warning! G Distronic adaptive cruise control is no substitute for active driving involvement. It does not react to stationary objects, nor does it recognize or predict the curvature and lane layout or the movement of vehicles ahead. Distronic can only apply a maximum of 20% of the vehicle’s braking power. 236 It is the driver’s responsibility at all times to be attentive to traffic and road conditions and to provide the steering, braking and other driving inputs necessary to retain control of the vehicle. Warning! G Distronic is a convenience system. Its speed adjustment reduction capability is intended to make cruise control more effective and usable when traffic speeds vary. However, it is not intended to, nor does it, replace the need for extreme care. The responsibility for the vehicle speed and the distance to the vehicle ahead, including most importantly brake operation to assure safe stopping distance, always rests with the driver. Distronic cannot take street and traffic conditions into account. Warning! G Distronic requires familiarity with its operational characteristics. We strongly recommend that you review the following information carefully before operating the system. i For operation in the USA only: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. Controls in detail Driving systems Warning! G Distronic cannot take street and traffic conditions into account. Only use Distronic if the road, weather and traffic conditions make it advisable to travel at a steady speed. Warning! G Use of Distronic can be dangerous on slippery roads. Rapid changes in tire traction can result in wheel spin and loss of control. Distronic does not act upon adverse sight distance conditions. Do not use Distronic during conditions of fog and heavy rain, snow or sleet. Warning! G Close attention to road and traffic conditions is imperative at all times, regardless of whether or not Distronic is activated. Use of Distronic can be dangerous on winding roads or in heavy traffic because conditions do not allow safe driving at a steady speed. Warning! G The "Resume" function should only be operated if the driver is fully aware of the previously set speed and wishes to resume this particular preset speed. Distronic displays in the speedometer dial Distronic will not react to stationary objects in the roadway (e.g. a stopped vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle). Distronic will also not respond to oncoming vehicles. Switch off Distronic:
when changing from the left to the right lane if vehicles are moving more slowly in the left lane
when entering a turn lane or highway off ramp
in complex driving situations, such as in highway construction zones In these situations, Distronic will continue to maintain the set speed unless deactivated. Distronic is designed and intended only to maintain a set speed and keep a set distance from moving objects in front of it. Set speed If Distronic is activated, one or two segments come on around the set speed. 237 Controls in detail Driving systems i The vehicle speed displayed on the speedometer can briefly vary from the speed setting on the Distronic system. If Distronic detects a vehicle directly ahead, the segments from the speed of the vehicle ahead to the set speed come on. If Distronic calculates that there is a danger of collision
the distance warning lamp l in the instrument cluster comes on red
an intermittent warning sounds  Immediately brake the vehicle to avoid a collision. Under no circumstances should the driver await the intermittent warning sound before braking. See the following warning note. Segments The intermittent warning sound ceases and the red distance warning lamp l goes out when the necessary distance to the vehicle ahead is again established. Warning! G An intermittent warning sounds and the distance warning lamp l in the instrument cluster is illuminated if the Distronic system calculates that the distance to the vehicle ahead and your vehicle’s current speed indicate that Distronic will not be capable of slowing the vehicle sufficiently to maintain the preset following distance, which creates a danger of a collision. Immediately brake the vehicle to increase the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you. The warning sound is intended as a final caution that you have not interceded with your own braking inputs to avoid a potentially dangerous situation. Do not wait for the operation of the warning signal to intercede with your own braking, as that will result in potentially dangerous emergency braking which will not always result in an impact being avoided. Tailgating increases the risk of an accident. 238 Controls in detail Driving systems Warning! G Distronic brakes your vehicle with a maximum of 6.5 ft/s2 (2 m/s2). This corresponds to about 20% of the maximum deceleration ability of your vehicle. Distronic brakes the vehicle in an effort to restore the preset distance or to maintain the speed. The brake pedal is automatically applied as this happens which results in the brake pedal moving. Keep driver’s foot area clear at all times, including the area under the brake pedal. Objects stored in this area may impair pedal movement which could interfere with the braking ability of the Distronic system. Do not place your foot under the brake pedal – your foot could become caught. Distronic menu in the control system In the Distronic menu you can read the current settings for Distronic. What appears in the display depends on whether Distronic and the distance warning function are turned on or off.  Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until you see one of the following displays. Distronic deactivated If Distronic is deactivated, you can see the standard display of Distronic in the multifunction display. Distronic activated If you turn Distronic on, you will see the set speed in the multifunction display for about five seconds. If Distronic is activated, you can see the following display in the multifunction display. 1 Distronic activated 1 Vehicle ahead, if detected 2 Actual distance to vehicle ahead 3 Preset distance threshold to vehicle ahead 4 Your vehicle 5 Symbol for activated distance warning function 239 Controls in detail Driving systems Cruise control lever Activating Distronic Setting the current speed The Distronic system is operated by means of the cruise control lever. You can activate Distronic if  Accelerate or decelerate to the de- The cruise control lever is the uppermost lever on the left-hand side of the steering column.

you are driving between 25 mph (40 km/h) and 110 mph (180 km/h) the ESP is activated ( page 100) If Distronic has not been activated after pressing the cruise control lever you will see the message --- in the multifunction display. In the following cases you cannot activate Distronic: 1 2 3 4 Sets current or higher speed Sets current or lower speed Deactivates Distronic Resumes at last set speed 240
up to two minutes after starting the engine
when you brake
if you have set the parking brake
if the gear selector lever is in position P, R or N
if the ESP is switched off sired speed.  Briefly lift the cruise control lever in direction of arrow 1 or depress in direction of arrow 2. Distronic is activated and the current speed is set.  Remove your foot from the accelera- tor pedal. i If you do not take your foot off of the accelerator completely, the following message will appear in the multifunction display: DISTRONIC OVERRIDE Distronic will not work to maintain the distance to slower moving vehicles in front of you. Your vehicle speed will then be determined only by the accelerator pedal position. Controls in detail Driving systems Setting a higher speed Setting a lower speed  Briefly tip the cruise control lever in direction of arrow 1 ( page 240) to  Briefly tip the cruise control lever in direction of arrow 2 ( page 240) to increase vehicle speed in increments of 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h). decrease vehicle speed in increments of 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h). The new speed is set. The new speed is set. The stored speed is displayed in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds, and one or two segments around the stored speed come on the speedometer ( page 237). The stored speed is displayed in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds, and one or two segments around the stored speed come on the speedometer ( page 237). i i Depressing the accelerator pedal does not deactivate Distronic. After brief acceleration (e.g. for passing), the cruise control resumes the last speed set. When you use the cruise control lever to decelerate, the transmission will automatically downshift if the rate of deceleration is too low. Fine adjustment in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h) increments Faster  Briefly tip the cruise control lever in direction of arrow 4 ( page 240). 241 Controls in detail Driving systems Setting to last stored speed ("Resume" function) Warning! G The speed stored in memory should only be set again if prevailing road conditions permit. Possible acceleration or deceleration differences arising from returning to preset speed could cause an accident and/ or serious injury to you and others.  Briefly tip the cruise control lever in direction of arrow 4 ( page 240). Distronic is set to the last stored speed.  Remove your foot from the accelera- tor pedal. 242 Deactivating Distronic There are several ways to deactivate the Distronic system: Distronic deactivates automatically when:
You set the parking brake.  Briefly tip the cruise control lever in direction of arrow 3 ( page 240).
You drive slower than 22 mph (35 km/h). or
The ESP is active ( page 100) or you deactivate the ESP.
You move the transmission gear selector lever into position N.  Step on the brake pedal. Distronic is deactivated. The last speed set is stored into memory. i The following message will appear in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds: DISTRONIC OFF. The last stored speed is deleted when you turn off the engine. A signal will sound. The DISTRONIC OFF message appears in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds. Warning! G Distronic switches off and releases the brakes when the vehicle decelerates below the minimum speed of approximately 22 mph (35 km/h) by operation of the system. At that time the driver must apply the brakes in order to reduce vehicle speed further or bring it to a stop. Controls in detail Driving systems Setting the following distance in Distronic You can set the specified following distance for Distronic by varying the time setting between 1.0 and 2.0 seconds. Using this time setting and the current speed of your vehicle, Distronic calculates and sets the required following distance to the vehicle ahead. The set distance will be shown in the multifunction display field. Warning! The distance warning function on/off button and thumbwheel for setting distance are located on the lower part of the front center console. arrow 4. Decreasing distance Decreasing the distance setting tells Distronic to maintain a shorter following distance to the vehicle ahead.  Turn thumbwheel 3 direction of arrow 5. Distance warning function G It is up to the driver to exercise discretion to select the appropriate setting given road conditions, traffic, driver’s preferred driving style and applicable laws and driving recommendations for safe following distance.  Turn thumbwheel 3 direction of 1 Distance warning function on/off button 2 Indicator lamp 3 Thumbwheel for setting distance 4 Increasing distance 5 Decreasing distance Increasing distance Increasing the distance setting tells Distronic to maintain a greater following distance to the vehicle ahead. When Distronic is deactivated, this function will continue to warn you when recognizing a stationary obstacle or a slower vehicle moving in the vehicle’s path and the danger of a collision exists:
The distance warning lamp l in the instrument cluster comes on
An intermittent warning sounds. If these warnings are issued, you must brake manually to maintain a safe distance and avoid a collision with the vehicle ahead. 243 Controls in detail Driving systems When pressing the brake pedal, the warning sound stops. The warning sound also stops when the distance to the vehicle ahead is sufficient again without applying the brake pedal. In this case the distance warning lamp l also extinguishes. Warning! G If the distance warning lamp l in the instrument cluster comes on while driving and/or an intermittent warning sounds, immediate attention on the part of the driver is required. As required by the traffic situation, apply the brakes and navigate around a possible obstacle. However, do not drive by relying on the distance warning function, as this will result in an emergency braking application. Especially depending on road surface conditions and driver reaction, this will not always enable you to avoid a collision. 244 i Complex driving situations are not always fully recognized by Distronic. This could result in wrong or missing distance warnings. Activating  Press button 1. Indicator lamp 2 comes on. A loudspeaker symbol appears in the multifunction display ( page 239). Warning! Distronic works to maintain the speed selected by the driver unless a moving obstacle proceeding directly ahead of it in the same travel direction is detected (e.g. following another vehicle ahead of you at a distance set by Distronic). This means that:
Your vehicle can pass another vehicle after you change lanes.
While in a sharp turn or if the vehicle in front is in a sharp turn, Distronic could lose sight of a vehicle traveling in front of it, then your vehicle could accelerate to the previously selected speed. Deactivating  Press button 1. The indicator lamp 2 on the button goes out. No loudspeaker symbol appears in the multifunction display. Driving with Distronic This section describes a number of driving situations where special precaution is required on the part of the driver. Be prepared to brake in such situations. This will deactivate the Distronic system. G Distronic regulates only the distance between your vehicle and those directly ahead of it, but does not register stationary objects in the road, e.g.:
a stopped vehicle in a traffic jam
a disabled vehicle
an oncoming vehicle
The driver must always be on the alert, observe all traffic and intercede as required by steering or braking the vehicle. Controls in detail Driving systems Warning! G Distronic should not be used in snowy or icy road conditions. The most likely cause for a malfunctioning system is a dirty sensor (located behind the hood grille), especially at times of snow and ice or heavy rain. In such a case, Distronic will switch off, and the message DISTRONIC CURRENTLY UNAVAILABLE SEE OPERATORS MANUAL appears in the multifunction display. For cleaning and care of the Distronic sensor, see "Cleaning the Distronic system sensor" ( page 378). i Turns and bends If the message DISTRONIC CURRENTLY UNAVAILABLE SEE OPERATORS MANUAL disappears during driving and last speed stored flashes for approximately five seconds, the dirt (e.g. slush) has dissolved; Distronic is again operational. In turns or bends, Distronic may not detect a moving vehicle in front, or it may detect one too soon. This may cause your vehicle to brake late or unexpectedly. 245 Controls in detail Driving systems Offset driving Lane changing Narrow vehicles A vehicle traveling in your lane but offset from your direct line of travel may not be detected by Distronic. There will be insufficient distance to the vehicle ahead. Distronic has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes. There will be insufficient distance to the lane changing vehicle. Because of their narrow profiles, the vehicles traveling near the outer edges of the lane have not yet been detected by Distronic. There will be insufficient distance to the vehicle ahead. 246 Controls in detail Driving systems Airmatic DC (Dual Control) Airmatic automatically selects the optimum suspension tuning and ride height for your vehicle. Airmatic consists of three components:
Adaptive Damping System (ADS)
Stiffness of spring
Vehicle level control The ADS automatically selects the optimum damping for the respective driving conditions. At the same time the suspension is set to either sporty or regular. Damping and suspension are adjusted automatically according to your driving style and road conditions. In addition to the automatic mode designed for your convenience, you can adjust the suspension tuning yourself by selecting from two other levels using the button on the center console. Suspension tuning The suspension tuning is set according to:
Your driving style
Road surface conditions
Your choice of suspension style, "Comfort", "Sporty 1" or "Sporty 2", which you select using the damping button. 247 Controls in detail Driving systems 1 Damping button 2 Indicator lamp 3 Indicator lamp  Start the engine. Vehicle level control  Press damping button 1 until the de- sired suspension style is set. Your vehicle automatically adjusts its ride height to

reduce fuel consumption
increase vehicle safety If both indicator lamps are out, you have chosen the automatic mode for soft damping. The message AIRMATIC DC CONVENIENCE for comfort suspension tuning appears in the multifunction display.
If one indicator lamp is on, the control system supports a primarily dynamic style of driving. The message AIRMATIC DC SPORTS 1 for Sporty 1 suspension tuning appears in the multifunction display.
If both indicator lamps are on, the system is set for a dynamic style of driving. The message AIRMATIC DC SPORTS 2 for Sporty 2 suspension tuning appears in the multifunction display. i The selected suspension style is stored in memory, even after the SmartKey is removed from the starter switch. 248 Warning! G To help avoid personal injury, keep hands and feet away from wheel housing area, and stay away from under the vehicle when lowering the vehicle chassis. Controls in detail Driving systems The following vehicle level settings can be selected when the vehicle is stationary: Vehicle level Suspension when stationary tuning Use for Ride height increase over normal Automatic lowering Indicator (depending on vehicle speed) lamp Normal Comfort For driving on normal roads. None Max. approx. 0.4 in (10 mm) Lamp off Normal Sporty 1 or 2 For driving on normal roads. None Max. approx. 0.6 in (15 mm) Lamp off Raised Comfort For driving on rough roads or with snow chains. Approx. 0.8 in (20 mm) Max. approx. 1.2 in (30 mm) Lamp on Raised Sporty 1 or 2 For driving on rough roads or with snow chains. Approx. 0.8 in (20 mm) Max. approx. 1.4 in (35 mm) Lamp on  Start the engine. The button is located on the lower part of the front center console.  Briefly press button 1 to change from one level setting to the other. The message: AIRMATIC VEHICLE RISING! 1 Vehicle level control button 2 Indicator lamp appears in the multifunction display when changing from normal level to raised level. The indicator lamp 2 is then on. The display switches off  when the vehicle is raised. 249 Controls in detail Driving systems   Press button 1 again to lower the vehicle. The indicator lamp 1 is off. The selected vehicle level setting remains stored in memory even if the engine is turned off and restarted except when you
The vehicle chassis ride height is raised or lowered according to the selected level setting and to the vehicle speed.
exceed a speed of 75 mph (120 km/h) maintain a speed of between 50 mph (80 km/h) and 75 mph (120 km/h) for more than five minutes The vehicle then lowers to regular level. The message:
At a speed above approximately 69 mph (110 km/h), ride height is reduced automatically by up to approximately 1.2 in (30 mm) in Comfort suspension style or by up to approximately 1.4 in (35 mm) in Sporty 1/ Sporty 2 suspension style.
With decreasing speed, the ride height is again raised to the "Normal" level. Normal level or
Raised level
At a speed above approximately 69 mph (110 km/h), ride height is reduced automatically by up to approximately 0.4 in (10 mm) in Comfort suspension style or by up to approximately 0.6 in (15 mm) in Sporty 1/ Sporty 2 suspension style. i With decreasing speed, the ride height is again raised to the "Normal" level. These height adjustments are so small that you may not notice any change. AIRMATIC LEVEL CANCELLED! appears in the multifunction display and the indicator lamp goes out. The display switches off when the vehicle is raised. 250 Select the "Raised" level only when required by current driving conditions. Otherwise
fuel consumption may increase
handling may be impaired Controls in detail Driving systems Parktronic (Parking assist) Warning! Warning! G Parktronic is a supplemental system. It is not intended to, nor does it replace, the need for extreme care. The responsibility during parking and other critical maneuvers always rests with the driver. Special attention must be paid to objects with smooth surfaces or low silhouettes (e.g. trailer couplings, painted posts, or road curbs). Such objects may not be detected by the system and can damage the vehicle. The operational function of the Parktronic can be affected by dirty sensors, especially at times of snow and ice, see "Cleaning the Parktronic system sensors" ( page 378). Interference caused by other ultrasonic signals (e.g. working jackhammers, car wash, or the air brakes of trucks) can cause the system to send erratic indications, and should be taken into consideration. G Make sure no persons or animals are in the area in which you are maneuvering. You could otherwise injure them. The Parktronic system monitors the surroundings of your vehicle with six sensors in the front bumper and four sensors in the rear bumper. The Parktronic system is an electronic aid designed to assist the driver during parking maneuvers. It visually and audibly indicates the relative distance between the vehicle and an obstacle. The Parktronic system is automatically activated when you switch on the ignition, release the parking brake, and placed the gear selector lever in position D, R, or N. The Parktronic system deactivates at speeds over approximately 11 mph (18 km/h). At lower speeds the Parktronic system turns on again. The Parktronic system also deactivates when you place the gear selector lever in position P or depress the parking brake pedal. 1 Sensors in the front bumper Range of the sensors To function properly, the sensors must be free of dirt, ice, snow and slush. Clean the sensors regularly, being careful not to scratch or damage the sensors, see "Cleaning the Parktronic system sensors" ( page 378). 251 Controls in detail Driving systems Front sensors Minimum distance Center approx. 40 in (100 cm) Center approx. 8 in (20 cm) Corners approx. 24 in (60 cm) Corners approx. 6 in (15 cm) Rear sensors Center approx. 48 in (120 cm) Corners approx. 32 in (80 cm) ! During parking maneuvers, pay special attention to objects located above or below the height of the sensors (e.g. planters or trailer hitches). The Parktronic system will not detect such objects at close range and damage to your vehicle or the object may result. Ultrasonic signals from outside sources (e.g. truck air brakes, car wash, or jackhammers) may impair the operation of the Parktronic system. 252 If the system detects an obstacle in this range, all the warning lamps come on and you hear a warning signal. If the obstacle is closer than the minimum distance, the actual distance might no longer be indicated by the system. Controls in detail Driving systems Warning indicators Visual signals indicate to the driver the relative distance between the sensors and an obstacle. The warning indicator for the front area is located above the center air vents in the dashboard. The warning indicator for the rear area is integrated in the rear roof lining ( page 38). In case you still cannot see the warning indicator after lifting up the rear-view mirror:  Adjust the interior rear view mirror by hand until you can see the warning indicator The interior rear view mirror returns to its original position as soon as:
the gear selector lever is no longer in position R
you exceed a speed of 5 mph (8 km/h) Maybach 62 with partition* You have an additional warning indicator for the rear area in the roof lining, in front of the partition. In order for you to see this warning indicator, the interior rear-view mirror tilts slightly upward if:
the partition and curtain are not completely open
the gear selector lever is in position R Warning indicator with eight warning indicator lamps 1 Left front area warning indicator 2 Right front area warning indicator If your vehicle is equipped with this warning indicator, each warning indicator is divided into six yellow and two red segments for either side of the vehicle. The Parktronic system is operational when the first yellow segment is faintly illuminated. 253 Controls in detail Driving systems Warning indicator with seven warning indicator lamps Warning indicators activated The position of the gear selector lever determines which warning indicators will be activated. Gear selector Warning indicator lever position 1 Left front area warning indicator 2 Right front area warning indicator 3 Readiness indicators If your vehicle is equipped with this warning indicator, each warning indicator is divided into five yellow and two red segments for either side of the vehicle. The Parktronic system is ready when the green readiness indicators 3 are illuminated. 254 D Front area activated R or N Rear and front area activated P Neither activated As your vehicle approaches an object, one or more segments will come on, depending on the distance between your vehicle and the object. When the second red segment comes on, you have reached the minimum distance.
Front area: An intermittent acoustic warning will sound as the first red segment comes on and a constant acoustic warning lasting a maximum of two seconds will sound for the second red segment. The signal is canceled when the gear selector lever is placed in position P or the parking brake is activated.
Rear area: An intermittent acoustic warning will sound as the first red segment comes on and a constant acoustic warning lasting a maximum of two seconds will sound for the second red segment. The signal is canceled when the gear selector lever is placed in position D, P, or the parking brake is activated. Controls in detail Driving systems Switching the Parktronic system on/off Switching off the Parktronic system The Parktronic system can be switched off manually.  Press button 1. The Parktronic button is located on the lower part of the front center console. Indicator lamp 2 comes on. Switching on the Parktronic system  Press button 1 again. Indicator lamp 2 goes out. i The Parktronic system is automatically switched on when the ignition is switched on. If only the red segments of the Parktronic warning indicator light up and no warning sounds, then the sensors of the Parktronic system are dirty or malfunctioning. Malfunction may also be caused by interference from other radio or ultrasonic signals. The Parktronic system will switch itself off after 20 seconds.  Clean Parktronic system sensors ( page 378).  Switch on the ignition. or  Check Parktronic operation at anoth- Parktronic malfunction 1 Parktronic on/off 2 Indicator lamp There is a malfunction in the Parktronic system if the red segments of the Parktronic warning indicator come on and a warning sounds. The Parktronic system will switch itself off after 30 seconds and the indicator lamp on the Parktronic button comes on. er location to rule out interference from outside radio or ultrasonic signals.  Have the Parktronic system checked by an authorized Maybach Studio as soon as possible. 255 Controls in detail Loading Cargo tie-down hooks Six hooks are located in the trunk. Carefully secure cargo by applying even load on all hooks with rope of sufficient strength to hold down the cargo. Loading instructions The total load weight including vehicle occupants and luggage/cargo should not exceed the vehicle capacity weight indicated on the corresponding tag located on the driver’s door B-pillar. Warning! G Always fasten items being carried as securely as possible. In an accident, during hard braking or sudden maneuvers, loose items will be thrown around inside the vehicle and can cause injury to vehicle occupants unless the items are securely fastened in the vehicle. To help avoid personal injury during a collision or sudden maneuver, exercise care when transporting cargo. Put luggage or cargo in the trunk if possible. Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the seat backs. Do not place anything on the rearwindow shelf. Never drive vehicle with trunk open. Deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle interior resulting in unconsciousness and death. 256 Controls in detail Useful features  Useful features  To use mirror, lift up cover 2. Vanity mirrors Vanity mirror in the rear Mirror lamp 1 comes on. Vanity mirror in the sun visor i Warning! G Do not use the vanity mirror while driving. Keep the mirrors in the sun visors closed while the vehicle is in motion. Reflected glare can endanger you and others. If you disengage the sun visor from mounting, mirror lamp 1 will switch off ( page 197). Adjusting the vanity mirror  Slide the mirror to the left or to the right. Images in the mirror appear in normal size or larger, depending on the position of the mirror. Example illustration from Maybach 57 3 Vanity mirror 4 Chrome label Opening the vanity mirror  Press chrome label 4. Vanity mirror 3 folds down and the mirror lamp comes on. 1 Mirror lamp 2 Mirror cover Closing the vanity mirror  Push vanity mirror 3 up until it en- gages in place. 257 Controls in detail Useful features Ventilation grille with upper storage box Storage compartments Warning! G Closing the upper storage box  Fold the cover down until it engages in the lock. Luggage nets cannot secure hard or heavy objects.
braking
vehicle maneuvers or
an accident. 258  Press the chrome label. The storage box opens. To help avoid personal injury during a collision or sudden maneuver, exercise care when stowing objects in the vehicle. Put luggage or cargo in the cargo compartment if possible. Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the seat backs. Keep compartment lids closed. This will help to prevent stored objects from being thrown around and injuring vehicle occupants during Opening the upper storage box 1 Upper storage box Controls in detail Useful features Glove box i Unlocking the glove box separately An AUX socket is located in the glove box. Portable audio devices can be plugged in here.  Pull the mechanical key out of the SmartKey ( page 423).  Insert the mechanical key into the Opening glove box lock and turn it to unlocked position 3.  Press button 1. You can now open the glove box. The glove box lid 2 swings down. Storage compartment in the glove box Closing 1 2 3 4 Glove box lid release Glove box lid Unlocked position Locked position  Push lid 2 up to close. A storage compartment for pens, a flashlight and a coin holder is located in the cover of the glove box. Locking the glove box separately Opening i You can lock the glove box separately, e.g. when the vehicle is in the shop for service. The glove box can be heated or cooled.  Pull the mechanical key out of the SmartKey ( page 423). Closing  Insert the mechanical key into the  Lightly push the cover plate up until The glove box can get very warm due to its confined space ( page 209). When storing heat-sensitive objects in the glove box, close the air vent while heating the passenger compartment. glove box lock and turn it to locked position 4.  Lightly touch cover plate. The cover opens automatically. it engages in lock. i The separate locking status of the glove box can only be canceled by means of the mechanical key. 259 Controls in detail Useful features Compartment for the front telephone Warning! Closing  Press button 1 to close. G ! To prevent any damage, the telephone flap must be folded down before closing the telephone compartment. Always keep the compartment for the front telephone closed while driving. The protruding telephone could otherwise cause injury to you and others during
braking
vehicle maneuvers or
an accident. i 1 Compartment lid release 2 Compartment for telephone Opening  Press button 1. The compartment lid opens downward. The telephone handset swings out. 260 The Roadside Assistance button • and the Information button ¡ ( page 298) are located in the compartment for the front telephone. Controls in detail Useful features Storage compartments in the front doors Warning! G Always keep the door storage compartments closed while the vehicle is in motion. Failure to do so may cause the seat belt to catch at the rear and prevent proper positioning of the seat belt. Opening the storage compartment  Lift the lid 1 up. Storage compartments in the rear doors (Maybach 57) Closing the storage compartment  Press the lid 1 down. Opening the storage compartment  Press button 2. The storage compartment 3 opens. Closing the storage compartment  Push the cover plate 3 up until it en- gages in the lock. 1 Headphones storage compartment 2 Storage compartment (for ashtray in vehicles with a rear center seat*) Opening the storage compartment  Lift the lid 1 or 2 up. Closing the storage compartment 1 Storage compartment 2 Opening button 3 Storage compartment with storage space for change and CDs  Press the lid 1 or 2 down. 261 Controls in detail Useful features Storage compartments in the rear doors (Maybach 62) Opening the storage compartment  Lift the lid 1 or 2 up. Storage compartment under the driver’s seat Closing the storage compartment  Press the lid 1 or 2 down. Opening the storage compartment  Press button 3.  Storage compartment 4 opens. Closing the storage compartment 1 2 3 4 Headphones storage compartment Storage compartment Opening button Storage compartment (for ashtray in vehicles with a rear center seat*)  Push the cover plate 4 up until it en- gages in the lock. 1 Tabs Opening the storage compartment  Press tabs 1 together.  Fold the cover forward. Closing the storage compartment  Close the cover until both tabs 1 of lock engage. 262 Controls in detail Useful features Storage compartment and storage compartment/drawer between the front seats (Maybach 62 with partition*) Opening storage compartment  Press button 2 briefly. The storage compartment 1 opens upward. Storage compartments in rear center console Opening/closing the storage compartment/drawer in rear center console Closing storage compartment  Push storage compartment 1 down- ward until it engages in the lock. Opening storage compartment/drawer  Press button 4 briefly. 1 Storage compartment 2 Opening button for storage compartment 3 Storage compartment/drawer 4 Opening button for storage compartment/drawer The storage compartment/drawer 3 opens. Closing storage compartment/drawer  Push storage compartment/ drawer 1 until it engages in the lock. Example illustration from Maybach 57 1 Opening button for storage compartment/drawer 2 Storage compartment/drawer i The remote control for the rear-cabin audiovisual system (see the separate operating manual COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System) is located in the storage compartment/ drawer. 263 Controls in detail Useful features i Maybach 62: Maybach 62 with rear center seat*:  To open, press button 1. In the storage compartment/drawer are: The storage compartment/drawer 2 opens slightly.
the Pocket PC* ( page 311) If necessary:
an additional SOS button, only in Maybach 62 vehicles with partition* or two-way intercom* ( page 298)  Close the champagne flute/bottle holder ( page 271).
buttons for two-way intercom* ( page 287) Maybach 57:  To open, press button 1. The storage compartment/drawer 2 opens.  To close, push storage compartment/ drawer 2 in until it engages in the lock. Opening/closing the upper storage compartment in rear center console (only Maybach 62) or  Close the folding table* ( page 275).  Press button 1 again. The storage compartment/drawer 2 opens fully.  To close, push storage compartment/ drawer 2 in until it engages in the lock. Example illustration from Maybach 62 with partition* 1 Opening button for upper storage compartment 2 Cover  To open, press button 1. The cover 2 swings upward.  To close, press the cover 2 down- ward. The cover 2 engages automatically. 264 Controls in detail Useful features Storage pocket (only Maybach 62) Warning! G Storage pockets for Maybach 62 without partition* Storage pockets for Maybach 62 with partition* Storage pockets are located on the left and right side of the rear center console. Storage pockets are located on the back of the front seats. 1 Storage pocket 1 Storage pocket The storage pocket is intended for storing light-weight items only. Heavy objects, objects with sharp edges or fragile objects may not be transported in the storage pocket. The storage pocket cannot protect transported goods in the event of an accident. 265 Controls in detail Useful features Storage compartments between the rear seats Warning! G Always fold the rear center armrest 6 downward while the vehicle is in motion. During an accident the rear center armrest could open the storage compartment 5. This will help to prevent stored objects from being thrown around. i Example illustration from Maybach 57 1 Upper storage compartment with insert for champagne flutes 2 Opening button for upper storage compartment 3 DVD player compartment and AUX sockets, headphone jacks 4 CD changer compartment 5 Middle storage compartment 6 Rear center armrest with compartment for telephone, storage compartment/refrigerator** underneath 7 Release catch 8 Ashtray/storage compartment* For more information on DVD player, AUX sockets, headphone jacks and CD changer refer to the separate COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions. Opening the upper storage compartment 1  Press the cover closed. The cover engages automatically. Opening/closing the storage compartment in the rear center armrest  To open, release catch 7 and swing cover of the rear center armrest 6 upward.  To close, press the cover of the rear center armrest 6 downward. The cover engages automatically. i There is an additional storage compartment in front of the telephone compartment.  Press button 2. The upper storage compartment opens upward. Opening/closing the storage compartment under the rear center armrest  To open, lift up armrest 6. Opening storage compartments 3, 4, 5 and 8  Press the chrome label on the cover. The compartment opens. 266 Closing storage compartments 3, 4, 5 and 8  To close, press the armrest 6 down- ward. Controls in detail Useful features Storage compartments in vehicles with a rear center seat* Opening/closing the telephone compartment If the third seat is not occupied, you can also use the seat backrest as an armrest.  Press release catch 6 and swing cover 5 upward 8. i There is an additional storage compartment in front of the telephone compartment. Closing the telephone compartment  Press cover 5 down until it engages. Opening the storage compartment  Press the chrome label on storage Example illustration from Maybach 57 Example illustration from Maybach 57 compartment 7. 1 Rear armrest 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 The storage compartment slides out.  Pull the top of armrest 1 out and fold it downward. DVD player CD changer AUX sockets and, headphone jacks Storage compartment Cover Release catch Storage compartment To open telephone compartment Closing the storage compartment  Push storage compartment 7 in until it engages. 267 Controls in detail Useful features i Opening the compartment For more information on DVD player, AUX sockets, headphone jacks and CD changer refer to the separate COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions.  Turn handle 1 or 4 90°. Storage compartments in trunk Umbrella An umbrella is located in the trunk.  Swing the cover down. Closing the compartment  Swing the cover up.  Turn handle 1 or 4 90°. 1 Umbrella 2 Straps  Use straps 2 on the inside of the trunk lid to store and secure umbrella 1. 1 Handle 2 Compartment for navigation system DVD drive 3 Storage compartment 4 Handle 268 Controls in detail Useful features Cup holders Warning! Cup holders, cockpit G In order to help prevent spilling liquids on vehicle occupants, only use containers that fit into the cup holder. Use lids on open containers and do not fill containers to a height where the contents, especially hot liquids, could spill during braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident. Closing  Push the cup holder in until it engag- es.  Press the cover closed. The cover engages automatically. Rear cup/bottle holders When not in use, keep the cup holder closed. An open cup holder may cause injury to you or others when contacted during braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident. 1 Cup holder, left 2 Cup holder, right Opening  Press the chrome label on the cover. The compartment opens.  Press the chrome label of the desired cup holder. Keep in mind that objects placed in the cup holder may come loose during braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident and be thrown around in the vehicle interior. Objects thrown around in the vehicle interior may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury. 1 Rear cup holder 2 Release catch for champagne flute/ bottle holder 3 Release catch for cup holder The cup holder slides out. 269 Controls in detail Useful features Opening Closing  Press the release catch on cup  Take the cups out of the holder. holder 3.  Press the holder back in until it en- The cup holder slides out automatically. Warning! G gages. Cup holder (vehicles with a rear center seat*) In order to help prevent spilling liquids on vehicle occupants, only use containers that fit into the cup holder. Use lids on open containers and do not fill containers to a height where the contents, especially hot liquids, could spill during braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident. When not in use, keep the cup holder closed. An open cup holder may cause injury to you or others when contacted during braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident. Keep in mind that objects placed in the cup holder may come loose during braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident and be thrown around in the vehicle interior. Objects thrown around in the vehicle interior may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury. 270 Warning! G In order to help prevent spilling liquids on vehicle occupants, only use containers that fit into the cup holder. Use lids on open containers and do not fill containers to a height where the contents, especially hot liquids, could spill during braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident. When not in use, keep the cup holder closed. An open cup holder may cause injury to you or others when contacted during braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident. 1 Cup holder, right 2 Cup holder, left Keep in mind that objects placed in the cup holder may come loose during braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident and be thrown around in the vehicle interior. Objects thrown around in the vehicle interior may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury. Opening Closing  Press the label of the desired cup  Remove the cup. holder. The cup holder slides out.  Push the cup holder in until it engag- es. Controls in detail Useful features Champagne flute/bottle holder Warning! Warning! G When not in use, keep the champagne flute/bottle holder closed while the vehicle is in motion. Place only champagne flutes from the Maybach Accessory range into the champagne flute holder. Only use those flutes designed for use with the holder. Make sure the champagne flutes are held in place by the retaining clips whenever the flutes are placed in the holder. This will reduce the risk of the flutes becoming loose during vehicle maneuvers. Place only bottles that fit fully within the bottle holder to reduce the possibility of the bottle becoming loose and being thrown around in the vehicle interior during vehicle maneuvers. G Always obey applicable state or province laws regarding passengers consuming alcoholic beverages in the vehicle and/or carrying alcoholic beverages in the vehicle interior. Inserting champagne flutes i Use the champagne flutes from the Maybach Accessory range. Only those flutes are designed for use with the holder. Opening  Press the release catch on champagne flute/bottle holder 2. The champagne flute/bottle holder slides out automatically.  Take the drip tray out of the opening for the bottle and place it under the opening on the carpet. Magnets hold the drip tray in the correct position. Example illustration from Maybach 57 Loose objects being thrown around in the vehicle during vehicle maneuvers may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury. 271 Controls in detail Useful features  Place the champagne flutes in the re- Ashtrays Removing ashtray insert tainers and press them down lightly. The champagne flutes are held in place by the retaining clips. Center console ashtray Warning! G Remove front ashtray only with vehicle standing still. Set the parking brake to secure vehicle from movement. Move gear selector lever to position P. With gear selector lever in position P, turn off the engine.  To remove the champagne flutes, pull them upright carefully. Closing  Take the champagne flutes/bottle out of the holder.  Push sliding button 1 to the right.  With the champagne flute/bottle holder open, remove the drip tray from the transmission tunnel and place it in the opening for the bottle. Press the holder closed until it engages. 1 Sliding button 2 Insert slides out Opening ashtray  Tap lightly on the chrome label on the cover. The ashtray opens automatically. 272 The ashtray is disengaged and slides a short way out 2.  Remove insert from ashtray frame. Reinstalling the ashtray insert  Install insert by pushing back into frame until it engages again.  Close the ashtray. Controls in detail Useful features Rear compartment ashtray Reinstalling the ashtray insert  Install insert by pushing back into frame until it engages again.  Close the ashtray. Ashtrays vehicles with a rear center seat* The ashtrays are located in the storage compartments in the rear doors ( page 261). 1 Sliding button 2 Insert slides out Cigarette lighters Center console lighter Warning! Never touch the heating element or sides of the lighter; they are extremely hot. Hold the knob only. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury. Opening ashtray  Switch on ignition ( page 54).  Tap lightly on the chrome label on  Push in cigarette lighter 1. the cover. G The lighter will pop out automatically when hot. The ashtray opens automatically. i Removing ashtray insert The lighter socket can be used to accommodate electrical accessories up to a maximum 85 W.  Push sliding button 1 to the right. The ashtray is disengaged and slides a short way out 2. 1 Cigarette lighter 273 Controls in detail Useful features Rear compartment lighter i Non-smokers package* The lighter socket can be used to accommodate electrical accessories up to a maximum of 85 W. Warning! Storage compartment in front center console G Never touch the heating element or sides of the lighter; they are extremely hot. Hold the knob only. 1 Cigarette lighter  Switch on ignition ( page 54).  Push in cigarette lighter 1. The lighter will pop out automatically when hot. i Make sure the override switch is not activated ( page 94). The rear lighter will not function if the override switch is activated. 274 To avoid possible injury to children sitting in the rear seat, deactivate the operation of the rear door windows ( page 94). Deactivation of the rear windows also deactivates the rear compartment lighter. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury. 1 Storage compartment 2 Chrome label  Tap lightly on chrome label 2 on the cover. Storage compartment 1 opens. Controls in detail Useful features Storage compartment in rear center console Opening the folding table Folding table* (standard on Maybach 62; optional on Maybach 57) Warning! G Keep the folding table closed while the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, you could be injured by the table or by objects flying off the table during 1 Storage compartment 2 Chrome label  Tap lightly on chrome label 2 on the cover. Storage compartment 1 opens.
braking
vehicle maneuvers or
an accident. Always fold the rear center armrest 1 downward while the vehicle is in motion. During an accident the rear center armrest could open the storage compartment. This will help to prevent stored objects from being thrown around. 1 To raise the armrest 2 Loop 3 Folding table  Lift up armrest 1.  Pull up folding table 3 vertically, us- ing loop 2. 275 Controls in detail Useful features Closing the folding table  Fold the table halves together.  Swing the table upward vertically.  Press the table until it engages at the base of the folding table.  If necessary, lift up the armrest.  Swing the folding table back com- pletely. 4 To pull out the table 5 To swing the table to the side 6 Table  Pull table 6 out vertically 4.  Swing the table to the side 5.  Lower armrest 1. 7 8 9 a Fold out table half Table half Move table surface fore and aft Tilt table surface  Fold out table half 8 from 7.  Press button 9 and adjust the table fore or aft to the desired position.  Press button a to adjust the table surface tilt. When you have obtained the desired tilt, release the button. 276 Lower the armrest. Controls in detail Useful features Refrigerator** in rear center console Warning! G Always fold the rear center armrest downward while the vehicle is in motion. During an accident the rear center armrest could open the storage compartment. This will help to prevent stored objects from being thrown around. ! i Opening the refrigerator The refrigerator continues to operate for up to 2 hours after the ignition has been switched off. If the onboard voltage falls below the minimum level, the refrigerator will be turned off automatically.  Lift up the rear center armrest up- ward.  Reach into the opening and lift up re- lease catch 1.  Open cover 2. Therefore, do not leave any perishable goods in the refrigerator. Do not leave any open groceries in the refrigerator. In especially humid regions, water can condense inside the refrigerator. For this reason, wipe out the refrigerator regularly. For more information on vehicle care ( page 375). 1 To release the cover 2 To open the refrigerator 3 Refrigerator 277 Controls in detail Useful features Refrigerator control Regulating the temperature  Turn knob 4 to the desired position. ! When setting max. cooling, the temperature in the refrigerator may fall below freezing point. Objects stored in the refrigerator such as water bottles may burst. Closing the refrigerator 4 5 6 7 Control knob To increase cooling To decrease cooling To turn off the refrigerator  Press the lid down until it engages. 1 Socket in the rear center console (vehicles with a rear center seat*) 12-V socket Turning refrigerator on  Turn knob 4 from OFF position 7 clockwise. The refrigerator is on. Turning refrigerator off 1 Socket in the trunk  Turn knob 4 counterclockwise to OFF position 7. Make sure the rotary control is turned fully counterclockwise, until an audible 'click' is heard. 278 1 Socket in the rear center console Sockets 1 can accommodate electrical accessories up to a maximum of 180 W. Controls in detail Useful features i In vehicles with non-smokers package*, an additional sockets is located in the passenger footwell. i Make sure the override switch is not activated ( page 94). The socket in the rear center console will not function if the override switch is activated. driving the vehicle for such extended periods of time may cause the charge in the battery for electrical consumers to drop. The socket is located in the storage compartment on the left side of the trunk. Only the battery charge maintenance unit should be connected to this socket. ! nance unit to battery charge maintenance socket 2. Follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions. i You can obtain the battery charge maintenance unit at any authorized Maybach Studio. Check with an authorized Maybach Studio for availability. It is only possible to maintain the existing charge in the battery for electrical consumers using the battery charge maintenance unit connected to battery charge maintenance socket 2. Make sure no fluids come into contact with the socket, as this could cause a short circuit. Battery charge maintenance socket The vehicle is equipped with a battery charge maintenance socket. The socket allows for the connection of a battery charge maintenance unit designed to maintain the existing charge in the battery for electrical consumers while the vehicle is parked and not being driven for long periods of time (on average approximately three weeks or more). Not  Connect the battery charge mainte- 1 Handle 2 Battery charge maintenance socket 3 Storage compartment  Turn handle 1 90°.  Swing the cover down. i If the battery for electrical consumers is discharged, it must be recharged using the battery charger. For more information, see "Practical hints" ( page 441). 279 Controls in detail Useful features Rear window curtain The driver’s switch is in the lower part of the front center console under the cover for the cup holders. Depending on equipment, the switch in the rear is either in the center console or in the top of the center armrest. Operating from the cockpit  To stop the procedure, press the switch again. Opening the curtain  Briefly press switch 2. The curtain opens automatically.  To stop the procedure, press the switch again. Operating from the rear (only for vehicles without rear side window curtains*) Closing the curtain  Briefly press switch 1. The curtain closes automatically.  To stop the procedure, press the but- ton again. Opening the curtain  Briefly press switch 1. The curtain opens automatically.  To stop the procedure, press the switch again. i Vehicles with rear center seat*: For operation with the Pocket PC remote control* ( page 326). Switch in cockpit 1 To close the curtain 2 To open the curtain Rear switch Closing the curtain 1 To close/open the curtain  Briefly press switch 1. The curtain closes automatically. 280 Controls in detail Useful features Operating from the rear (only for vehicles with rear side window curtains*) Opening the curtain  Lightly press switch 2 to resistance point. The curtain will open until you release the switch. Fully closing the curtain (Express-close)  Press switch 1 past the resistance point and release. Rear side window curtains* The driver’s switches are in the lower part of the front center console under the cover for the cup holders. Depending on equipment, the switch in the rear is either in the center console or in the top of the center armrest. Operating from the cockpit The curtain closes completely.  To stop the procedure, press the Rear switch 1 To close the curtain 2 To open the curtain  Open the storage compartment in the rear center armrest ( page 266). Closing the curtain switch again. Fully opening the curtain (Express-open)  Press switch 2 past the resistance point and release. The curtain opens completely.  To stop the procedure, press the switch again. Switch in cockpit point. i The curtain will close until you release the switch. Vehicles with rear center seat*: For operation with the Pocket PC remote control* ( page 326). 1 2 3 4  Lightly press switch 1 to resistance To close the curtain To open the curtain Switch for rear left side window Switch for rear right side window 281 Controls in detail Useful features i If you open a side window without rear side window curtain completely open, the curtain will open first. Closing the curtain  Briefly press upper part 1 of switch 3 or 4. The respective curtain closes.  To stop the procedure, press the switch again Opening the curtain  Briefly press lower part 2 of switch 3 or 4. The respective curtain opens.  To stop the procedure, press the switch again. Warning! G Operating from the rear When operating the curtains, make sure there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the opening or closing procedure. The opening or closing procedure can be immediately halted by pressing the respective switch again. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury. Rear switch 1 2 3 4 To close the curtain To open the curtain Switch for rear left side window Switch for rear right side window  Open the storage compartment in the rear center armrest ( page 266). Closing the curtain  Lightly press upper part 1 of switch 3 or 4 to resistance point. The respective curtain will close until you release the switch. 282 Controls in detail Useful features Opening the curtain Fully opening the curtain (Express-open)  Lightly press lower part 2 of  Press lower part 2 of switch 3 or 4 switch 3 or 4 to resistance point. The respective curtain will open until you release the switch. Fully closing the curtain (Express-close)  Press upper part 1 of switch 3 or 4 past the resistance point and release. The curtain closes completely.  To stop the procedure, press the switch again. past the point of resistance and release. The curtain opens completely.  To stop the procedure, press the switch again. i Vehicles with rear center seat*: For operation with the Pocket PC remote control* ( page 322). Warning! G When operating the curtains, make sure there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the opening or closing procedure. The opening or closing procedure can be immediately halted by pressing respective switch 3 or 4. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury. 283 Controls in detail Useful features Partition* Operating the partition Warning! G When operating the partition, make sure there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the opening or closing procedure. The opening or closing procedure can be immediately halted by releasing the switch or, if the switch was pressed past the resistance point and released, by pressing the respective switch again. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury. 284 Switch in cockpit Switch in rear passenger compartment 1 To close the partition 2 To open the partition 1 To close the partition 2 To open the partition i Closing the partition from the rear is not possible if you activate the override switch ( page 94).  When operating from the rear, you must first open the storage compartment in the rear center armrest ( page 266). Closing the partition  Lightly press switch 1 to resistance point. The partition will close until you release the switch. Controls in detail Useful features Opening the partition Operating the partition curtain  Lightly press switch 2 to resistance point. The partition will open until you release the switch. Fully closing the partition (Express-close)  Press switch 1 past the resistance point and release. The partition closes completely.  To stop the procedure, press the switch again. Fully opening the partition (Express-open)  Press switch 2 past the point of resis- tance and release. The partition opens completely. Warning! G When operating the curtains, make sure there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the opening or closing procedure. The opening or closing procedure can be immediately halted by releasing the switch or, if the switch was pressed past the resistance point and released, by pressing the respective switch again. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury. Switch in cockpit 1 To close the curtain 2 To open the curtain  To stop the procedure, press the switch again. i Vehicles with rear center seat*: For operation with the Pocket PC remote control* ( page 327). 285 Controls in detail Useful features Closing the curtain Fully closing the curtain (Express-close)  Lightly press switch 1 to resistance  Press switch 1 past the resistance point. point and release. The curtain will close until you release the switch. The curtain closes completely. Opening the curtain  Lightly press switch 2 to resistance point. Switch in rear passenger compartment 1 To close the curtain 2 To open the curtain  By operating from the rear, open the storage compartment in the rear center armrest ( page 266). 286 The curtain will open until you release the switch.  To stop the procedure, press the switch again. Fully opening the curtain (Express-open)  Press switch 2 past the resistance point and release. The curtain opens completely.  To stop the procedure, press the switch again. i Vehicles with rear center seat*: For operation with the Pocket PC remote control* ( page 322). Controls in detail Useful features Two-way intercom* (Maybach 62: standard with partition*) With the partition closed, you can communicate between the cockpit and the rear passenger compartment using the two-way intercom. You can only initiate a voice connection from the rear passenger compartment. The driver can only signal a connection request from the cockpit.  Press button 1. A gong sounds in the rear passenger compartment, and the indicator lamp on the button comes on. Initiating a voice connection from the rear The buttons are on the rear center console (in Maybach 62 with a rear center seat* in the storage compartment/drawer in rear center console). Signaling a connection request from the cockpit The button is located on the lower part of the front center console. Maybach 62 with rear center seat* 1 Volume control 2 Speak button  Press button 2. Maybach 62 1 Volume control 2 Speak button A gong sounds in the cockpit, and a voice connection is established between the cockpit and the rear passenger compartment. 1 On/off button 287 Controls in detail Useful features Adjusting the volume  Turn thumbwheel 1 until the de- sired volume has been set. Ending the voice connection  Press button 2 again in the rear pas- senger compartment. External communication (special order equipment) With the communication system, you can communicate with persons outside the vehicle over a loudspeaker and an outside microphone, without having to open a door or window.  Take the control unit out of the glove box. Listening  Push microphone switch-over 5 downward. You will hear what is being said outside of the vehicle. Speaking  Press speak button 1 and keep it pressed. You can speak as long as you keep button 1 pressed.  Adjust volume with the volume con- trol button 2. 1 2 3 4 5 288 Speak button for inside microphone Volume control Loudspeaker for outside microphone Inside microphone Microphone switch-over Controls in detail Useful features Telephone Warning! G Never operate radio transmitters equipped with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. without being connected to an external antenna) from inside the vehicle while the engine is running. Doing so could lead to a malfunction of the vehicle’s electronic system, possibly resulting in an accident and/or serious personal injury. Radio transmitters, such as a portable telephone or a citizens band unit, should only be used inside the vehicle if they are connected to an antenna that is installed on the outside of the vehicle. Warning! G Please do not forget that your primary responsibility is to drive the vehicle. A driver’s attention to the road must always be his/her primary focus when driving. For your safety and the safety of others, we recommend that you pull over to a safe location and stop before placing or taking a telephone call. The external antenna must be approved for Maybach vehicles. Please contact an authorized Maybach Studio for information on the installation of an approved external antenna. Refer to the radio transmitter operation instructions regarding use of an external antenna. If you choose to use the telephone1 while driving, please use the hands-free device and only use the telephone when road, weather and traffic conditions permit. Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a cellular telephone while driving a vehicle. Only operate the COMAND (Cockpit Management and Data System)1 if road, weather and traffic conditions permit. Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second. 1 Observe all legal requirements. 289 Controls in detail Useful features You can receive and place telephone calls using the s and t buttons on the steering wheel. To carry out other telephone functions, use the control system ( page 165). See the separate operating manual COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System for instructions on how to use the telephone. Cellular phone in the front 1 Compartment lid release 2 Compartment lid 290 Opening Closing  Press button 1.  Press button 1 to close. The compartment lid 2 opens downward. The telephone handset swings out. Warning! G Always keep the compartment for the front telephone closed while the vehicle is in motion. The protruding telephone could otherwise cause injury to you and others during
braking
vehicle maneuvers or
an accident. ! To prevent any damage, the cellular phone flap must be folded down before closing the telephone compartment. i The Roadside Assistance button • and the Information button ¡ ( page 298) are located in the compartment for the front telephone. Controls in detail Useful features Removing the cellular phone from the cradle Inserting the cellular phone in the cellular phone cradle  Remove the round aerial contact cov- er on the back of the cellular phone. 1 Release button 2 Engage the cell phone in cradle  Push the top of the cellular phone in 1 Release button  Press the release button 1 and re- move the cellular phone from the cradle. Cellular phone in the rear The cellular phone is located in the rear armrest. 1 Insert the cellular phone 2 Connector contact 3 Cellular phone cradle  Slide the lower end of the cellular phone into connector contact 2 on cradle 3. direction of arrow 2, until the lug on the cellular phone release button 1 engages. The battery will be charged depending on its charge status and the position of the SmartKey in the starter switch. The charging process is shown in the cellular phone display.  Open the storage compartment in the rear center armrest ( page 266). 291 Controls in detail Useful features i Making calls in private mode If you insert the cellular phone in the cradle and the SmartKey is not the starter switch, the cellular phone will remain on for approximately one minute. If you make a call during this time, the cellular phone will be switched off approximately one minute (delayed switch-off time) after you hang up. When you remove the SmartKey from the starter switch, the cellular phone remains on for approximately one minute. 1 Holder 2 Raise holder  Briefly press the top of the cell phone in direction of arrow 2. The holder 1 folds up. 292 1 2 3 4 Holder Remove the cellular phone and cradle Cellular phone flap Cellular phone cradle  Remove the cellular phone, together with the cradle, from the holder 2.  Fold the cellular phone flap 3 up. Controls in detail Useful features  Close the cellular phone flap. Re-inserting the cellular phone Hands-free mode is selected. If you wish to change back to private mode:  Open the cellular phone flap.  Remove the cellular phone from the holder ( page 292). 1 Fold the cellular phone flap down 2 Insert the cellular phone and cradle  Fold the cellular phone flap 1 down.  Guide the cellular phone, together with the cradle, into the holder 2. 1 Holder 2 Engage holder Removing the cellular phone from the cradle  Push the top of the cellular phone in direction of arrow 2, until the holder 1 engages. ! To prevent any damage, the cellular phone flap must be folded down before closing the telephone compartment. Making calls in hands-free mode  Open the cellular phone flap.  Either accept the call or dial the de- sired number. 1 Release button 2 Remove the cellular phone  Press the release button 1 and re- move the cellular phone from the cradle. 293 Controls in detail Useful features Tele Aid ! The initial activation of the Tele Aid system may only be performed by completing the subscriber agreement and placing an acquaintance call using the Information button ¡, located in the phone compartment to the left of the glove box. Failure to complete either of these steps will result in a system that is not activated. If the system is not activated, the indicator lamp in the SOS button stays on after switching on ignition and the message TELE AID NOT ACTIVATED will be shown in the multifunction display for approximately 10 seconds. If you have any questions regarding activation, please call the Maybach Assistance Center at 1-866-FOR-MAY-Bach (in the USA) or 1-888-881-6611 (in Canada). 294 The Tele Aid system (Telematic Alarm Identification on Demand) The Tele Aid system consists of three types of response:
automatic and manual emergency
Roadside Assistance and
information The Tele Aid system is operational providing that the vehicle’s battery is charged, properly connected, not damaged and cellular and GPS coverage is available. The speaker volume of a Tele Aid call can be adjusted when using the volume control on the multifunction steering wheel or the volume control on the COMAND. To raise, press button æ and to lower, press button ç on the steering wheel or use the volume knob on your COMAND headunit. If the service uses the back-up system the volume is fixed to an appropriate level.  To activate, press one of the SOS but- tons, the Roadside Assistance button • or the Information button ¡, depending on the type of response required. Warning! G Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second. Controls in detail Useful features i System self-check The SOS button is located in the overhead control panel. An additional SOS button is located in the middle armrest of the rear seat or, in Maybach 62 vehicles with rear center seat* and partition* or two-way intercom*, in the storage compartment/drawer in rear center console. Initially, after switching on ignition, malfunctions are detected and indicated (the indicator lamps in the SOS button, the Roadside Assistance button • and the Information button ¡ stay on longer than 10 seconds or do not come on). The message Warning! TELE AID MALFUNCTION DRIVE TO WORKSHOP! TELE AID MALFUNCTION DRIVE TO WORKSHOP! appears in the multifunction display. is displayed in the multifunction display after the system self-check, a malfunction in the system has been detected. The Roadside Assistance button • and the Information button ¡ are located in the front telephone compartment. Shortly after the completion of your Tele Aid acquaintance call, you will receive a user ID and password. i G If the indicator lamps in the SOS button, in the Roadside Assistance button • and/ or in the Information button ¡ do not come on during the system self-check or if any of these indicators remain illuminated constantly in red and/or the message If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above, the system may not operate as expected. Have the system checked at the nearest authorized Maybach Studio as soon as possible. The Tele Aid system utilizes the cellular network for communication and the GPS (Global Positioning System) satellites for vehicle location. If either of these signals are unavailable, the Tele Aid system may not function and if this occurs, assistance must be summoned by other means. 295 Controls in detail Useful features Emergency calls An emergency call is initiated automatically following an accident in which the emergency tensioning devices (ETDs) or airbags deploy. An emergency call can also be initiated manually by opening the cover in the overhead control panel labeled SOS, then briefly pressing the button located under the cover. An additional SOS button is located in the middle armrest of the rear seat or, in Maybach 62 vehicles with rear center seat* and partition* or with rear center seat* and two-way intercom*, in the storage compartment/ drawer in rear center console. For instructions on initiating an emergency call manually ( page 297). Once the emergency call is in progress, the indicator lamp in the SOS button will begin to flash. The message EMERGENCY CALL CONNECTING CALL appears in the multifunction display. 296 When the connection is established, the message The Tele Aid system is available if:
it has been activated and is operational. Activation requires a subscription for monitoring services, connection and cellular air time.
the relevant cellular phone network and GPS signals are available and pass the information on to the Response Center EMERGENCY CALL CALL CONNECTED appears in the multifunction display. All information relevant to the emergency, such as the location of the vehicle (determined by the GPS satellite location system), vehicle model, identification number and color are generated. A voice connection between the Response Center and the occupants of the vehicle will be established automatically soon after the emergency call has been initiated. When a voice connection is established, the audio system mutes and the message EMERGENCY CALL CALL CONNECTED appears in the multifunction display. The Response Center will attempt to determine more precisely the nature of the emergency provided they can speak to an occupant of the vehicle. i Location of the vehicle on a map is only possible if the vehicle is able to receive signals from the GPS satellite network and pass the information on to the Response Center. Controls in detail Useful features Warning! G Initiating an emergency call manually If the indicator lamp in the SOS button is illuminated continuously and there was no voice connection to the Response Center established, then the Tele Aid system could not initiate an emergency call (e.g. the relevant cellular phone network is not available). The message EMERGENCY CALL CALL FAILED appears in the multifunction display for approximately 10 seconds. Should this occur, assistance must be summoned by other means. SOS button in the rear center console SOS button in the overhead control panel 1 Cover 2 SOS button 1 Cover 2 SOS button 297 Controls in detail Useful features For Maybach 62 with a rear center seat* and partition* or Maybach 62 with a rear center seat* and two-way intercom* the additional SOS button is located in the storage compartment/drawer in rear center console.  Briefly press on the cover of the emergency call button 1 with the inscription SOS. The cover will open. Roadside Assistance button • The Roadside Assistance button • is located in the front telephone compartment.  Press SOS button 2 briefly. The indicator lamp in SOS button 2 flashes until the emergency call is concluded.  Wait for a voice connection to the Re- sponse Center.  Close cover 1 after the emergency call is concluded. Warning! SOS button* in the storage compartment/ drawer 1 Cover 2 SOS button 298 G If you feel at any way in jeopardy when in the vehicle (e.g. smoke or fire in the vehicle, vehicle in a dangerous road location), please do not wait for voice contact after you have pressed the emergency button. Carefully leave the vehicle and move to a safe location. The Response Center will automatically contact local emergency officials with the vehicle’s approximate location if they receive an automatic SOS signal and cannot make voice contact with the vehicle occupants. 1 Compartment lid release  Press button 1. The front telephone compartment lid opens downward. Controls in detail Useful features When the connection is established, the message The following is only available in the USA: ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE CALL CONNECTED
appears in the multifunction display. The Tele Aid system will transmit data generating the vehicle identification number, model, color and location (subject to availability of cellular and GPS signals). 1 Compartment lid release 2 Information button ¡ 3 Roadside Assistance button •  Press and hold Roadside Assistance button • (for longer than 2 seconds). A call to a Maybach Roadside Assistance dispatcher will be initiated. The button • flashes while the call is in progress. The message ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE CONNECTING CALL A voice connection between the Roadside Assistance dispatcher and the occupants of the vehicle will be established.  Describe the nature of the need for assistance. The Maybach Roadside Assistance dispatcher will either dispatch a qualified Maybach technician or arrange to tow your vehicle to the nearest authorized Maybach Studio. For services such as labor and/or towing, charges may apply. Refer to the Roadside Assistance manual for more information. Sign and Drive services: Services such as a jump start, a few gallons of fuel or the replacement of a flat tire with the vehicle spare tire are obtainable. i The indicator lamp on the Roadside Assistance button • remains illuminated in red for approximately 10 seconds during the system self-check after switching on ignition (together with the SOS button and the Information button ¡). See system self-check ( page 295) when the indicator lamp does not come on in red or stays on longer than approximately 10 seconds. will appear in the multifunction display. 299 Controls in detail Useful features If the indicator lamp on the Roadside Assistance button • is illuminated continuously and there was no voice connection to the Response Center established, then the Tele Aid system could not initiate a Roadside Assistance call (e.g. the relevant cellular phone network is not available). The message ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE CALL FAILED appears in the multifunction display. Roadside Assistance calls can be terminated using the t button on the multifunction steering wheel or the respective button for ending a telephone call on the COMAND headunit. 300 Information button ¡ The Information button ¡ is located in the front telephone compartment ( page 299).  Press and hold Information button ¡ (for longer than 2 seconds). A call to the Customer Assistance Center will be initiated. The button ¡ flashes while the call is in progress. The message INFO CONNECTING CALL will appear in the multifunction display. When the connection is established, the message INFO CALL CONNECTED appears in the multifunction display. The Tele Aid system will transmit data generating the vehicle identification number, model, color and location (subject to availability of cellular and GPS signals). A voice connection between the Customer Assistance Center representative and the occupants of the vehicle will be established. When a voice connection is established, the audio system mutes and the message INFO CALL CONNECTED appears in the multifunction display. Information regarding the operation of your vehicle, the nearest authorized Maybach Studio or Maybach USA products and services is available to you. Controls in detail Useful features i The indicator lamp on the Information button ¡ remains illuminated in red for approximately 10 seconds during the system self-check after switching on ignition (together with the SOS button and the Roadside Assistance button •). See system self-check ( page 295) when the indicator lamp does not come on in red or stays on longer than approximately 10 seconds. If the indicator lamp on the information button ¡ is illuminated continuously and there was no voice connection to the Response Center has been established, then the Tele Aid system could not initiate an Information call (e.g. the relevant cellular phone network is not available). The message INFO CALL FAILED Information calls can be terminated using the t button on the multifunction steering wheel or the respective button for ending a telephone call on the COMAND headunit. ! If the indicator lamps do not start flashing after pressing one of the buttons or remain illuminated (in red) at any time, the Tele Aid system has detected a malfunction or the service is not currently active, and may not initiate a call. Visit your Maybach Studio and have the system checked or contact the Maybach Assistance Center at 1-866-FOR-MAY-Bach (in the USA) or 1-888-881-6611 (in Canada) as soon as possible. Upgrade signals The Tele Aid system processes calls using the following priority:
Automatic emergency - First priority
Manual emergency - Second priority
Roadside Assistance - Third priority
Information - Fourth priority Should a higher priority call be initiated while you are connected, an upgrade (alternating) tone will be heard, and the appropriate indicator lamp flashes. If certain information such as vehicle identification number or customer information is not available, the operator may need to retransmit. During this time you will hear a beep and voice contact will be interrupted. Voice contact will resume once the retransmission is completed. Once a call is included, a beep will be heard and the respective indicator lamp will stop flashing. The COMAND system operation will resume. appears in the multifunction display. 301 Controls in detail Useful features ! i Remote door unlock If the indicator lamp continues to flash or the system does not reset, contact the Maybach Assistance Center at 1-866-FOR-MAYBach (in the USA) or 1-888-881-6611 (in Canada). When a Tele Aid call has been initiated, the COMAND system audio is muted and the selected mode (radio, tape or CD) pauses. The cellular phone switches off. If it is necessary for you to use this phone, then the vehicle must be parked. Disconnect the coiled cord and place the call. The COMAND navigation system (if engaged) will continue to run. The display in the instrument cluster is available for use and spoken commands are only available by pressing the  button on the COMAND unit. A pop-up window will appear in the COMAND display to indicate that a Tele Aid call is in progress. In case that you have locked your vehicle unintentionally (e.g. SmartKey inside vehicle), and the reserve SmartKey is not handy: i The indicator lamp in the corresponding button flashes until the call is concluded. Calls can only be terminated by a Response Center or Customer Assistance Center representative except Roadside Assistance and Information calls, which can also be terminated by pressing button t on the multifunction steering wheel or the respective button for ending a telephone call on the COMAND headunit.  Contact the Maybach Assistance Cen- ter at 1-866-FOR-MAYBach (in the USA) or 1-888-881-6611 (in Canada). You will be asked to provide your password which you provided when you completed the subscriber agreement.  Then return to your vehicle and pull the trunk recessed handle for a minimum of 20 seconds until the SOS button is flashing. The message EMERGENCY CALL CALL CONNECTED appears in the multifunction display. As an alternative, you may unlock the vehicle via Internet using the ID and password sent to you shortly after the completion of your Acquaintance Call. 302 Controls in detail Useful features The Response Center will then unlock your vehicle with the remote door unlocking feature. i The remote door unlock feature is available if the relevant cellular phone network is available. The SOS button flashes and the message EMERGENCY CALL CALL CONNECTED will appear in the multifunction display to indicate receipt of the door unlock command. Once the vehicle is unlocked, a Response Center specialist will attempt to establish voice contact with the vehicle occupants. Stolen Vehicle Recovery services i In the event your vehicle was stolen: When the anti-theft alarm or the tow-away alarm stays on for more than 30 seconds, a call is initiated automatically to the Response Center. See anti-theft alarm system ( page 104) and tow-away alarm ( page 106).  Report the incident to the police. The police will issue a numbered incident report.  Pass this number on to the Maybach Response Center along with your password issued to you when you subscribed to the service. The Response Center will then attempt to covertly contact the vehicle’s Tele Aid system. Once the vehicle is located, the Response Center will contact the local law enforcement and you. The vehicle’s location will only be provided to law enforcement. If the trunk recessed handle was pulled for more than 20 seconds before door unlock authorization was received by the Response Center, you must wait 15 minutes before pulling the trunk recessed handle. 303 Controls in detail Useful features Garage door opener The built-in remote control is capable of operating up to three separately controlled devices, for example garage door openers, gate openers, or other devices compatible with HomeLink® or some other systems. Warning! Before programming the integrated remote control to a garage door opener or gate operator, make sure people and objects are out of the way of the device to prevent potential harm or damage. You can program the signal transmitter buttons. Remote control integrated into the interior rear view mirror 1 Indicator lamp 2 3 4 Signal transmitter button 304 G 5 Hand-held transmitter button 6 Hand-held remote control transmitter (not part of vehicle equipment) When programming a garage door opener, the door moves up or down. When programming a gate operator, the gate opens or closes. Do not use the integrated remote control with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by U.S. federal safety standards (this includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1, 1982). A garage door that cannot detect an object – signaling the door to stop and reverse – does not meet current U.S. federal safety standards. Controls in detail Useful features i Certain types of garage door openers are incompatible with the integrated opener. If you should experience difficulties with programming the transmitter, contact an authorized Maybach Studio, or call Maybach Customer Assistance Center at 1-866-FOR-MAYBach (in the USA) or 1-888-881-6611 (in Canada). i For operation in the USA only: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. Programming or reprogramming the integrated remote control Step 1:  Switch on ignition ( page 54). Step 2:  If you have previously programmed an integrated signal transmitter button and wish to retain its programming, proceed to step 3. Otherwise, press and hold the two outer signal transmitter buttons 3 and 4 and release them only when the indicator lamp 1 begins to flash after approximately 20 seconds (do not hold the button for longer than 30 seconds). This procedure erases any previous settings for all three channels and initializes the memory. If you later wish to program a second and/or third hand-held transmitter to the remaining two signal transmitter buttons, do not repeat this step and begin directly with step 3. Step 3:  Hold the end of the hand-held re- mote control transmitter 6 of the device you wish to train approximately 2 to 5 in (5 to 12 cm) away from the surface of the integrated remote control located on the interior rear view mirror, keeping the indicator lamp 1 in view. Step 4:  Using both hands, simultaneously press the hand-held transmitter button 5 and the desired integrated signal transmitter button (2, 3 or 4). Do not release the buttons until completing step 5. The indicator lamp 1 on the integrated remote control will flash, first slowly and then rapidly. i The indicator lamp 1 flashes the first time the signal transmitter button is programmed. If this button has already been programmed, the indicator lamp will only start flashing after  20 seconds. 305 Controls in detail Useful features  Step 5:  When the indicator lamp 1 flashes rapidly, release both buttons. Step 6:  Press and hold the just-trained inte- grated signal transmitter button and observe the indicator lamp 1. If the indicator lamp 1 stays on constantly, programming is complete and your device should activate when the integrated signal transmitter button is pressed and released. i If the indicator lamp 1 blinks rapidly for about two seconds and then turns to a constant light, continue with programming steps 8 through 12 as your garage door opener may be equipped with the "rolling code" feature. Step 7:  To program the remaining two but- tons, repeat the steps above starting with step 3. 306 Rolling code programming Step 10: To train a garage door opener (or other rolling code devices) with the rolling code feature, follow these instructions after completing the "Programming" portion (steps 1 through 6) of this text. (A second person may make the following training procedures quicker and easier.)  Firmly press, hold for two seconds Step 8:  Locate "training" button on the ga- rage door opener motor head unit. Exact location and color of the button may vary by garage door opener brand. Depending on manufacturer, the "training" button may also be referred to as "learn" or "smart" button. If there is difficulty locating the transmitting button, refer to the garage door opener operator’s manual. Step 9  Press "training" button on the ga- rage door opener motor head unit. The "training light" is activated. You have 30 seconds to initiate the following step. and release the programmed integrated signal transmitter button (2, 3 or 4). Step 11:  Press, hold for two seconds and re- lease same button a second time to complete the training process. Some garage door openers (or other rolling code equipped devices) may require you to perform this procedure a third time to complete the training. Step 12:  Confirm the garage door operation by pressing the programmed integrated signal transmitter button (2, 3 or 4). Step 13:  To program the remaining two but- tons, repeat the steps above starting with step 3. Controls in detail Useful features Gate operator/Canadian programming Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter signals to "time-out" (or quit) after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for the integrated signal transmitter to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to "timeout" in the same manner. If you live in Canada or if you are having difficulties programming a gate operator (regardless of where you live) by using the programming procedures, replace step 4 with the following:  Proceed with programming step 5 and step 6 to complete. Operation of remote control  Switch on ignition ( page 54).  Select and press the appropriate inte- If you sell your vehicle, erase the codes of all three channels. Reprogramming a single integrated signal transmitter button grated signal transmitter button (2, 3 or 4) to activate the remote controlled device. To program a device using a signal transmitter button previously trained, follow these steps: The integrated remote control transmitter continues to send the signal as long as the button is pressed – up to 20 seconds.  Press and hold the desired signal Erasing the remote control memory Step 4:  Switch on ignition ( page 54).  Continue to press and hold the inte-  Simultaneously hold down the signal grated signal transmitter button (2, 3 or 4) while you press and repress ("cycle") your hand-held remote control transmitter 6 every two seconds until the frequency signal has been learned. Upon successful training, the indicator lamp 1 will flash slowly and then rapidly after several seconds. i transmitter button (2, 3 or 4). Do not release the button. The indicator lamp 1 will begin to flash after 20 seconds. Without releasing the integrated signal transmitter button, proceed with programming starting with step 3. transmitter buttons 3 and 4, for approximately 20 seconds, until the indicator lamp 1 blinks rapidly. Do not hold for longer than 30 seconds. The codes of all three channels are erased. 307 Controls in detail Useful features Infrared reflecting windshield ) Heated steering wheel The steering wheel heating warms up the leather area of the steering wheel. The stalk is located on the lower lefthand side of the steering wheel. Switching on  Switch on ignition ( page 54).  Turn switch at the tip of stalk in direc- tion of arrow 1. The steering wheel is heated. Indicator lamp 2 comes on. Switching off  Turn switch at the tip of stalk in direc- tion of arrow 3. The steering wheel heating is turned off. Indicator lamp 2 goes out. 1 5.1 in (13 cm) 2 26 in (66 cm) 3 Infrared transparent area (pass-through for electronic signals) Your vehicle is equipped with infrared reflecting glass which reduces the amount of radiated heat entering the interior through the windows. The infrared reflecting glass also prevents the transmission of signals through the glass by in-vehicle electronic devices (e.g. electronic toll collection devices). To allow the use of these devices in the vehicle, one infrared transparent area 3 is placed in the windshield. 308 i 1 Switching on 2 Indicator lamp 3 Switching off The steering wheel heating does not turn off automatically. For information on steering wheel, see "Steering wheel" ( page 60). Controls in detail Pocket PC remote control*  Pocket PC remote control* In vehicles with a rear center seat*, the Pocket PC functions like a remote control. Your vehicle is equipped with either Pocket PC 1 ( page 312) or Pocket PC 2 ( page 315). Main menu Main menu Main menu Main menu Light Privacy Manual adjustments Pocket PC settings ( page 320) ( page 321) ( page 326) ( page 333) Operating the partition* Keypad tones Switching interior lighting on/ Operating the partition curoff tain* Commands/submenus You can select from the following functions: Opening and closing the pow- Daytime/Nighttime settings er tilt/sliding sunroof Display brightness Operating the screen for the Time Switching right reading lamp Making the electrotranspar- electrotransparent roof* on/off ent roof* opaque/transparent Extending/retracting the rear Automatic switch-off for display and device* (feature Switching left reading lamp Operating the right rear side center seat head restraint available on Pocket 2 only) on/off window curtain* Raising and lowering the Switching headliner lamps Operating the rear window power tilt/sliding sunroof and pillar uplights* on/off curtain Switching ambient lighting on/off Operating the left rear side window curtain* Switching roof lighting* on/ off Ambient lighting dimmer 309 Controls in detail Pocket PC remote control* i For operation in the USA only: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: Pocket PC holder Maybach 57 The Pocket PC holder is on the back of the front passenger seat backrest. (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and  Press release button 2. The holder 1 folds forwards slightly.  Press release button 5 and pull Pocket PC 3 upward out of cradle 4. Inserting the Pocket PC (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.  Insert Pocket PC 3 into cradle 4 un- til it engages.  Press Pocket PC 3 towards the back- Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. rest until holder 1 engages. Pocket PC 1 shown; Pocket PC 2 varies slightly 1 2 3 4 5 310 Removing the Pocket PC Holder Release button Pocket PC Cradle Release button The battery is charged depending on its charge status and the position of the SmartKey in the starter switch. While charging, the yellow battery charge indicator lamp ( page 312) or ( page 315) in the top right corner flashes. Once the battery has been fully charged, the indicator lamp comes on continuously as long as Pocket PC 3 is in cradle 4. Controls in detail Pocket PC remote control* i Maybach 62 If you aren’t using the Pocket PC 3, always insert it into cradle 4. This helps reduce the possibility that the battery will become completely discharged. The Pocket PC is in the storage compartment/drawer in the rear center console.  Remove Pocket PC 2 from cradle 1.
braking
vehicle maneuvers or
an accident. Inserting the Pocket PC  Guide Pocket PC 2 into cradle 1.  Close storage compartment/drawer ( page 263). G Always make sure the Pocket PC in the cradle and the holder are securely engaged while the vehicle is in motion and when the Pocket PC is not being used. Otherwise, the Pocket PC could be thrown around in the vehicle interior and cause injury to you and others during Removing the Pocket PC  Open the storage compartment/ drawer 3 fully ( page 263). After the ignition has been switched off, the battery will continue to be charged for a maximum of ten minutes. Warning! You can operate the Pocket PC without having to remove it from cradle 1. i Pocket PC 1 shown; Pocket 2 varies slightly 1 Cradle 2 Pocket PC 3 Storage compartment/drawer If you aren’t using the Pocket PC 2, always insert it into cradle 1. This helps reduce the possibility that the battery will become completely discharged. After the ignition has been switched off, the battery will continue to be charged for a maximum of ten minutes. 311 Controls in detail Pocket PC remote control* Pocket PC 1 Your vehicle is equipped with either Pocket PC 1 or Pocket PC 2 ( page 315). 312 1 Light sensor 2 Blue Bluetooth wireless indicator lamp 3 Memory card inserted 4 Stylus 5 Yellow battery charge indicator lamp 6 On/Off button 7 Display 8 Status line 9 Main menu function button: Manual Adjustments a Main menu function button: Pocket PC Settings b Navigation button c Main menu function button: Light d Main menu function button: Privacy e Bluetooth wireless connection display f Battery charge terminal g Reset button Warning! G Only operate the Pocket PC remote control from the rear passenger compartment. Monitor the settings and operation of the equipment you control using the Pocket PC to make sure there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the operating procedure. Your Pocket PC can be operated in two ways. You can select your preferred mode of operation by doing one of the following:  press main menu function button 9, a, c or d and then choose your settings via navigation button b.  Tap on a menu symbol shown in dis- play 7 (touch-screen) using your finger or stylus 4. You can switch between these two modes of operation at any time. Controls in detail Pocket PC remote control* Removing and inserting the stylus
Removing  Press down briefly on stylus 4. Stylus 4 is ejected upward. Inserting The yellow battery charge indicator lamp 5
is out when the battery is not being charged
flashes when the battery is being charged
comes on continuously when the battery is completely charged and the Pocket PC is in the Pocket PC cradle.  Insert stylus 4 into the opening and press downward until it engages. Indicator lamps The blue Bluetooth wireless connection indicator lamp 2 comes on continuously when the Bluetooth wireless connection between the Pocket PC and the vehicle has been established Switching the Pocket PC on and off Switching on  Switch on ignition ( page 54).  Press On/Off button 6. The Bluetooth wireless connection indicator lamp 2 flashes. In display 7 you will see the following in succession:
the Maybach logo for several seconds
the Bluetooth wireless connection status e shown in the status line 8 until the Bluetooth wireless connection between the Pocket PC and the vehicle has been established the time and the battery charge status shown in the status line 8.
is out when the Bluetooth wireless radio has been switched off
flashes slowly when the Bluetooth wireless radio has been switched on
flashes quickly while the Bluetooth wireless connection is being set up

flashes very quickly if there is a problem with the Bluetooth wireless connection The display is in color and the Bluetooth wireless connection indicator lamp 2 comes on continuously. The Pocket PC is ready for use. 313 Controls in detail Pocket PC remote control* i Switching off The Bluetooth wireless connection can only be established if:  Press On/Off button 6.

the ignition is switched on or for up to 15 minutes after the ignition was switched off When you are not using the Pocket PC, the display darkens after approx. 30 seconds. This helps increase the usable battery time. The Bluetooth wireless connection remains intact and the blue Bluetooth wireless connection indicator lamp 2 remains lit. In order to reactivate the Pocket PC, press
one of the main menu function buttons 9, a, c or d You will see the corresponding menu.

314 On/Off button 6 or Navigation button b The Bluetooth wireless connection indicator lamp 2 goes out. The Bluetooth wireless connection is interrupted and the Pocket PC is switched off. i The Pocket PC switches off automatically after approx. five minutes. You can only switch off the Pocket PC if it has been turned on and activated. Controls in detail Pocket PC remote control* Pocket PC 2 Your vehicle is equipped with either Pocket PC 1 ( page 312) or Pocket PC 2. 1 Light sensor d Navigation button 2 Blue Bluetooth wireless indicator lamp e Main menu function button: Light f Main menu function button: Privacy g Bluetooth wireless connection display h Reset button j Battery charge terminal 3 Antenna 4 Memory card inserted 5 Speaker 6 Yellow battery charge indicator lamp 7 Stylus 8 On/Off button 9 Display a Status line b Main menu function button: Manual Adjustments c Main menu function button: Pocket PC Settings Warning! G Only operate the Pocket PC remote control from the rear passenger compartment. Monitor the settings and operation of the equipment you control using the Pocket PC to make sure there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the operating procedure. 315 Controls in detail Pocket PC remote control* Your Pocket PC can be operated in two ways. You can select your preferred mode of operation by doing one of the following:  Press main menu function button b, c, e or f and then choose your settings via navigation button d.  Tap on a menu symbol shown in dis- play 9 (touch-screen) using your finger or stylus 7. You can switch between these two modes of operation at any time. Indicator lamps Switching the Pocket PC on and off The blue Bluetooth wireless connection indicator lamp 2 Switching on

 Press down briefly on stylus 7. Stylus 7 is ejected upward. Inserting  Insert stylus 7 into the opening and press downward until it engages. flashes slowly when the Bluetooth wireless radio has been switched on  Switch on ignition ( page 54).  Press On/Off button 8. The Bluetooth wireless connection indicator lamp 2 flashes. The yellow battery charge indicator lamp 6 In display 9 you will see the following in succession:
is out when the battery is not being charged
the Maybach logo for several seconds
flashes when the battery is being charged

comes on continuously when the battery is completely charged and the Pocket PC is in the Pocket PC cradle. the Bluetooth wireless connection status g shown in the status line a until the Bluetooth wireless connection between the Pocket PC and the vehicle has been established
the time and the battery charge status shown in the status line a. Removing and inserting the stylus Removing is out when the Bluetooth wireless radio has been switched off The display is in color and you will see a Bluetooth wireless connection symbol in the status line a. The Pocket PC is ready for use. 316 Controls in detail Pocket PC remote control* i Switching off The Bluetooth wireless connection can only be established if:  Press On/Off button 8.
the ignition is switched on or
for up to 15 minutes after the ignition was switched off When you are not using the Pocket PC, the display darkens after an adjustable time ( page 338). This helps increase the usable battery time. The Bluetooth wireless connection remains intact and the blue Bluetooth wireless indicator lamp 2 continues to flash slowly. In order to reactivate the Pocket PC, press
one of the main menu function buttons b, c, e or f You will see the corresponding menu.
On/Off button 8 or
Navigation button d. Display The Bluetooth wireless connection indicator lamp 2 goes out. The Bluetooth wireless connection is interrupted and the Pocket PC is switched off. i The Pocket PC switches off automatically following an adjustable time ( page 338). You can only switch off the Pocket PC if it has been turned on and activated. Pocket PC 1 shown; feature description also applies to Pocket PC 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Main menu: Light Main menu: Privacy Main menu: Manual Adjustments Main menu: Pocket PC Settings Settings menu Time Status line Battery charge status: the more segments displayed, the greater the battery's charge. 9 Submenus The selected main menu, submenu and settings menu are highlighted in the display. 317 Controls in detail Pocket PC remote control* 1 2 3 4 5 6 Operation via main menu function buttons and navigation button An example of how to select settings is described below. 7 8 9 a b Pocket PC 2 Pocket PC 1 318 Main menu: Light Main menu: Privacy Main menu: Manual Adjustments Main menu: Pocket PC Settings Settings menu Main menu function button: Manual Adjustments Main menu function button: Pocket PC Settings Navigation button Main menu function button: Light Main menu function button: Privacy Submenus Controls in detail Pocket PC remote control* Choosing a main menu (Pocket PC 1 and Pocket PC 2) Selecting a submenu and selecting settings (Pocket PC 1 and Pocket PC 2)  Press the desired main menu function  Press the bottom of navigation button 6, 7, 9 or a. button 8. The selected main menu 1, 2, 3 or 4 is highlighted in the display and you will see the corresponding submenus b. The first submenu is highlighted in the display and you will see the corresponding settings menu 5. i You can also select a main menu 1, 2, 3 or 4 with navigation button 8. Simply press the left or right side of the navigation button.  Press the top or bottom of navigation  Press the left or right side of naviga- tion button 8 in order to select one of the symbols in settings menu 5.  You can select the desired setting by pressing the top or bottom of navigation button 8. Your choice is stored and/or carried out immediately. button 8 repeatedly until the desired submenu b is highlighted in the display. In addition you will see the corresponding settings menu 5. 319 Controls in detail Pocket PC remote control* Operation via touch-screen The following pages describe operation of the Pocket PC using the touch-screen. Illustrations show Pocket PC 1 except where noted. Pocket PC 2 graphical interface may vary slightly. Symbols, feature description and operating instructions, however, also apply to Pocket PC 2 except where noted. Switching interior lighting, ambient lighting, reading lamps, roof lighting* or headliner lamps and pillar uplights functions* on/off i Depending on equipment, the arrangement of function buttons may vary. Switching on the lights  Press the desired function button 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6. The corresponding light symbol 7 turns yellow. Selecting main menu: Light Switching off the lights  Press the desired function button 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6. 1 2 3 4 5 1 Main menu: Light  Press main menu button: Light 1. The selected symbol in button 1 is highlighted in the display and you will see the corresponding submenus. 320 Function button: Interior lighting Function button: Ambient lighting Function button: Reading lamp, right Function button: Reading lamp, left Function button: Roof lighting*, in vehicles with a electrotransparent roof* 6 Function button: Headliner lamps and pillar uplights*, in Maybach 62 with tilt/sliding sunroof 7 Light symbol The corresponding light symbol 7 turns white. i If you would like to switch a selected light on or off with the navigation button, press the navigation button
in the center or
on the left or
on the right Controls in detail Pocket PC remote control* Selecting submenu: Ambient lighting dimmer and selecting settings  Press submenu button: Ambient Selecting main menu: Privacy lighting dimmer 1. The selected symbol in button 1 is highlighted in the display and you will see the corresponding settings menu 3.  Press symbol 4. The ambient lighting becomes brighter. Slide control 6 shows you the current setting. or 1 2 3 4 5 Submenu: Ambient lighting dimmer Settings menu To brighten lighting To dim lighting Slide control i The light symbol 2 turns yellow when the ambient lighting is switched on.  Press symbol 5. The ambient lighting becomes dimmer. Slide control 6 shows you the current setting. 1 Main menu: Privacy i Depending on equipment, the arrangement of function buttons may vary.  Press main menu button: Privacy 1. The selected symbol in button 1 is highlighted in the display and you will see the corresponding submenus. 321 Controls in detail Pocket PC remote control* Selecting submenu: Operating the partition curtain* Warning! G When operating the curtains, make sure there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the opening or closing procedure. The opening or closing procedure can be immediately halted by releasing symbol 5 or 6 or by again pressing symbol 4 or 3. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Submenu: Partition curtain Settings menu To close curtain automatically To open curtain automatically To open curtain To close curtain When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury.  Press and hold symbol 5. The curtain opens until you release symbol 5. Closing the curtain  Press and hold symbol 6. The curtain closes until you release symbol 6. Fully opening the curtain (Express-open)  Briefly press symbol 4. The curtain opens completely.  To stop the procedure, press symbol 4 again. Fully closing the curtain (Express-close)  Press submenu button: Partition cur- tain 1. The selected symbol in button 1 is highlighted in the display and you will see the corresponding settings menu 2. 322 Opening the curtain  Briefly press symbol 3. The curtain closes completely.  To stop the procedure, press symbol 3 again. Controls in detail Pocket PC remote control* Selecting submenu: Operating the left rear side window curtain* Warning! G When operating the curtains, make sure there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the opening or closing procedure. The opening or closing procedure can be immediately halted by releasing symbol 5 or 6 or by again pressing symbol 4 or 3. 1 Submenu: Left rear side window curtain 2 Settings menu 3 To close curtain automatically 4 To open curtain automatically 5 To open curtain 6 To close curtain When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury. Opening the curtain  Press and hold symbol 5. The curtain opens until you release symbol 5. Closing the curtain  Press and hold symbol 6. The curtain closes until you release symbol 6. Fully opening the curtain (Express-open)  Briefly press symbol 4. The curtain opens completely.  To stop the procedure, press symbol 4 again. Fully closing the curtain (Express-close)  Press submenu button: Left rear side window curtain 1. The selected symbol in button 1 is highlighted in the display and you will see the corresponding settings menu 2.  Briefly press symbol 3. The curtain closes completely.  To stop the procedure, press symbol 3 again. 323 Controls in detail Pocket PC remote control* Selecting submenu: Making the electrotransparent roof* opaque/transparent  Press submenu button: Electrotrans- parent roof 1. The selected symbol in button 1 is highlighted in the display and you will see the corresponding settings menu 2. i The electrotransparent roof lighting is automatically switched off when the screen is opened. Warning! Making the electrotransparent roof opaque  If the screen is closed, open it com- pletely.  Press symbol 3. 1 Submenu: Electrotransparent roof 2 Settings menu 3 To make electrotransparent roof opaque 4 To make electrotransparent roof transparent 324 The electrotransparent roof turns opaque. Making the electrotransparent roof transparent  Press symbol 4. The screen opens automatically and the electrotransparent roof turns transparent. G The electrotransparent roof is made out of glass. In the event of an accident, the glass may shatter. This may result in an opening in the roof. In a vehicle rollover, occupants not wearing their seat belts or not wearing them properly may be thrown out of the opening. Such an opening also presents a potential for injury for occupants wearing their seat belts properly as entire body parts or portions of them may protrude from the passenger compartment. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment can cause an accident and/or serious personal injury. Controls in detail Pocket PC remote control* Selecting submenu: Operating the right rear side window curtain* Warning! G When operating the curtains, make sure there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the opening or closing procedure. The opening or closing procedure can be immediately halted by releasing symbol 4 or 3 or by again pressing symbol 5 or 6. 1 Submenu: Right rear side window curtain 2 Settings menu 3 To close curtain 4 To open curtain 5 To open curtain automatically 6 To close curtain automatically When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury. Opening the curtain  Press and hold symbol 4. The curtain opens until you release symbol 4. Closing the curtain  Press and hold symbol 3. The curtain closes until you release symbol 3. Fully opening the curtain (Express-open)  Briefly press symbol 5. The curtain opens completely.  To stop the procedure, press symbol 5 again. Fully closing the curtain (Express-close)  Press submenu button: Right rear side window curtain 1. The selected symbol in button 1 is highlighted in the display and you will see the corresponding settings menu 2.  Briefly press symbol 6. The curtain closes completely.  To stop the procedure, press symbol 6 again. 325 Controls in detail Pocket PC remote control* Selecting submenu: Operating the rear window curtain Opening the curtain  Press and hold symbol 4. Selecting main menu: Manual adjustments The curtain opens until you release symbol 4. Closing the curtain  Press and hold symbol 3. The curtain closes until you release symbol 3. Fully opening the curtain (Express-open) 1 2 3 4 5 6 Submenu: Rear window curtain Settings menu To close curtain To open curtain To open curtain automatically To close curtain automatically  Press submenu button: Rear window curtain 1. The selected symbol in button 1 is highlighted in the display and you will see the corresponding settings menu 2. 326  Briefly press symbol 5. The curtain opens completely.  To stop the procedure, press symbol 5 again. Fully closing the curtain (Express-close)  Briefly press symbol 6. The curtain closes completely.  To stop the procedure, press symbol 6 again. 1 Main menu: Manual Adjustments i Depending on equipment, the arrangement of function buttons may vary.  Press main menu button: Manual Ad- justments 1. The selected symbol in button 1 is highlighted in the display and you will see the corresponding submenus. Controls in detail Pocket PC remote control* Selecting submenu: Operating the partition* Warning! G When operating the partition, make sure there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the opening or closing procedure. The opening or closing procedure can be immediately halted by releasing symbol 5 or 6 or by again pressing symbol 4 or 3. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Submenu: Partition Settings menu To close partition automatically To open partition automatically To open partition To close partition When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury.  Press submenu button: Partition 1. The selected symbol in button 1 is highlighted in the display and you will see the corresponding settings menu 2. Closing the partition  Press and hold symbol 6. The partition closes until you release symbol 6. Opening the partition  Press and hold symbol 5. The partition opens until you release symbol 5. Fully closing the partition (Express-close)  Briefly press symbol 3. The partition closes completely.  To stop the procedure, press symbol 3 again. Fully opening the partition (Express-open)  Briefly press symbol 4. The partition opens completely.  To stop the procedure, press symbol 4 again. 327 Controls in detail Pocket PC remote control* Selecting submenu: Opening and closing the power tilt/sliding sunroof (Maybach 62) Warning! G When closing the tilt/sliding sunroof, make sure there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure. The opening/closing procedure of the tilt/ sliding sunroof can be immediately halted by releasing symbol 5 or 6 or by again pressing symbol 4 or 3. The tilt/sliding sunroof is made out of glass. In the event of an accident, the glass may shatter. This may result in an opening in the roof. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Submenu: Tilt/sliding sunroof Settings menu To slide sunroof closed automatically To slide sunroof open automatically To slide sunroof open To slide sunroof closed 328 In a vehicle rollover, occupants not wearing their seat belts or not wearing them properly may be thrown out of the opening. Such an opening also presents a potential for injury for occupants wearing their seat belts properly as entire body parts or portions of them may protrude from the passenger compartment. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment can cause an accident and/or serious personal injury.  Press submenu button: Tilt/sliding sunroof 1. The selected symbol in button 1 is highlighted in the display and you will see the corresponding settings menu 2. Controls in detail Pocket PC remote control* Opening the screen and the power tilt/ sliding sunroof Fully opening the screen and the tilt/sliding sunroof (Express-open) Fully closing the tilt/sliding sunroof and the screen (Express-close)  Press and hold symbol 5.  Briefly press symbol 4.  Briefly press symbol 3. The sunroof opens when the screen has opened completely. Closing the screen and the power tilt/ sliding sunroof  Press and hold symbol 6. The screen opens completely.  Briefly press symbol 4 again. The sunroof opens completely.  To stop the procedure, press symbol 4 again. The sunroof closes completely.  Briefly press symbol 3 again. The screen closes completely.  To stop the procedure, press symbol 3 again. The sunroof closes when the sunroof has closed completely. 329 Controls in detail Pocket PC remote control* Selecting submenu: Operating the electrotransparent roof* Warning! G When closing the screen, make sure no one can be caught and/or injured. In case of danger, release symbol 5 or press symbol 4 again. The electrotransparent roof is made out of glass. In the event of an accident, the glass may shatter. This may result in an opening in the roof. 1 Submenu: Electrotransparent roof screen 2 Settings menu 3 Press to open screen automatically 4 Press to close screen automatically 5 Press to slide screen closed 6 Press to slide screen open 330 In a vehicle rollover, occupants not wearing their seat belts or not wearing them properly may be thrown out of the opening. Such an opening also presents a potential for injury for occupants wearing their seat belts properly as entire body parts or portions of them may protrude from the passenger compartment. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment can cause an accident and/or serious personal injury.  Press submenu button: Electrotrans- parent roof screen 1. The selected symbol in button 1 is highlighted in the display and you will see the corresponding settings menu 2. Opening the screen  Press and hold symbol 6. The screen opens until you release symbol 6. The electrotransparent roof lighting is automatically turned off when the screen is closed. Closing the screen  Press and hold symbol 5. The screen closes until you release symbol 5. The electrotransparent roof turns opaque when the screen is closed. Controls in detail Pocket PC remote control* Fully opening the screen (Express-open)  Briefly press symbol 3. Selecting submenu: Extending/retracting the rear center seat head restraint The screen opens completely and the electrotransparent roof lighting is automatically turned off.  Press and hold symbol 3. The rear center seat head restraint retracts until you release symbol 3. or  Press and hold symbol 4.  To stop the procedure, press The rear center seat head restraint extends until you release symbol 4. symbol 3 again. Fully closing the screen (Express-close) Warning!  Briefly press symbol 4. The screen closes completely and the electrotransparent roof turns opaque.  To stop the procedure, press symbol 4 again. 1 Submenu: Rear center seat head restraint 2 Settings menu 3 To raise head restraint 4 To lower head restraint  Press submenu button: Rear center seat head restraint 1. The selected symbol in button 1 is highlighted in the display and you will see the corresponding settings menu 2. G For your protection, drive only with properly positioned head restraints. Adjust head restraint so that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at eye level. This will reduce the potential for injury to the head and neck in the event of an accident or similar situation. Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head restraints. Head restraints are intended to help reduce injuries during an accident. 331 Controls in detail Pocket PC remote control* Selecting submenu: Raising and lowering the power tilt/sliding sunroof Warning! G When closing the tilt/sliding sunroof, make sure there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure. The opening/closing procedure of the tilt/ sliding sunroof can be immediately halted by releasing symbol 4 or by again pressing symbol 5. 1 2 3 4 5 Submenu: Tilt/sliding sunroof Settings menu To raise tilt/sliding sunroof To lower tilt/sliding sunroof To lower tilt/sliding sunroof automatically 6 To raise tilt/sliding sunroof automatically 332 The tilt/sliding sunroof is made out of glass. In the event of an accident, the glass may shatter. This may result in an opening in the roof. In a vehicle rollover, occupants not wearing their seat belts or not wearing them properly may be thrown out of the opening. Such an opening also presents a potential for injury for occupants wearing their seat belts properly as entire body parts or portions of them may protrude from the passenger compartment. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment can cause an accident and/or serious personal injury.  Press submenu button: Tilt/sliding sunroof 1. The selected symbol in button 1 is highlighted in the display and you will see the corresponding settings menu 2. Controls in detail Pocket PC remote control* Raising the tilt/sliding sunroof Selecting main menu: Pocket PC settings  Press and hold symbol 3. In this menu, you can select the settings for your Pocket PC. The sunroof is raised until you release symbol 3. Lowering the tilt/sliding sunroof  Press and hold symbol 4. The sunroof is lowered until you release symbol 4. Pocket PC settings: Pocket PC 2 Fully raising the tilt/sliding sunroof 1 Main menu: Settings  Briefly press symbol 6. The sunroof is raised completely.  To stop the procedure, press symbol 6 again.  Press main menu button: Settings 1. Pocket PC settings: Pocket PC 1 1 Main menu: Settings The selected symbol in button 1 is highlighted in the display and you will see the corresponding submenus. Fully lowering the tilt/sliding sunroof  Briefly press symbol 5. The sunroof closes completely. To stop the procedure, press symbol 5 again. 333 Controls in detail Pocket PC remote control* Selecting submenu: Keypad tones and selecting settings When you press a button or a symbol, an acoustic tone sounds. This tone can be switched on or off, and the volume can be adjusted.  Press submenu button: Keypad tones 1. Selecting submenu: Daytime/Nighttime settings and selecting settings The selected symbol in button 1 is highlighted in the display and you will see the corresponding settings menu 2. Turning off keypad tones  Press symbol 5. Turning on keypad tones  Press symbol 6. Adjusting keypad tone volume  Press button 3 or 4 repeatedly until the desired volume has been reached. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Submenu: Keypad tones Settings menu To increase keypad tone volume To decrease keypad tone volume To turn off keypad tones To turn on keypad tones 334 1 Submenu: Daytime/Nighttime Settings 2 Settings menu 3 Manual mode 4 Automatic mode 5 Nighttime setting 6 Daytime setting  Press submenu button: Daytime/ Nighttime Settings 1. The selected symbol in button 1 is highlighted in the display and you will see the corresponding settings menu 2. Controls in detail Pocket PC remote control* Choosing automatic mode  Press symbol 4. Selecting submenu: Display brightness and selecting settings Depending on the ambient brightness, the display assumes either the daytime or the nighttime setting. Choosing automatic mode  Press symbol 4. Depending on the ambient brightness, the display becomes either brighter or darker. Choosing manual mode Choosing manual mode  Press symbol 3.  Press symbol 3. Regardless of the ambient brightness, the selected daytime or nighttime setting is constant. Regardless of the ambient brightness, the selected display brightness remains constant. or 1 2 3 4 5 6  Press symbol 5.  Press submenu button: Display Choosing daytime or nighttime setting  Press symbol 6. The display assumes the daytime setting. The display assumes the nighttime setting. Submenu: Display Brightness Settings menu Manual mode Automatic mode To make display darker To make display brighter Adjusting display brightness  Press button 5 or 6 repeatedly until the desired display brightness has been reached. Brightness 1. The selected symbol in button 1 is highlighted in the display and you will see the corresponding settings menu 2. 335 Controls in detail Pocket PC remote control* Selecting submenu: Time and selecting settings (Pocket PC 1)  Press submenu button: Time 1. The selected symbol in button 1 is highlighted in the display and you will see the corresponding settings menus 2 and 3. Setting minutes forward or backward  Press symbol 4 or 5 until the min- utes have been set. Setting hour forward or backward  Press symbol 6 or 7 until the hour has been set. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Submenu: Time Settings menu for hours Settings menu for minutes To set minutes forward To set minutes backward To set hours backward To set hours forward 336 Controls in detail Pocket PC remote control* Selecting submenu: Time and selecting settings (Pocket PC 2) Setting time manually Setting time display mode  Press symbol 4.  Press symbol 7 or 8 repeatedly until You can set hours and minutes manually with the symbol 7 or 8. Setting time synchronization with COMAND In settings menu for time display mode 3 the desired display appears:  Press symbol 5.
The Pocket PC time is synchronized with your COMAND. In the settings menus 2 and 3 appears AUTO. 1 2 3 4 5 Submenu: Time Settings menu for hours and minutes Settings menu for time display mode To set time manually To set time synchronization with COMAND 6 Display time in the status line 7 To set hours and minutes forward 8 To set hours and minutes backward the desired display mode is set according to either the 24-hour mode or the 12-hour mode. Setting hours and minutes forward or backward  Press symbol 7 or 8 until the hours 24 for 24h time display mode or
AM or PM for 12h time display mode. In addition, am or pm for 12h time display mode appears in status line 6. and minutes have been set.  Press submenu button: Time 1. The selected symbol in button 1 is highlighted in the display and you will see the corresponding settings menus 2 and 3. 337 Controls in detail Pocket PC remote control* Selecting submenu: Automatic switchoff for display/equipment and selecting settings (Pocket PC 2 only)  Press submenu button: Automatic switch-off for display and device 1. The selected symbol in button 1 is highlighted in the display and you will see the corresponding settings menus 2 and 3. Setting minutes for automatic equipment switch-off forward or backward  Press symbol 4 or 5 repeatedly until the desired interval is set. 1 Submenu: Automatic switch-off for display and device 2 Settings menu for automatic display switch-off 3 Settings menu for automatic device switch-off 4 To set time for automatic device switch-off forward 5 To set time for automatic device switch-off backward 6 To set time for automatic display switch-off backward 7 To set time for automatic display switch-off forward 338 When the set time has elapsed, the Pocket PC automatically switches itself off. Setting minutes for automatic display switch-off forward or backward  Press symbol 6 or 7 repeatedly until the desired interval is set. When the set time has elapsed, the display darkens. Controls in detail Pocket PC remote control* Pocket PC troubleshooting Problem Possible cause Suggested solution The Bluetooth wireless connection can- The ignition is switched off and the The receiver is switched off. not be established or your Pocket PC run-on time of 15 minutes has expired.  Switch on ignition ( page 54). has no control functions.  If necessary, switch off your Pocket PC and You cannot make any settings, such as then switch it on again ( page 313) or switching the interior lights on or off. ( page 316). In the status line, you may see the The Bluetooth wireless connection has  Switch off your Pocket PC ( page 313) or Bluetooth wireless connection status been interrupted because the ( page 316). ( page 312) or ( page 315) with a red Pocket PC is out of range.  Make sure the Pocket PC is inside the vehiexclamation point. cle.  Wait a few seconds and switch on your Pocket PC again. The Bluetooth wireless connection indicator lamp comes on continuously (Pocket PC 1) or you will see a Bluetooth wireless connection symbol in the status line (Pocket PC 2) as soon as the Bluetooth wireless connection has been re-established. Any other cause.  Switch off your Pocket PC and then switch it on again ( page 313) or ( page 316). 339 Controls in detail Pocket PC remote control* Problem Possible cause You have switched on your Pocket PC The battery is discharged. but do not automatically see the main menu (i.e. the program does not start). Suggested solution  Charge the battery for a few minutes ( page 310).  Switch on your Pocket PC ( page 313) or ( page 316). The Pocket PC turns itself off automatically. The battery is completely discharged.  Charge the battery for a few minutes The Pocket PC memory has been ( page 310). erased.  Switch on your Pocket PC ( page 313) or ( page 316) and follow the instructions which appear in the display. The Pocket PC is automatically restarted and the software is re-installed. Be sure not to interrupt this process. After a brief period, the Bluetooth wireless connection is reestablished. (This can take up to two minutes.) Afterward, you will see the main menu in the display. Pocket PC no longer functions although:
the ignition is switched on ( page 54)
the Pocket PC battery is charged ( page 310)
the Pocket PC is inside the vehicle 340 Your Pocket PC has an undefined status.  Reset the Pocket PC ( page 427). Operation The first 1000 miles (1500 km) Driving instructions At the gas station Engine compartment Tires and wheels Winter driving Maintenance Vehicle care 341 Operation The first 1000 miles (1500 km) In the "Operation" section, you will find detailed information on operating, maintaining and caring for your vehicle. The more cautiously you treat your vehicle during the break-in period, the more satisfied you will be with its performance later on.
Drive your vehicle during the first 1000 miles (1500 km) at varying but moderate vehicle and engine speeds.
During this period, avoid heavy loads (full throttle driving) and excessive engine speeds (no more than 2⁄3 of maximum rpm in each gear).
Avoid accelerating by kickdown.
Do not attempt to slow the vehicle down by shifting to a lower gear using the gear selector lever.
Select gear positions 3, 2 or 1 only when driving at moderate speeds (for hill driving). After 1000 miles (1500 km) you may gradually increase vehicle and engine speeds to the permissible maximum. 342 ! All of the above instructions, as may apply to your vehicle type, also apply when driving the first 1000 miles (1500 km) after the engine or the rear differential has been replaced. i Always obey applicable speed limits. Operation Driving instructions  Driving instructions Drive sensibly – save fuel Fuel consumption, to a great extent, depends on driving habits and operating conditions. Drinking and driving To save fuel you should: Warning! Pedals G
Keep tires at the recommended inflation pressures.
Remove unnecessary loads. Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and driving are very dangerous combinations. Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can affect your reflexes, perceptions and judgement.
Allow engine to warm up under low load use. The possibility of a serious or even fatal accident are greatly increased when you drink or take drugs and drive.
Avoid frequent acceleration and deceleration.
Have all maintenance work performed at the intervals specified in the Maintenance Booklet and as required by the Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) or FSS (Canada vehicles). Contact an authorized Maybach Studio. Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow anyone to drive who has been drinking or taking drugs. Warning! G Keep driver’s foot area clear at all times. Objects stored in this area may impair pedal movement. Power assistance Warning! G With the engine not running, there is no power assistance for the brake and steering systems. In this case, it is important to keep in mind that a considerably higher degree of effort is necessary to brake and steer the vehicle. Fuel consumption is also increased by driving in cold weather, in stop-and-go traffic, on short trips and in hilly country. 343 Operation Driving instructions Brakes Warning! G After driving in heavy rain for some time without applying the brakes or through water deep enough to wet brake components, the first braking action may be somewhat reduced and increased pedal pressure may be necessary to obtain expected braking effect. Maintain a safe distance from vehicles in front. Resting your foot on the brake pedal will cause excessive and premature wear of the brake pads. It can also result in the brakes overheating, thereby significantly reducing their effectiveness. It may not be possible to stop the vehicle in sufficient time to avoid an accident. To help prevent brake disk corrosion after driving on wet road surfaces (particularly salted roads), it is advisable to brake the vehicle with considerable force prior to parking. The heat generated serves to dry the brakes. 344 If your brake system is normally only subjected to moderate loads, you should occasionally test the effectiveness of the brakes by applying above-normal braking pressure at higher speeds. This will also enhance the grip of the brake pads. ! Be very careful not to endanger other road users when you apply the brakes. Refer to the description of the Brake Assist System (BAS) ( page 97). If the parking brake is released and the brake warning lamp in the instrument cluster stays on, the brake fluid level in the reservoir is too low. Brake pad wear or a leak in the system may be the reason for low brake fluid in the reservoir. Have the brake system inspected immediately. Contact an authorized Maybach Studio. All checks and service work on the brake system should be carried out by qualified technicians only. Contact an authorized Maybach Studio. Only install brake pads and brake fluid recommended by us for use on Maybach vehicles. Warning! G If other than recommended brake pads are installed, or other than recommended brake fluid is used, the braking properties of the vehicle can be degraded to an extent that safe braking is substantially impaired. This could result in an accident. ! When driving down long and steep grades, relieve the load on the brakes by shifting into a lower gear to use the engine’s braking power. This helps prevent overheating of the brakes and reduces brake pad wear. Operation Driving instructions ! After hard braking, it is advisable to drive on for some time, rather than immediately parking, so that the air stream can cool down the brakes faster. Parking Driving off Apply the brakes to test them briefly after driving off. Perform this procedure only when the road is clear of other traffic. Do not park this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass, hay or leaves can come into contact with the hot exhaust system, as these materials could be ignited and cause a vehicle fire. Warm up the engine smoothly. Do not place full load on the engine until the operating temperature has been reached. When starting off on a slippery surface, do not allow a drive wheel to spin for an extended period with the ESP switched off. Doing so may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Maybach Limited Warranty. i Simultaneously depressing the accelerator pedal and applying the brake reduces engine performance and causes premature brake and drivetrain wear. Warning! G Set the parking brake whenever parking or leaving the vehicle. In addition, move gear selector lever to position P. When parking on hills, turn front wheels towards the curb. To reduce the risk of personal injury as a result of inadvertent vehicle movement, before turning off the engine and leaving the vehicle always:
Keep right foot firmly on brake pedal.
Firmly depress parking brake pedal.
Move the gear selector lever to position P.
Slowly release brake pedal.
When parked on an incline, turn front wheels towards the road curb.
Turn the SmartKey to starter switch position 0 and remove the SmartKey from the starter switch, or press the start/stop button ( page 55) (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO**).
Take the SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** with you and lock vehicle when leaving. 345 Operation Driving instructions Tires Warning! Warning! G If you feel a sudden significant vibration or ride disturbance, or you suspect that possible damage to your vehicle has occurred, you should turn on the hazard warning flashers, carefully slow down, and drive with caution to an area which is a safe distance from the road. Inspect the tires and the vehicle underbody for possible damage. If the vehicle or tires appear unsafe, have it towed to the nearest authorized Maybach Studio or tire dealer for repairs. Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by law. These indicators are located in six places on the tread circumference and become visible at a tread depth of approximately 1⁄16 in (1.6 mm), at which point the tire is considered worn and should be replaced. The treadwear indicator appears as a solid band across the tread. 346 G Although the applicable federal motor vehicle safety laws consider a tire to be worn when the treadwear indicators (TWI) become visible at approximately 1⁄16 in (1.6 mm), we recommend that you do not allow your tires to wear down to that level. As tread depth approaches 1⁄8 in (3 mm), the adhesion properties on a wet road are sharply reduced. Depending upon the weather and/or road surface (conditions), the tire traction varies widely. Specified tire pressures must be maintained. This applies particularly if the tires are subject to extreme operating conditions (e.g. high speeds, heavy loads, high ambient temperatures). Warning! G Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You may lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire or driving at high speed with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire. Hydroplaning Depending on the depth of the water layer on the road, hydroplaning may occur, even at low speeds and with new tires. Reduce vehicle speed, avoid track grooves in the road and apply brakes cautiously in the rain. Operation Driving instructions Tire traction The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icy road is always lower than on a dry road. You should pay particular attention to the condition of the road whenever the outside temperatures are close to the freezing point. Warning! G If ice has formed on the road, tire traction will be substantially reduced. Under such weather conditions, drive, steer and brake with extreme caution. We recommend M+S rated radial-ply tires for the winter season for all four wheels to insure normal balanced handling characteristics. On packed snow, they can reduce your stopping distance in comparison to summer tires. Stopping distance, however, is still considerably greater than when the road is not covered with snow or ice. Exercise appropriate caution. Refer to "Rims and tires" in the Technical data section ( page 459) for a listing of winter tires approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles. ! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel. This may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Maybach Limited Warranty. Tire speed rating Regardless of the tire rating, local speed limits should be obeyed. Use prudent driving speeds appropriate to prevailing conditions. Your vehicle is factory equipped with "W"-rated tires, which have a speed rating of 168 mph (270 km/h). Warning! G Even when permitted by law, never operate a vehicle at speeds greater than the maximum speed rating of the tires. Exceeding the maximum speed for which tires are rated can lead to sudden tire failure, causing loss of vehicle control and possibly resulting in an accident and/or personal injury and possible death, for you and for others. i For more Information, see "Tire speed rating for winter tires" ( page 371). An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehicle from exceeding a speed of 155 mph (250 km/h). 347 Operation Driving instructions Winter driving instructions The most important rule for slippery or icy roads is to drive sensibly and to avoid abrupt acceleration, braking and steering maneuvers. Do not use the cruise control system under such conditions. When the vehicle is in danger of skidding, move gear selector lever to position N. Try to keep the vehicle under control by corrective steering action. i For more Information on driving with snow chains, see "Snow chains" ( page 372). Warning! G On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in order to obtain braking action. This could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent this type of control loss. 348 Road salts and chemicals can adversely affect braking efficiency. Increased pedal force may become necessary to produce the normal braking effect. Depressing the brake pedal periodically when traveling at length on salt-strewn roads can bring road-salt-impaired braking efficiency back to normal. If the vehicle is parked after being driven on salt-treated roads, the braking efficiency should be tested as soon as possible after driving is resumed. Warning! G Make sure not to endanger any other road users when carrying out these braking maneuvers. Warning! G If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, make sure snow is kept clear of the exhaust pipe and from around the vehicle with the engine running. Otherwise, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle interior resulting in unconsciousness and death. To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation, open a window slightly on the side of the vehicle not facing the wind. Warning! G The outside temperature indicator is not designed to serve as an ice-warning device and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. Indicated temperatures just above the freezing point do not guarantee that the road surface is free of ice. For more information, see "Winter driving" ( page 371). Operation Driving instructions Standing water Passenger compartment ! G Do not drive through flooded areas or water of unknown depth. Before driving through water, determine its depth. Never accelerate before driving into water. The bow wave could force water into the engine and auxiliary equipment, thus damaging them. Warning! If you must drive through standing water, drive slowly to prevent water from entering the passenger compartment or the engine compartment. Water in these areas could cause damage to electrical components or wiring of the engine or transmission, or could result in water being ingested by the engine through the air intake causing severe internal engine damage. Any such damage is not covered by the Maybach Limited Warranty. The trunk is the preferred place to carry objects. Control and operation of radio transmitters COMAND, radio and telephone Always fasten items being carried as securely as possible. Warning! In an accident, during hard braking or sudden maneuvers, loose items will be thrown around inside the vehicle, and cause injury to vehicle occupants unless the items are securely fastened in the vehicle. Driving abroad Abroad, there is an extensive Maybach service network at your disposal. If you plan to drive into areas which are not listed in the index of your Maybach Studio directory, you should request pertinent information from an authorized Maybach Studio. G Please do not forget that your primary responsibility is to drive the vehicle safely. Only operate the COMAND (Cockpit Management and Data System), radio or telephone1 if road, weather and traffic conditions permit. Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second. 1 Observe all legal requirements. 349 Operation Driving instructions Telephones and two-way radios Warning! G Never operate radio transmitters equipped with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. without being connected to an external antenna) from inside the vehicle while the engine is running. Doing so could lead to a malfunction of the vehicle’s electronic system, possibly resulting in an accident and/ or personal injury. Catalytic converter Your Maybach is equipped with monolithic-type catalytic converters, an important element in conjunction with the oxygen sensors to achieve substantial control of the pollutants in the exhaust emissions. Keep your vehicle in proper operating condition by following our recommended maintenance instructions as outlined in your Maintenance Booklet. ! Radio transmitters, such as a portable telephone or citizens band unit should only be used inside the vehicle if they are connected to an antenna that is installed on the outside of the vehicle. Refer to the radio transmitter operation instructions regarding use of an external antenna. 350 To prevent damage to the catalytic converters, use only premium unleaded gasoline in this vehicle. Any noticeable irregularities in engine operation should be dealt with promptly. Otherwise, excessive unburned fuel may reach the catalytic converter, causing it to overheat and start a fire. Warning! G As with any vehicle, do not idle, park or operate this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass, hay or leaves can come into contact with the hot exhaust system, as these materials could be ignited and cause a vehicle fire. Emission control Certain systems of the engine serve to keep the toxic components of the exhaust gases within permissible limits required by law. These systems, of course, will function properly only when maintained strictly according to factory specifications. Any adjustments to the engine should therefore be carried out only by qualified Maybach Studio authorized technicians. Engine adjustments should not be altered in any way. Moreover, the specified service jobs must be carried out regularly according to Maybach servicing requirements. For details refer to the Maintenance Booklet. Operation Driving instructions Warning! G Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide, and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness and lead to death. Do not run the engine in confined areas (such as a garage) which are not properly ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas fumes are entering the vehicle while driving, have the cause determined and corrected immediately. If you must drive under these conditions, drive with at least one window fully open at all times. Coolant temperature During severe operating conditions, e.g. stop-and-go traffic, the coolant temperature may rise close to approximately 248°F (120°C). ! The engine should not be operated with the coolant temperature over 248°F (120°C). Doing so may cause serious engine damage which is not covered by the Maybach Limited Warranty. Warning! G Driving when your engine is badly overheated can cause some fluids, which may have leaked into the engine compartment, to catch fire. You could be seriously burned. Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns and can occur just by opening the engine hood. Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it. Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until the engine has cooled down. 351 Operation At the gas station  Open the fuel filler flap by pushing at Refueling the point indicated by the arrow. Warning! G  The fuel filler flap springs open.  Turn the fuel cap to the left and hold Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous. It burns violently and can cause serious injury. Whenever you are around gasoline, avoid inhaling fumes and skin contact, extinguish all smoking materials. Never allow sparks, flame or smoking materials near gasoline! The fuel filler flap is located on the right hand side of the vehicle towards the rear. Locking/unlocking the vehicle with the SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** automatically locks/ unlocks the fuel filler flap. 352 on to it until possible pressure is released.  Take off the cap and set it in the re- cess on the fuel filler flap.  To prevent fuel vapors from escaping 1 Push to open the fuel filler flap 2 Set the fuel cap  Turn the engine off
by using the SmartKey, remove the SmartKey from the starter switch
by pressing the KEYLESS-GO** start/stop button ( page 55), open the driver's door (with the driver's door open, starter switch is now in position 0, same as SmartKey removed from the starter switch). into open air, fully insert filler nozzle unit.  Only fill your tank until the filler noz- zle unit cuts out – do not top up or  overfill. Operation At the gas station  Warning! G Overfilling of the fuel tank may create pressure in the system which could cause a gas discharge. This could cause the gas to spray back out when removing the fuel pump nozzle, which could cause personal injury.  Replace the fuel cap by turning it to the right. i i Use only premium unleaded gasoline with a minimum Posted Octane Rating of 91 (average of 96 RON/ 86 MON). Leaving the engine running and the fuel cap open can cause the ? lamp to illuminate. Information on gasoline quality can normally be found on the fuel pump. For more information, see "Practical hints" ( page 389). For more information on gasoline, see the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet. You will hear when the fuel cap is tightened.  Close the fuel filler flap. 353 Operation At the gas station Check regularly and before a long trip Brake fluid ! 1 2 3 4 Brake fluid SBC system only Coolant level Brake fluid Windshield washer and headlamp cleaning system i Opening hood ( page 355). If you find that the brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or below, have the brake system checked for brake pad thickness and leaks immediately. Notify an authorized Maybach Studio immediately. Do not add brake fluid as this will not solve the problem. For more information, see "Practical hints" ( page 388). Coolant For more information, see "Coolant level" ( page 360) and see "Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc." ( page 464). Windshield washer and headlamp cleaning system For more information on refilling the reservoir, see "Windshield washer and headlamp cleaning system" ( page 362). 354 Engine oil level For more information, see "Engine oil" ( page 356). Vehicle lighting Check function and cleanliness. For more information on replacing light bulbs, see "Replacing bulbs" ( page 430). See also the section on the exterior lamp switch ( page 143). Tire inflation pressure For more information on tire inflation pressure ( page 364). Operation Engine compartment  Engine compartment  Pull lever 1 towards you in the direc- Hood tion of the arrow. Warning! G Do not pull the release lever while the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise the hood could be forced open by passing air flow. Opening The hood lock release lever is located in the driver’s footwell to the left of the parking brake pedal. The hood is unlocked and handle 2 will extend out of the radiator grille. ! To avoid damage to the windshield wipers or hood, never open the hood if the wiper arms are folded forward away from the windshield.  Pull handle 2 to its stop out of radi- ator grille.  Pull up on the hood (do not pull up on the handle) and then release it. The hood will be automatically held open at shoulder height. Warning! G To help prevent personal injury, stay clear of moving parts when the hood is open and the engine is running. Make sure the hood is properly closed before driving. When closing the hood, use extreme caution not to catch hands or fingers. The radiator fan may continue to run for approximately 30 seconds or even restart after the engine has been turned off. Stay clear of fan blades.  2 Handle for opening the hood 1 Hood lock release 355 Operation Engine compartment  Warning! G If you see flames or smoke coming from the engine compartment, or if the coolant temperature gauge indicates that the engine is overheated, do not open the hood. Move away from vehicle and do not open the hood until the engine has cooled. If necessary, call the fire department. Closing Warning! G Be careful that you do not close the hood on anyone.  Let the hood drop from a height of approximately 1 ft (30 cm). The hood will lock audibly. Warning! G The engine is equipped with a transistorized ignition system. Because of the high voltage it is dangerous to touch any components (ignition coils, spark plug sockets, diagnostic socket) of the ignition system
with the engine running
while starting the engine
if ignition is "on" and the engine is turned manually 356  Check to make sure the hood is fully closed. If you can raise the hood at a point above the headlamps, then it is not properly closed. Open it again and let it drop with somewhat greater force. Engine oil The amount of oil your engine needs will depend on a number of factors, including driving style. Higher oil consumption can occur when
the vehicle is new
the vehicle is driven frequently at higher engine speeds Engine oil consumption checks should only be made after the vehicle break-in period. ! Do not use any special lubricant additives, as these may damage the drive assemblies. Using special additives not approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles may cause damage not covered by the Maybach Limited Warranty. More information on this subject is available at any Maybach Studio. Operation Engine compartment Checking engine oil level i When checking the oil level the vehicle must If you want to interrupt the checking procedure, press button k or j on the multifunction steering wheel.
be parked on level ground
be at normal operating temperature
have been stationary for at least five minutes with the engine turned off You can check the engine oil level on the multifunction display.  Switch on ignition ( page 54). The standard display ( page 157) should appear in the multifunction display.  Press button k or j on the  If necessary, add engine oil. One of the following messages will subsequently appear in the indicator:
OK
For more information on engine oil, see "Technical data" ( page 464) and ( page 465). ADD 1.0 QT. TO REACH MAX. OIL LEVEL (Canada: 1.0 LITER)
steering wheel until the following message is seen in the multifunction display: ENGINE OIL LEVEL MEASURING NOW! CORRECT MEASUREMENT ONLY IF VEH. LEVEL ENGINE OIL LEVEL For adding oil, see ( page 359). ADD 1.5 QTS. TO REACH MAX. OIL LEVEL (Canada: 1.5 LITERS)
ADD 2.0 QTS. TO REACH MAX. OIL LEVEL (Canada: 2.0 LITERS) 357 Operation Engine compartment Other display messages If you see the message: If the ignition is not switched on, the following message will appear: ENGINE OIL LEVEL NOT WHEN ENGINE ON FOR ENGINE OIL LEVEL SWITCH IGNITION ON  Turn off the engine.  Switch on the ignition. If you see the message: PERF. SERV. ON TIME  If engine is at normal operating tem- perature, wait five minutes before repeating check procedure.  If engine is not yet at normal operat- ing temperature, wait 30 minutes before repeating check procedure.  If engine is at normal operating tem- perature, wait five minutes before checking oil.  If the engine is not yet at normal op- erating temperature, you must wait 30 minutes before checking oil. If there is excessive engine oil with the engine at normal operating temperature, the following message will appear: ENGINE OIL LEVEL REDUCE OIL LEVEL  Have excess oil siphoned or drained off. Contact an authorized Maybach Studio. ! Excessive oil must be siphoned or drained off. It could cause damage to the engine and catalytic converter not covered by the Maybach Limited Warranty. For more information on messages in the display concerning engine oil, see "Practical hints" ( page 408). 358 Operation Engine compartment ! Adding engine oil Excessive oil must be siphoned or drained off. It could cause damage to the engine and catalytic converter not covered by the Maybach Limited Warranty. ! Only use approved engine oils and oil filters required for vehicles with Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) or FSS (Canada vehicles). For a listing of approved engine oils and oil filters, refer to the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet in your vehicle literature portfolio, or contact an authorized Maybach Studio. Using engine oils and oil filters of specification other than those expressly required for the Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) or FSS (Canada vehicles), or changing of oil and oil filter at change intervals longer than those called for by the Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) or FSS (Canada Vehicles) will result in engine damage not covered by the Maybach Limited Warranty.  Screw the filler cap 1 back on the filler neck. 1 Filler cap  Unscrew the filler cap 1 from filler neck.  Add engine oil as required. Be careful not to overfill with oil. Be careful not to spill any oil when adding. Avoid environmental damage caused by oil entering the ground or water. For more information on engine oil, see "Technical data" ( page 464) and ( page 465). Transmission fluid level The transmission fluid level does not need to be checked. If you notice transmission fluid loss or gear shifting malfunctions, have an authorized Maybach Studio check the automatic transmission. 359 Operation Engine compartment Coolant level The engine coolant is a mixture of water and anticorrosion/antifreeze. To check the coolant level, the vehicle must be parked on level ground and the engine must be cool. Warning! G
Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts. Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may burn if it comes into contact with hot engine parts.

360 Using a rag, slowly open the cap approximately ½ turn to relieve excess pressure. If opened immediately, scalding hot fluid and steam will be blown out under pressure.  Continue turning cap 2 to the left The coolant level is correct if the level
for cold coolant: reaches the black top part of the reservoir
for warm coolant: is approximately 0.6 in (1.5 cm) higher  Add coolant as required. Use extreme caution when opening the hood if there are any signs of steam or coolant leaking from the cooling system, or if the coolant temperature gauge indicates that the coolant is overheated. Do not remove pressure cap on coolant reservoir if coolant temperature is above 158°F (70°C). Allow engine to cool down before removing cap. The coolant reservoir contains hot fluid and is under pressure. proximately one half turn to the left to release any excess pressure. and remove it. The coolant expansion tank is located on the passenger side of the engine compartment. In order to avoid any possibly serious burns:
 Using a rag, turn cap 2 slowly ap-  Replace and tighten cap. For more information on coolant, see "Technical data" ( page 467). 1 Coolant expansion tank 2 Cap Operation Engine compartment Batteries Your vehicle is equipped with two batteries:
Starter battery (located in the engine compartment).
Electrical consumer battery (located in the trunk). These batteries should always be sufficiently charged in order to achieve their rated service life. Refer to Maintenance Booklet for battery maintenance intervals. If you use your vehicle mostly for shortdistance trips, you will need to have the battery charge checked more frequently. When replacing batteries, always use batteries approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles. If you do not intend to operate your vehicle for an extended period of time, consult an authorized Maybach Studio about steps you need to observe. G Observe all safety instructions and precautions when handling automotive batteries. A D B Risk of explosion Batteries contain materials that can harm the environment if disposed of improperly. Recycling of batteries is the preferred method of disposal. Many states require sellers of batteries to accept old batteries for recycling. Keep flames or sparks away from battery. Do not smoke. Battery acid is caustic. Do not allow it to come into contact with skin, eyes or clothing. In case it does, immediately flush affected area with clear water and seek medical help if necessary. E C F Wear eye protection. Keep children away. Follow the instructions in this Operator's Manual. 361 Operation Engine compartment Windshield washer and headlamp cleaning system Fluid for the windshield washer system and the headlamp cleaning system is supplied from the windshield washer reservoir. It has a capacity of approximately 7.1 US qt (6.7 l). During all seasons, add MB Windshield Washer Concentrate "S" to water. Premix the windshield washer fluid in a suitable container.  Refill the reservoir with MB Wind- shield Washer Concentrate and water (or commercially available pre-mixed windshield washer solvent/ antifreeze, depending on ambient temperatures). Always use washer solvent/antifreeze where temperatures may fall below freezing point. Failure to do so could result in damage to the washer system/reservoir. 362 Warning! G Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flammable. Do not spill washer solvent/ antifreeze on hot engine parts, because it may ignite and burn. You could be seriously burned. ! 1 Washer fluid reservoir For more information, see "Windshield and headlamp washer fluid mixing ratio" ( page 469). Only use washer fluid which is suitable for plastic lenses. Improper washer fluid can damage the plastic lenses of the headlamps. Operation Tires and wheels  Tires and wheels See an authorized Maybach Studio for information on tested and recommended rims and tires for summer and winter operation. They can also offer advice concerning tire service and purchase. Warning! G Replace rims or tires with the same designation, manufacturer and type as shown on the original part. See an authorized Maybach Studio for further information. If incorrectly sized rims and tires are mounted:
The wheel brakes or suspension components can be damaged
The correct operating clearance of the wheels and the tires are no longer guaranteed Warning! G Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the tire tread is badly worn, or if the tires have sustained damage, replace them. Important guidelines
Use only sets of tires and rims of the same type and make.
Tires must be of the correct size for the rim. When replacing rims, use only genuine Maybach wheel bolts specified for the particular rim type. Failure to do so can result in the bolts loosening and possibly an accident.
Break in new tires for approximately 60 miles (100 km) at moderate speeds.
Regularly check the tires and rims for damage. Retreaded tires are not tested or recommended by us for use on Maybach vehicles, since previous damage cannot always be recognized on retreads. We can therefore not assure the operating safety of the vehicle when such tires are used.
If vehicle is heavily loaded, check tire pressure and correct as required.
Do not allow your tires to wear down too far. Adhesion properties on wet roads are sharply reduced at tread depths under 1/8 in (3 mm).
When replacing individual tires, you should mount new tires on the front wheels first (on vehicles with samesized wheels all around). 363 Operation Tires and wheels Life of tires The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to:
Driving style
Tire pressure
Distance driven Warning! An arrow on the sidewall indicates the intended direction of tire rotation (spinning). G Tires and spare tire should be replaced after six years, regardless of the remaining tread. ! Keep unmounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with oil, grease and gasoline. 364 Direction of rotation Unidirectional tires offer added advantages, such as better hydroplaning performance. To benefit, however, you must make sure that the tires rotate in the direction specified. Checking tire pressure Warning! G If the tire pressure repeatedly drops:
Check the tires for punctures from foreign objects.
Check to see whether air is leaking from the valves or from around the rim. Check and correct the tire pressure only when tires are cold. Regularly check your tire pressure at intervals at least once a month. If the tires are warm, you should only correct the tire pressure if it is too low for current operating conditions. A table on the fuel filler flap lists the specified tire inflation pressures for warm and cold tires as well as for various operating conditions. Operation Tires and wheels i The pressures listed for light loads are minimum values offering high driving comfort. Increased inflation pressures listed for heavier loads may also be used for light loads. These higher pressures produce favorable handling characteristics. The ride of the vehicle, however, will be somewhat harder. Never exceed the max. values or inflate tires below the min. values listed on the fuel filler flap. Tire pressure changes by approximately 1.5 psi (0.1 bar) per 18°F (10°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure where the temperature is different from the outside temperature. Tire temperature and tire pressure also increase while driving, depending on the driving speed and the tire load. Warning! G Follow recommended inflation pressures. Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can result in sudden deflation (blowout) because they are more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris, potholes etc. Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires wear unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from being overheated. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified vehicle capacity weight (as indicated by the label on the pillar in the driver’s door opening). Overloading the tires can overheat them, possibly causing a blowout. Check the spare tire periodically for condition and inflation pressure. Spare tires will age and become worn over time even if never used, and thus should be inspected and replaced when necessary or after a maximum of six years. Checking tire pressure electronically i Check with an authorized Maybach Studio to determine the equipment installed in your vehicle. The tire inflation pressure monitor only functions on wheels that are equipped with the proper electronic sensors. It monitors the tire inflation pressure, as selected by the driver, in all four tires. A warning is issued to alert you to a decrease in pressure in one or more of the tires. Tire pressure inquiries are made using the multifunction display ( page 157). The inflation pressures are displayed only after a few minutes’ travel time. You can select the unit of measure used for the tire inflation pressure by changing the setting in the control system ( page 157). 365 Operation Tires and wheels i  Switch on the ignition. After reactivating the tire inflation pressure monitor, the inflation pressures are displayed only after a few minutes’ driving time.  Press button è or ÿ on the mul- During this time, you will see the following message in the display: TIRE PRES. DISPLAY APPEARS AFTER DRIVING A FEW MINUTES i Possible differences between the readings of a tire pressure gauge of an air hose, e.g. gas station equipment, and the vehicle’s control system can occur. The readings issued by the control system are more precise. tifunction steering wheel repeatedly until the standard display menu appears in the multifunction display ( page 158).  Press button k or j repeatedly until you see the current inflation pressures for each tire appear in the multifunction display. Warning! G When the tire pressure monitoring system warning lamp is lit, one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. You should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure as indicated on the vehicle’s tire information placard. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. Each tire, including the spare, should be checked monthly when cold and set to the recommended inflation pressure as specified in the vehicle placard and owner’s manual. i The recommended tire inflation pressure for your vehicle can be found on the inside of the fuel filler flap, not in the owner’s manual. 366 Operation Tires and wheels Warning! G The tire inflation pressure monitor does not indicate a warning for wrongly selected inflation pressures. Always adjust tire inflation pressure according to the label affixed on the fuel filler flap. The tire inflation pressure monitor is not able to issue a warning due to a sudden dramatic loss of pressure (e.g. tire blowout caused by a foreign object). In this case bring the vehicle to a halt by carefully applying the brakes and avoiding abrupt steering maneuvers. i Operating radio transmission equipment (e.g. wireless headsets, two-way radios, phones etc. except equipment approved by us for use in your Maybach vehicle) in or near the vehicle could cause the tire inflation pressure monitor to malfunction. Warning! G Follow recommended inflation pressures. Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can result in a sudden deflation (blowout) because they are more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris, potholes etc. Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires wear unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from being overheated. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified vehicle capacity weight (as indicated by the label on the pillar in the driver’s door opening). Overloading the tires can overheat them, possibly causing a blowout. Reactivating the tire inflation pressure monitor You must reactivate the tire inflation pressure monitor in the following cases:
If you have changed the tire pressure
If you have replaced the wheels or tires
If you have installed new wheels or tires  Using the table on the fuel filler flap, make sure the tire inflation pressure of all four tires is correct.  Press button è or ÿ on the mul- tifunction steering wheel repeatedly until the standard display menu appears in the multifunction display  ( page 157). 367 Operation Tires and wheels   Press button k or j repeatedly  Press button æ. until you see the current inflation pressures for each tire appear in the multifunction display or the following message appears in the multifunction display The following message will appear in the multifunction display field: TIRE PRES. DISPLAY APPEARS AFTER DRIVING A FEW MINUTES The tire inflation pressure monitor will now monitor the tire inflation pressure values of all four tires. i If you are transporting a deflated tire in the vehicle, do not activate the tire inflation pressure monitor until:
the deflated tire is no longer in the vehicle
you have inflated the tire to the correct pressure  Press reset button J ( page 25). The following message will appear in the multifunction display: MONITOR CURRENT TIRE PRESSURES? 368 TIRE PRES. MONITOR REACTIVATED Afterward, the following message will appear in the display: TIRE PRES. DISPLAY APPEARS AFTER DRIVING A FEW MINUTES This display appears until the individual inflation pressure values are matched with the tires. The individual values are then displayed. If you wish to cancel activation:  Press button ç NO. If one of the following messages appears in the display:
TIRE PRES. MONITOR REACTIVATE AFTER CORRECTING PRESSURE
TIRE PRESSURE PLEASE CORRECT  Check the tire inflation pressures and correct them if necessary.  Reactivate the tire inflation pressure monitor. Operation Tires and wheels Speed limitation in the event of tire problems If the tire pressure falls below a certain value or in case of a flat tire, your vehicle speed is automatically limited to 50 mph (80 km/h) and the message: LIMIT 50 MPH TIRE FAILURE (Canada: LIMIT 80 KM/H TIRE FAILURE) appears in the multifunction display. Additional warning messages may also appear in the multifunction display. Observe the warning messages in the display and follow the instructions for each message. See the "Practical hints" section ( page 416) for a listing of warning messages and instructions. Should the driving situation require and allow it, you can override the automatic speed limitation as set by the tire pressure monitoring system by depressing the accelerator pedal fully and briskly. This will shift the transmission to a lower gear and accelerate the vehicle until the accelerator pedal is released slightly or the top speed for a particular gear is reached. Warning! G Driving with underinflated or damaged tire(s) produces worse than normal and unexpected vehicle operational characteristics. Overriding the speed limitation is potentially dangerous as higher speeds and quick acceleration, as produced by your depressing the accelerator pedal fully and briskly, may intensify adverse vehicle handling characteristics. Warning! G You should pull over immediately. The vehicle no longer has steering stability and may skid. Change the wheel. Warning! G Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You may loose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire. 369 Operation Tires and wheels Rotating tires Warning! G Rotate front and rear wheels only if the tires are of the same dimension. If your vehicle is equipped with mixed-size tires (different tire dimensions front vs. rear), tire rotation is not possible. Tire rotation can be performed on vehicles with tires of the same dimension all around. If your vehicle is equipped with tires of the same dimension all around, tires can be rotated, observing a a frontto-rear rotation pattern that will maintain the intended rotation (spinning) direction of the tire ( page 364). In some cases, such as when your vehicle is equipped with mixed-size tires (different tire dimension front vs. rear), tire rotation is not possible. 370 If applicable to your vehicle's tire configuration, tires can be rotated according to the tire manufacturer's recommended intervals in the tire manufacturer's warranty pamphlet located in your vehicle literature portfolio. If none is available, tires should be rotated every 3000 to 6000 miles (5000 to 10000 km), or sooner if necessary, according to the degree of tire wear. The same rotation (spinning) direction must be maintained ( page 364). Rotate tires before the characteristic tire wear pattern becomes visible (shoulder wear on front tires and tread center wear on rear tires). Thoroughly clean the mounting face of wheels and brake disks, i.e. the inner side of the wheels/tires, during each rotation. Check for and ensure proper tire inflation pressure, activating the tire inflation pressure monitor if necessary. Warning! G Have the tightening torque checked after changing a wheel. Wheels could become loose if not tightened with a torque of 110 lb-ft (150 Nm). Only use genuine Maybach wheel bolts specified for your vehicle's rims. ! Your vehicle is equipped with a tire inflation pressure monitor. Electronic components are built into the wheel. Do not use mounting tools in the area of the valve as they could damage the electronic components. To prevent damage or incorrect installation, have the tires changed at an authorized Maybach Studio. For information on wheel change, see the “Practical hints” section ( page 422) and ( page 436). Operation Winter driving  Winter driving Before the onset of winter, have your vehicle winterized at an authorized Maybach Studio. This service includes:
Check of anticorrosion and antifreeze concentration.
Addition of cleaning concentrate to the water of the windshield and headlamp cleaning system. Add MB Concentrate "S" to a pre-mixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze which is formulated for temperatures below freezing point ( page 468).

Tire speed rating for winter tires If you install winter tires, have an authorized Maybach Studio limit the speed of your vehicle to the speed rating of the winter tires installed. When the speed limitation is activated, the segments up to the set speed limitation are illuminated, for example, 130 mph (210 km/h) as in the illustration below. Warning! G Even when permitted by law, never operate a vehicle at speeds greater than the maximum speed rating of the tires. Battery test. Battery capacity drops with decreasing ambient temperature. A well-charged battery helps to make sure the engine can be started even at low ambient temperatures. Tire change. We recommend for use on Maybach vehicles M+S radial-ply tires with a minimum tread depth of approximately 1⁄6 in (4 mm) on all four wheels for the winter season. Refer to "Rims and tires" in the Technical data section ( page 459) for a listing of winter tires approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles. Always observe the speed rating of the winter tires installed on your vehicle. If the maximum speed for which your tires are rated is below the speed rating of your vehicle, you must place a notice to this effect where it will be seen by the driver. Such notices are available from your tire dealer or from any authorized Maybach Studio. Exceeding the maximum speed for which tires are rated can lead to sudden tire failure, causing loss of vehicle control and possibly resulting in an accident and/or personal injury and possible death, for you and for others. Vehicle speed limitation for winter tires in speedometer 371 Operation Winter driving Winter tires Always use winter tires at temperatures below 45°F (7°C) and whenever wintry road conditions prevail. Use of winter tires is the only way to achieve the maximum effectiveness of the ABS and the ESP in winter operation. For safe handling, make sure all mounted winter tires are of the same make and have the same tread design. Warning! G Winter tires with a tread depth under 0.16 in (4 mm) must be replaced. They are no longer suitable for winter operation. Warning! If you use your spare tire when winter tires are fitted on the other wheels, be aware that the difference in tire characteristics may very well impair turning stability and that overall driving stability may be reduced. Adapt your driving style accordingly. Have the spare tire replaced with a winter tire at the nearest authorized Maybach Studio. Snow chains When using snow chains, the vehicle should only be driven at vehicle height Raised ( page 248). Snow chains should only be driven on snow-covered roads at speeds not to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). Remove chains as soon as possible when driving on roads without snow. 372 i G When driving with snow chains, you may wish to deactivate the ESP ( page 99) before setting the vehicle in motion. This will improve the vehicle‘s traction. Please observe the following guidelines when using snow chains:
Using snow chains is not permissible with all wheel/tire combinations.
Chains should only be used on the rear wheels. Follow the manufacturer's mounting instructions.
Use only snow chains that are approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles. your authorized Maybach Studio will be glad to advise you on this subject.
Use of snow chains may be prohibited depending on location. Always check local and state laws before installing snow chains. Operation Maintenance  Maintenance We strongly recommend that you have your vehicle serviced by an authorized Maybach Studio, in accordance with the Maintenance Booklet at the times called for by the maintenance service indicator display. Failure to have the vehicle maintained in accordance with the Maintenance Booklet and maintenance service indicator at the designated times /mileage will result in vehicle damage not covered by the Maybach Limited Warranty. The maintenance service indicator will notify you when your next maintenance service is due. Starting approximately one month before your next maintenance service is due, one of the following messages will appear in the multifunction display while you are driving or when you switch on the ignition (example service A): SERVICE SERVICE SERVICE SERVICE A A A A IN XXXXX MILES (KM) IN XXX DAYS IN X DAY DUE NOW The type of service due is indicated in the multifunction display: 9 Basic service (A) ´ Extended service (B) i Vehicles equipped with FSS (Flexible Service System) only (Canada vehicles): The interval between services depends on your driving habits. A gentle driving style, moderate engine speeds and the avoidance of short-distance trips will lengthen the interval between services. Clearing the maintenance service indicator The maintenance service indicator is automatically cleared after 30 seconds when you switch on the ignition or when reaching the maintenance service threshold while driving. You can also clear it yourself.  Press reset button J ( page 25) in the instrument cluster. Maintenance service term exceeded If you have exceeded the suggested maintenance service term, you will see the following message in the multifunction display: SERVICE A EXCEEDED BY XXXX MILES (KM) SERVICE A EXCEEDED BY XXX DAYS SERVICE A EXCEEDED BY X DAY In addition, a signal sounds when the message appears. Any authorized Maybach Studio will reset the maintenance service indicator following a completed maintenance service. 373 Operation Maintenance Calling up the maintenance service indicator  Switch on ignition ( page 54). The standard display of the control system appears ( page 157).  Press button k or j on the mul- tifunction steering wheel until the maintenance service indicator with the service symbol 9 or ´ and the service deadline appear in the multifunction display. i If the battery is disconnected, the days of disconnection will not be included in the count shown by the maintenance service indicator. To arrive at the true maintenance service deadline, you will need to subtract these days from the days shown in the maintenance service indicator. Do not confuse the maintenance service indicator with the engine oil level indicator :. 374 Resetting the maintenance service indicator In the event that the maintenance service on your vehicle is not carried out by an authorized Maybach Studio, you can have the maintenance service indicator reset. The automotive maintenance facility carrying out the maintenance service will find the information for resetting the maintenance service indicator in the maintenance-relevant information for your vehicle. Such information is available from either your authorized Maybach Studio or directly from Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. i If the maintenance service indicator was inadvertently reset, have an authorized Maybach Studio correct it. Only reset if the proper maintenance service has been performed. Resetting the system without performing the proper service as called for by the maintenance service indicator will result in engine damage and/or other vehicle damage not covered by the Maybach Limited Warranty. Operation Vehicle care  Vehicle care To avoid paint damage, you should immediately remove: Cleaning and care of vehicle Warning! G Many cleaning products can be hazardous. Some are poisonous, others are flammable. Always follow the instructions on the particular container. Always open your vehicle’s doors or windows when cleaning the inside. Never use fluids or solvents that are not designed for cleaning your vehicle. While in operation, even while parked, your vehicle is subjected to varying external influences which, if gone unchecked, can attack the paintwork as well as the underbody and cause lasting damage. Such damage is caused not only by extreme and varying climatic conditions, but also by:
Air pollution
Road salt
Tar
Gravel and stone chipping
Grease and oil
Fuel
Coolant
Brake fluid
Bird droppings
Insects
Tree resins, etc. Frequent washing reduces and/or eliminates the aggressiveness and potency of the above adverse influences. More frequent washings are necessary to deal with unfavorable conditions:
near the ocean
in industrial areas (smoke, exhaust emissions)
during winter operation You should check your vehicle from time to time for stone chipping or other damage. Any damage should be repaired as soon as possible to prevent corrosion. In doing so, do not neglect the underbody of the vehicle. A prerequisite for a thorough check is a washing of the underbody followed by a thorough inspection. Damaged areas need to be re-undercoated. Your vehicle has been treated at the factory with a wax-base rustproofing in the body cavities which will last for the lifetime of the vehicle. Post-production treatment is neither necessary nor recommended by us for use on Maybach vehicles because of the possibility of incompatibility between materials used in the production process and others applied later. We have selected car-care products and compiled recommendations which are specially matched to our vehicles and which always reflect the latest technology. You can obtain car-care products approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles at an authorized Maybach Studio. 375 Operation Vehicle care Scratches, corrosive deposits, corrosion or damage due to negligent or incorrect care cannot always be removed or repaired with the car-care products recommended here. In such cases it is best to seek aid at an authorized Maybach Studio. The following topics deal with the cleaning and care of your vehicle and give important "how-to" information as well as references to car-care products approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles. Refrigerator** Clean out the refrigerator regularly with a vinegar-and-water solution. Mix the solution in a ratio of 1 part vinegar to 10 parts water. Allow the refrigerator to dry before using it again. Power-wash Tar stains When using a power-wash for cleaning the vehicle, always observe the manufacturer’s operating instructions. Quickly remove tar stains before they dry and become more difficult to remove. A tar remover is recommended. i Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO**: If an outside door handle is hit by a strong jet of water, and a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** is in close proximity, i.e. within approximately 3 ft (approximately 1 m), the vehicle could be inadvertently locked or unlocked. ! Never use a round nozzle to power-wash tires. The intense jet of water can result in damage to the tire. Always replace a damaged tire. Always keep the jet of water moving across the surface. Do not aim directly at electrical parts, electrical connectors, seals, or other rubber parts. 376 Paintwork, painted body components Paint Care approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles should be applied when water drops on the paint surface do not "bead up", normally every three to five months, depending on climate and washing detergent used. Paint Cleaner approved for use on Maybach vehicles should be applied if the paint surface shows signs of embedded dirt (i.e. loss of gloss). Do not apply any of these products or wax if your vehicle is parked in the sun or if the hood is still hot. Use the appropriate Touch-Up Stick approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles for quick and provisional repairs of minor paint damage (i.e. chips from stones, vehicle doors, etc.). Operation Vehicle care Engine cleaning Prior to cleaning the engine compartment make sure to protect electrical components and connectors from contact with water and cleaning agents. Corrosion protection, such as Anti-corrosion Wax approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles, should be applied to the engine compartment after every engine cleaning. Before applying, all control linkage bushings and joints should be lubricated. The poly-V-belt and all pulleys should be protected from any wax. Rinse with clear water and thoroughly dry with a chamois. Do not allow cleaning agents to dry on the finish. Due to the width of the vehicle, fold in exterior rear view mirrors prior to running the vehicle through an automatic car wash to prevent damage to the mirrors. In the winter, thoroughly remove all traces of road salt as soon as possible. When washing the underbody, do not forget to clean the inner sides of the wheels. Vehicle washing i Do not use hot water or wash your vehicle in direct sunlight. Use only a mild car wash detergent, such as Car Shampoo approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO**: Thoroughly spray the vehicle with a diffused jet of water. Direct only a very weak spray towards the ventilation intake. Use plenty of water and rinse the sponge and chamois frequently. Ornamental moldings For regular cleaning and care of very dirty chrome-plated parts, use a chrome cleaner. Headlamps, tail lamps, turn signal lenses Use a mild car wash detergent, such as Car Shampoo approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles, with plenty of water. To prevent scratches, never apply strong force and use only a soft, non-scratchy cloth when cleaning the lenses. Do not attempt to wipe dirty lenses with a dry cloth or sponge. If an outside door handle is hit by a strong jet of water, and a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** is in close proximity, i.e. within approximately 3 ft (approximately 1 m), the vehicle could be inadvertently locked or unlocked. 377 Operation Vehicle care Cleaning the Distronic** system sensor cover i Restart the engine after cleaning sensor cover 1. Cleaning the Parktronic system sensors When using a steam cleaner or powerwash, aim nozzle only briefly from a minimum distance of 12 in (30 cm) at sensors 1. To prevent scratches, never apply strong force and use only a soft, non-scratchy cloth when cleaning the sensor. Do not attempt to wipe dirty sensors with a dry cloth or sponge. Wiper blades ! 1 Distronic system sensor cover  Clean the sensor cover 1 using a mild car wash detergent, such as Car Shampoo approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles with plenty of water and a soft, non-scratchy cloth. To prevent scratches, never apply strong force and use only a soft, non-scratchy cloth when cleaning the sensor cover. Do not attempt to wipe dirty sensors with a dry cloth or sponge. 378 1 Parktronic system sensors  Clean the sensors 1 on the bumpers using a mild car wash detergent, such as Car Shampoo approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles with plenty of water and a soft, non-scratchy cloth. The windshield wipers must be in a vertical position before folding them away from the windshield. They could otherwise damage the hood.  Turn on the wipers and place them in a vertical position. For information on how to place the wipers in a vertical position, see "Replacing wiper blades" ( page 434). Operation Vehicle care Warning! G For safety reasons, switch off wipers and remove SmartKey from starter switch before cleaning the wiper blades, otherwise the wiper motor might suddenly turn on and cause injury. ! Window cleaning ! The windshield wipers must be in a vertical position before folding them away from the windshield. They could otherwise damage the hood.  Turn on the wipers and place them in  Clean the wiper blade inserts with a clean cloth and detergent solution. ! Fold the windshield wiper arms back onto the windshield before turning the SmartKey in the starter switch. Hold onto the wiper when folding the wiper arm back. If released, the force of the impact from the tensioning spring could crack the windshield. Fold the windshield wiper arms back onto the windshield before turning the SmartKey in the starter switch. Hold onto the wiper when folding the wiper arm back. If released, the force of the impact from the tensioning spring could crack the windshield. a vertical position. For information on how to place the wipers in a vertical position, see "Replacing wiper blades" ( page 434). Warning! G For safety reasons, switch off wipers and remove SmartKey from starter switch before cleaning the windshield, otherwise the wiper motor might suddenly turn on and cause injury.  Use a window cleaning solution on all Light alloy wheels Wheel Care approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles should be used for regular cleaning the light alloy wheels. If possible, clean wheels once a week with Wheel Care approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles, using a soft bristle brush and a strong spray of water. Follow instructions on container. i Use only acid-free cleaning materials. Acid could lead to corrosion. glass surfaces. An automotive glass cleaner is recommended. 379 Operation Vehicle care  Press button 2. Instrument cluster Cup holder Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a washing solution. Wipe with a cloth moistened in lukewarm solution. Do not use scouring agents. Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a washing solution. Wipe with a cloth moistened in lukewarm solution. Do not use scouring agents. Steering wheel and gear selector lever Rear cup holder/bottle holder  Push the cover plate back. Wipe with a damp cloth and dry thoroughly or clean with Leather Care approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles. For cleaning purposes, you can push back the cover plate of the cup holder.  After cleaning, close the cup/bottle The cup holder opens.  Push one of the release catches 3 upward and, at the same time, press release catch 1 for the cup/bottle holder. holder. The next time the holder is opened, the cover plate slides out with it. Carpet Hard plastic trim items Carpet and Fabric Care approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles should be used for cleaning of carpets in your vehicle. Pour Interior Care approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles onto a soft lint-free cloth and apply with light pressure. Roof lining Example illustration of Maybach 57 1 2 3 4 380 Release catch for cup/bottle holder Release catch for cup holder Release catch for cover plate Cover plate Clean with a soft bristle brush, or use a dry-shampoo cleaner in case of excessive dirt. Operation Vehicle care Seat belts Nubuck leather The webbing must not be treated with chemical cleaning agents. Use only clear, lukewarm water and soap. Do not dry the webbing at temperatures above 176°F (80°C) or in direct sunlight. Although Nubuck leather is treated with a protective coating, it is a delicate leather. Wipe Nubuck leather with a damp microfiber cloth to remove dust and other light stains. Carefully dab Nubuck leather with a dry microfiber cloth to remove oil stains. Warning! G Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may severely weaken them. In a crash they may not be able to provide adequate protection. Leather upholstery Wearing clothing that has the tendency to give off coloring (e.g. when wet, etc.) may cause the upholstery to become permanently discolored. By lining the seats with a proper intermediate cover, contact-discoloration will be prevented. Wipe leather upholstery with a damp cloth and dry thoroughly or clean with Leather Care approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles. Exercise particular care when cleaning perforated leather as its underside should not become wet. Do not attempt to remove ballpoint ink stains. We recommend allowing the ink to migrate into the leather (which could take as long as a few weeks); the migration process will increase the chances of the ink stain becoming less apparent over time. Attempting to remove ballpoint ink may damage the protective coating and/or may leave a permanent visible mark. If in doubt about cleaning any Nubuck stain, please consult your Maybach Studio for assistance. Plastic and rubber parts Do not use oil or wax on these parts. Wood trims Dampen cloth using water and use damp cloth to clean wood trims in your vehicle. Do not use solvents like tar remover or wheel cleaner nor polishes or waxes as they may be abrasive. ! Do not use Leather Care approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles on Nubuck leather or any solvents to clean Nubuck leather. Avoid hard scrubbing on nubuck leather. 381 Operation Vehicle care  Press and pull both switches until you Electrotransparent roof* You can lower the inside panel of the electrotransparent roof. Warning! G Make sure no passengers are sitting in the rear passenger compartment when the inside panel of the electrotransparent roof is being lowered. The passengers could otherwise be injured by the panel. see the message ROOF INSIDE PANEL UNLOCKED or PRIVALITE ROOF UNLOCKED appear in the multifunction display.  Push the switch for the electrotrans- parent roof on the overhead control panel forward (to open the screen). The inside panel of the electrotransparent roof is lowered and the screen is opened. !  Switch on ignition ( page 54). Make sure the rear passenger compartment is empty and that the inside panel does not come into contact with any objects left in the rear compartment. and that the gear selector lever is in position P.  Pull the switch for the electrotrans- parent roof on the overhead control panel backward (to close the screen) ( page 230). At the same time, push the switch for the rear interior lighting ( page 148). 382 Do not clean the screen! Allow the cleaned surfaces to dry before closing the electrotransparent roof. The inside panel is unlocked. Lowering the inside panel  Make sure the vehicle is stationary ! Do not lean against the lowered inside panel.  You can clean the glass panels with a commercially available glass cleaner and a moist cloth. Closing the inside panel  After cleaning, pull the switch for the electrotransparent roof on the overhead control panel backward (to close the screen) until the screen is completely closed.  Push the inside panel upward until it engages.  The message disappears from the multifunction display.  Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 0. Warning! G No passengers may ride in the rear passenger compartment if the inside panel has not been or cannot be locked. Have the inside panel repaired immediately by an authorized Maybach Studio. Practical hints What to do if … Where will I find ...? Unlocking/locking in an emergency Opening/closing in an emergency Pocket PC* Replacing SmartKey batteries Replacing bulbs Replacing wiper blades Flat tire Batteries Jump starting Towing the vehicle Fuses 383 Practical hints What to do if … Lamps in instrument cluster Problem v v General information: Possible cause The yellow ABS/ESP The ESP is deactivated. warning lamp comes on Risk of accident! while driving. Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road, weather and traffic conditions. The yellow ABS/ESP warning lamp flashes while driving. The ESP, ABS or traction control has come into operation because of detected traction loss in at least one tire. Distronic** is deactivated. If a lamp in the instrument cluster fails to come on during the lamp self-check when switching on ignition, have it checked and replaced if necessary. Suggested solution  Turn the ESP back on ( page 100). If the ESP cannot be turned back on, have the system checked at an authorized Maybach Studio as soon as possible.  When driving off, apply as little throt- tle as possible.  While driving, ease up on the acceler- ator.  Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road and weather conditions.  Do not deactivate the ESP - exceptions ( page 99). Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident. 384 Practical hints What to do if … Problem Possible cause Suggested solution l The red distance warn- You are too close to the vehicle in front of  Apply the brakes immediately to ining lamp comes on while you to maintain selected speed. crease the following distance. driving. l The red distance warn-
You are gaining too rapidly on the vehi-  Apply the brakes immediately. ing lamp comes on while cle ahead of you.  Carefully observe the traffic situation. driving and you hear a
The distance warning system has recogYou may need to brake or maneuver warning sound. to avoid hitting an obstacle. nized a stationary obstacle on your probable line of travel. - The yellow ABS indicator The ABS has detected a malfunction and  Continue driving with added caution. lamp comes on while has switched off. The BAS and the ESP are Wheels may lock during hard braking, driving. also switched off (see messages in display). reducing steering capability. The brake system is still functioning normally but without the ABS available.  Have the system checked at an autho- The charging voltage has fallen below 10 volts and the ABS has switched off.  When the voltage is above this value rized Maybach Studio as soon as possible. If the ABS control unit is malfunctioning, Failure to follow these instructions inother systems such as Parktronic, Distronic**, the navigation system and the creases the risk of an accident. automatic transmission can also malfunction. again, the ABS is operational again.  If necessary, have the generator and battery checked. 385 Practical hints What to do if … Problem < H Possible cause The red seat belt telltale The telltale reminds you to fasten seat illuminates for a brief belts. period after starting the engine. The yellow warning lamp for the tire pressure monitor comes on. Suggested solution  Fasten your seat belt. The telltale goes out. The tire pressure monitor detects a rapid or  Bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding significant loss of pressure in at least one abrupt steering and braking maneutire. vers. Observe the traffic situation around you.  Take note of the messages in the mul- tifunction display. Warning! G When the tire pressure monitoring system warning lamp is lit, one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. You should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure as indicated on the vehicle’s tire information placard. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. 386 Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. Each tire, including the spare, should be checked monthly when cold and set to the recommended inflation pressure as specified in the vehicle placard and owner’s manual. i The recommended tire inflation pressure for your vehicle can be found on the inside of the fuel filler flap, not in the owner’s manual. Practical hints What to do if … Problem 1 Warning! Possible cause The red SRS indicator lamp comes on while driving. Suggested solution There is a malfunction in the restraint sys-  Drive with added caution to the neartems. The airbags or emergency tensioning est authorized Maybach Studio. devices (ETDs) could deploy unexpectedly or fail to activate in an accident. G In the event that a malfunction of the SRS is indicated as outlined above, the SRS may not be operational. For your safety, we strongly recommend that you visit an authorized Maybach Studio immediately to have the system checked; otherwise the SRS may not be activated when needed in an accident, which could result in serious or fatal injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily which could result in an accident and/or injury to you or to others. 387 Practical hints What to do if … Problem Possible cause ; You are driving with the parking brake set.  Release the parking brake. (USA only) There is a malfunction in the SBC brake sys-  Read and observe the message in the tem. display. The red brake warning lamp comes on while driving and you hear a 3 (Canada only) warning sound. Warning! G Driving with the brake warning lamp illuminated can result in an accident. Have your brake system checked immediately if the brake warning lamp stays on. Do not add brake fluid before checking the brake system. Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire. You can be seriously burned. 388 Suggested solution There is insufficient brake fluid in the reser-  Risk of accident! Carefully stop the vehicle and notify an authorized voir. Maybach Studio. Do not add brake fluid! This will not solve the problem. ! If you find that the brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or below, have the brake system checked for brake pad thickness and leaks. Practical hints What to do if … Problem ? (USA only) ± (Canada only) Possible cause The yellow engine mal- There is a malfunction in: function indicator lamp
The fuel management system comes on while driving.
The ignition system
The emission control system
Systems which affect emissions Such malfunctions may result in excessive emissions values and may switch the engine to its emergency operation mode. Your gas tank is empty. Suggested solution  Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible by an authorized Maybach Studio. An on-board diagnostic connector is used by the service station to link the vehicle to the shop diagnostics system. It allows the accurate identification of system malfunctions through the readout of diagnostic trouble codes. It is located in the front left area of the footwell next to the parking brake pedal.  After refuelling, start, turn off, and re- start the engine three or four times in succession. The limp home mode is canceled. You do not need to have your vehicle checked. The yellow fuel tank re- The fuel level has dropped below the reserve warning lamp serve mark. comes on while driving.  Refuel at the next gas station ( page 352). 389 Practical hints What to do if … Lamp in center console Problem PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF Possible cause The indicator lamp comes on. A BabySmartTM1 child seat is installed on the front passenger seat. Therefore the passenger front airbag is switched off. The indicator lamp comes on if there is no BabySmartTM child seat installed on the front passenger seat. The system is malfunctioning. The indicator lamp does The system is malfunctioning. not come on with a BabySmartTM child seat properly installed on the front passenger seat. Suggested solution  Have the system checked as soon as possible by an authorized Maybach Studio.  Make sure there is nothing between the seat cushion and the child seat and check installation of the child seat.  If the light remains out, have the sys- tem checked as soon as possible by an authorized Maybach Studio.  Do not use the BabySmartTM restraint to transport children on the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired. 1 BabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens Automotive Corp. 390 Practical hints What to do if … Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display Warning and malfunction messages appear in the multifunction display located in the instrument cluster. Certain warning and malfunction messages are accompanied by an audible signal. Address these messages accordingly and follow the additional instructions given in this Operator’s Manual. Selecting the vehicle status message memory menu in the control system ( page 171) displays both cleared and uncleared messages. High-priority messages appear in the multifunction display with in red color. Certain messages of high priority cannot be cleared from the multifunction display using reset button J ( page 25) in the instrument cluster. Other messages of high priority and messages of less immediate priority can be cleared from the multifunction display using reset button J in the instrument cluster. They are then stored in the vehicle status message memory ( page 171). Remember that clearing a message will only make the message disappear. Clearing a message will not correct the condition that caused the message to appear. Warning! G All categories of messages contain important information which should be taken note of and, where a malfunction is indicated, addressed as soon as possible at an authorized Maybach Studio. Failure to repair condition noted may cause damage not covered by the Maybach Limited Warranty, or result in property damage or personal injury. Warning! G No messages will be displayed if either the instrument cluster or the multifunction display is inoperative. Contact your nearest authorized Maybach Studio. i Switching on the ignition causes all instrument cluster lamps as well as the multifunction display to come on. Make sure the lamps and multifunction display are in working order before starting your journey. On the pages that follow, you will find a compilation of the most important warning and malfunction messages that may appear in the malfunction display. High priority messages appear in red color. 391 Practical hints What to do if … Text messages Display ABS Possible cause MALFUNCTION VISIT WORKSHOP! Possible solution The ABS has detected a malfunction  Continue driving with added caution. and has switched off. The ESP and the Wheels may lock during hard braking, reBAS are also deactivated. ducing steering capability. The SBC brake system is still function-  Have the system checked at an authorized Maybach Studio as soon as possible. ing normally but without the ABS available. Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident. DISPLAY DEFECTIVE VISIT WORKSHOP! The ABS or the ABS display is malfunctioning.  Continue driving with added caution. Wheels may lock during hard braking, reducing steering capability.  Have the system checked at an authorized Maybach Studio as soon as possible. Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident. AIR CLEANER CHANGE CARTRIDGE The air filter is clogged. CONVEN. FUNCTIONS BATTERY PROTECTION: TEMPORARILY SHUT OFF 392  Have the air filter checked by an autho- rized Maybach Studio. VISIT WORKSHOP! The battery for electrical consumers has insufficient voltage and can no longer supply the convenience functions such as seat ventilation*. As soon as the on-board voltage is sufficient, you will see the following message in the multifunction display: NOTE: CONVEN. FUNCTIONS AVAILABLE AGAIN. The electrical consumers are switched on again. Practical hints What to do if … Display DISTRONIC Possible cause Possible solution EXTERNAL MALFUNCTION REACTIVATE Distronic** is switched off and is tem-  Try activating Distronic** again later. porarily unavailable. DRIVE TO WORKSHOP! Distronic** is malfunctioning or the display is malfunctioning. CURRENTLY UNAVAILABLE SEE OPERATORS MANUAL  Visit an authorized Maybach Studio as soon as possible.  Clean if necessary the Distronic** cover in the front bumper ( page 378). the Distronic** cover in the front bumper is dirty.  Restart the vehicle. Distronic** is switched off because:

the functionality is impaired due to heavy rain. Or Distronic** becomes operational again without re-starting the engine if:
dirt comes off during driving (e.g. slush or snow)
the system recognizes full sensor availability (due to lessening rain or the road surface drying)
the message disappears from the multifunction display
you see the speed last stored blink in the display for five seconds. You can now use Distronic** normally. 393 Practical hints What to do if … Display ESP Possible cause Possible solution MALFUNCTION VISIT WORKSHOP! The ESP is deactivated because of a malfunction.  Continue driving with added caution. DISPLAY DEFECTIVE VISIT WORKSHOP! The ESP or the ESP display is malfunc-  Continue driving with added caution. tioning.  Visit an authorized Maybach Studio as soon as possible.  Visit an authorized Maybach Studio as soon as possible. The SBC brake system is still functioning normally but without the ESP Failure to follow these instructions increases available. the risk of accident. The ABS may still be operational. Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident. 394 Practical hints What to do if … Display ESP Possible cause UNAVAILABLE SEE OPERATORS MANUAL Possible solution The ESP is deactivated because of in-  Synchronize the ESP. With the vehicle staterrupted power supply. tionary and the engine running, turn the steering wheel completely to the left and The SBC brake system is still functionthen to the right to synchronize the ESP. ing normally but without the ESP available. If the ESP message does not go out: The ABS may still be operational.  Continue driving with added caution.  Visit an authorized Maybach Studio as soon as possible. Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident. ! When adjusting the ESP, make sure you can turn the steering wheel in both directions as far as it will go without the wheels hitting any objects (e.g. a curb). 395 Practical hints What to do if … Display Possible cause MOVE SELECTOR LEVER TO PARK You have tried to turn off the engine  Place the gear selector lever in position P. with the KEYLESS-GO** start/stop button ( page 55) with the gear selector lever not in P. SRS RESTR. SYS. DEFECT. DRIVE TO WORKSHOP! The system is malfunctioning. MALFUNCTION DRIVE TO WORKSHOP! One or more main functions of the Tele Aid system are malfunctioning. TELE AID 396 Possible solution  Drive with added caution to the nearest authorized Maybach Studio.  Have the Tele Aid system checked by an au- thorized Maybach Studio. Practical hints What to do if … Symbol messages Display P AIRMATIC STOP, CAR TOO LOW! Possible cause Possible solution The vehicle level is too low.  Wait until the vehicle level has been adjusted. The message then disappears. The vehicle level control is malfunctioning. In addition, the following message appears: AIRMATIC VISIT WORKSHOP!  Stop and press the vehicle level control button to select a higher vehicle level ( page 248).  Do not turn steering wheel too far to avoid damaging the front fenders.  Listen for scraping noises.  Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).  Visit a service center as soon as pos- sible. Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident. AIRMATIC VISIT WORKSHOP! The Airmatic system has only limited op-  Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph eration. (80 km/h). The display for Airmatic or the Airmatic system itself is malfunctioning. AIRMATIC LEVEL CANCELLED!  Visit a service center as soon as pos- sible. At speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h), the  Reactivate the "Raised Level" set"Raised Level" setting is canceled. ting. 397 Practical hints What to do if … Display # Possible cause BATTERY CHARGE STOP VEHICLE Possible solution The battery, the alternator or the electri-  Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe cal system control unit is malfunctioning. to do so. Adjust driving to be consistent with reduced braking reThe SBC brake system requires electrical sponsiveness. energy and therefore has only limited  Notify an authorized Maybach operation. Considerably greater brake Studio. pedal force is required and the stopping distance is increased. Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of accident.  Read and observe the additional messages about the SBC brake system in the display. 398 Practical hints What to do if … Display # BATTERY CHARGE VISIT WORKSHOP! Possible cause Possible solution The battery is no longer charging.  Stop immediately and check the Possible causes: poly-V-belt.
alternator malfunctioning If it is broken:
broken poly-V-belt  Do not continue to drive. Other- Do not forget that the brake system requires electrical energy and may be operating with restricted capability. Considerably greater brake pedal force is required and the stopping distance is longer. wise the engine will overheat due to an inoperative water pump which may result in damage to the engine. Notify an authorized Maybach Studio. If it is intact:  Drive immediately to the near- est authorized Maybach Studio. Adapt driving to be consistent with reduced braking responsiveness.  Read and observe the additional messages about the SBC brake system in the display. ! PARKING BRAKE RELEASE BRAKE! You are driving with the parking brake engaged.  Release the parking brake ( page 68). 399 Practical hints What to do if … Display Possible cause Possible solution 2 BRAKE PAD WEAR VISIT WORKSHOP! The brake pads have reached their wear  Have the brake pads replaced as limit. soon as possible at an authorized Maybach Studio. T BRAKE MALFUNCTION STOP VEHICLE The SBC brake system is in the emergency  Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe operation mode. Considerably greater to do so. brake pedal force is required and the  Do not drive any further. stopping distance is increased.  Prevent the vehicle from rolling The maximum speed is limited to 55 mph away by blocking wheels with (90 km/h). wheel chocks or other sizable, heavy objects ( page 437).  Call for Roadside Assistance. ; (USA only) BRAKE FLUID VISIT WORKSHOP! 3 (Canada only) There is insufficient brake fluid in the res-  Risk of accident! Stop the vehicle ervoir. and notify an authorized Maybach Studio. Do not add brake fluid! This will not solve the problem. Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of accident. i ! If you find that the brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or below, have the brake system checked for brake pad thickness and leaks. Brake pad thickness must be visually checked by a qualified technician at the intervals specified in the Maintenance Booklet. 400 Practical hints What to do if … Display ; (USA only) 3 (Canada only) REDUCED BRAKE PERF. START ENGINE INCR. STOPPING DIST. START ENGINE REDUCED BRAKE PERF. VISIT WORKSHOP! INCR. STOPPING DIST. VISIT WORKSHOP! Possible cause Possible solution The battery has insufficient voltage and cannot supply sufficient power to the SBC brake system.  Start the engine. The message disappears when sufficient voltage is available. The SBC brake system is in the emergency  Continue driving with added cauoperation mode. Considerable brake tion. pedal force is required and the stopping  Adjust driving to be consistent with distance is increased. reduced braking responsiveness.  Drive immediately to the nearest authorized Maybach Studio. BRAKES OVERHEATED DRIVE CAREFULLY! The brake system is overheated due to an  Relieve the load on the brake sysexcessive load on the brakes. tem.  Drive more smoothly and think ahead to avoid unnecessary braking.  When driving down slopes, shift into a lower gear to use the engine’s braking power ( page 187).  Cautiously continue driving so that the air stream will cool down the brakes. SERVICE BRAKE VISIT WORKSHOP! There are malfunctions, but the SBC brake system is operating normally.  Visit an authorized Maybach Studio as soon as possible.  401 Practical hints What to do if …  Warning! G Driving while these messages are displayed can result in an accident. Have your brake system checked immediately. If there is a malfunction in the SBC brake system, we recommend that the vehicle be transported with all wheels off the ground using flatbed or appropriate wheel lift/dolly equipment. A tow bar must be used if circumstances do not permit the use of the recommended towing methods and the vehicle requires towing with all four wheels on the ground. Towing the vehicle with all four wheels on the ground is only permissible for distances up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a speed not to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). For more information, refer to "Towing the vehicle" ( page 447). 402 If the SBC brake system enters its emergency operation mode, the driver must apply significantly greater brake pedal pressure and depress the pedal much further than normal to obtain braking effect. If necessary, apply full pressure to the brake pedal. Brakes are only applied to the front wheels. Stopping distance is increased! Low brake fluid in the reservoir may cause the braking system to fail! Don’t add brake fluid before checking the brake system. Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire. You can be seriously burned. Warning! G Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide, and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness and lead to death. Do not run the engine in confined areas (such as a garage) which are not properly ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas fumes are entering the vehicle while driving, have the cause determined and corrected immediately. If you must drive under these conditions, drive with at least one window fully open. Practical hints What to do if … Display B COOLANT CHECK LEVEL! Possible cause Possible solution The coolant level is too low.  Add coolant ( page 360).  If you have to add coolant fre- quently, have the cooling system checked by an authorized Maybach Studio. Warning! G Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts. Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may burn if it comes into contact with hot engine parts. You can be seriously burned. ! Do not ignore the low engine coolant level warning. Extended driving with the message and symbol displayed may cause serious engine damage not covered by the Maybach Limited Warranty. Do not drive without a sufficient amount of coolant in the cooling system. The engine will overheat, causing major engine damage. 403 Practical hints What to do if … Display Ï COOLANT VISIT WORKSHOP! Possible cause Possible solution The cooling fan for the coolant is malfunctioning.  Observe the coolant temperature gauge ( page 154).  Have the fan replaced as soon as possible. COOLANT STOP, ENGINE OFF The coolant is too hot.  Stop the vehicle and turn off the engine.  Only start the engine again after the message disappears. You could otherwise damage the engine. Warning! G Driving when your engine is badly overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. You could be seriously burned. Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns and can occur just by opening the engine hood. Stay away from 404 the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it. Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until the engine has cooled down. During severe operating conditions, e.g. stop-and-go traffic, the coolant temperature may rise close to approximately 248°F (120°C). ! The engine should not be operated with the coolant temperature above 248°F (120°C). Doing so may cause serious engine damage which is not covered by the Maybach Limited Warranty. Practical hints What to do if … Display Ï COOLANT STOP, ENGINE OFF Possible cause Possible solution The poly-V-belt could be broken.  Stop immediately and check the poly-V-belt. If it is broken:  Do not continue to drive. Other- wise the engine will overheat due to an inoperative water pump which may result in damage to the engine.  Notify an authorized Maybach Studio. If it is intact:  Restart the engine only after the message disappears from the multifunction display. Doing so could result in serious engine damage that is not covered by the Maybach Limited Warranty.  Observe the coolant temperature gauge ( page 154).  Drive immediately to the nearest authorized Maybach Studio. Adjust driving to be consistent with reduced braking responsiveness. 405 Practical hints What to do if … Display Î ± G 406 Possible cause Possible solution CRUISE CONTROL DRIVE TO WORKSHOP! Cruise control or Distronic** is malfunctioning.  Have cruise control or Distronic** DISPLAY DEFECTIVE VISIT WORKSHOP! Certain electronic systems are unable to relay information to the control system. The following systems may have failed:  Have the electronic systems DISPLAY DEFECTIVE VISIT WORKSHOP!
Coolant temperature display
Tachometer
Cruise control display checked by an authorized Maybach Studio. checked by an authorized Maybach Studio. The displays for several systems have mal-  Continue driving with added caufunctioned. Some systems themselves tion. may also have malfunctioned.  Visit an authorized Maybach Studio as soon as possible. Practical hints What to do if … Display Possible cause Possible solution V DOOR OPEN You are attempting to drive with one or  Close the doors. more doors open. ? VISIT WORKSHOP! There may be a malfunction in the: : ENGINE OIL LEVEL STOP, ENGINE OFF
Fuel injection system
Ignition system
Exhaust system
Fuel system There is no oil in the engine. There is a danger of engine damage.  Visit an authorized Maybach Studio as soon as possible.  Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt as soon as possible.  Turn off the engine.  Add engine oil. ENGINE OIL LEVEL VISIT WORKSHOP! The measuring system is malfunctioning.  Have the measuring system checked by an authorized Maybach Studio. 407 Practical hints What to do if … Display : ADD 1.0 QT. OIL AT FILLING STATION Possible cause Possible solution The engine oil level is too low.  Add engine oil ( page 359) and check the engine oil level ( page 357). (Canada: 1 LITER) ENGINE OIL LEVEL REDUCE OIL LEVEL You have added too much engine oil.  Have oil siphoned or drained off. There is a risk of damaging the engine or Observe all legal requirements with the catalytic converter. respect to its disposal. ENGINE OIL VISIT WORKSHOP! The engine oil has dropped to a critical level.  Check the engine oil level ( page 356) and add oil as re- quired.  If you must add engine oil fre- quently, have the engine checked for possible leaks. There is water in the oil. When the ADD 1.0 QT. OIL AT FILLING STATION (Canada: 1 LITER) message appears while the engine is running and at operating temperature, the engine oil level has dropped to approximately the minimum level. 408 When this occurs, the warning will first come on intermittently and then stay on if the oil level drops further. If no oil leaks are noted, continue to drive to the nearest service station where the engine oil should be topped to the required level with an approved oil specified in the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet.  Have the oil checked. ! The engine oil level warnings should not be ignored. Extended driving with the symbol displayed could result in serious engine damage that is not covered by the Maybach Limited Warranty. Practical hints What to do if … Display _ Possible cause ENTRANCE POSITION DO NOT DRIVE Possible solution Seat, mirrors and steering wheel have  Wait until the seat, mirrors and not yet moved to their preset driving posteering wheel have moved to their sitions. driving positions. The message will disappear. Y F HOOD OPEN! You are driving with the hood open.  Close the hood ( page 355). KEY CHECK BATTERY The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** batteries are discharged.  Change the batteries ( page 429). KEY NOT RECOGNIZED The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** is not  Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe recognized while the engine is running to do so. because  Search for the SmartKey with
the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** is KEYLESS-GO**. not in the vehicle Otherwise the vehicle cannot be centrally locked nor can the engine
there is strong radio-frequency interbe started again after the engine is ference stopped. KEY NOT RECOGNIZED The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** is mo-  Change the position of the mentarily not recognized. SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** in the vehicle.  Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** in the starter switch if necessary. KEY STILL IN VEHICLE The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** left in  Take the SmartKey with the vehicle was recognized while locking KEYLESS-GO** out of the vehicle. the vehicle from the outside. 409 Practical hints What to do if … Display F . Possible cause Possible solution AUTOM. LIGHT ON REMOVE KEY! SmartKey in starter switch position 1 or 2.  Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch. REMOVE KEY! You have forgotten to remove the SmartKey.  Remove the SmartKey from the REPLACE KEY DRIVE TO WORKSHOP! The SmartKey is malfunctioning.  Visit an authorized Maybach Studio LIGHT SENSOR DRIVE TO WORKSHOP! The lamp sensor is malfunctioning. The headlamps switch on automatically. starter switch. as soon as possible.  In the control system, set lamp operation to manual ( page 177).  Switch on headlamps using the ex- terior lamp switch.  Visit an authorized Maybach Studio as soon as possible. 410  Visit an authorized Maybach Studio STOP LAMP VISIT WORKSHOP! Brake lamp illumination is delayed or lamp is permanently on. DISPLAY DEFECTIVE VISIT WORKSHOP! The display for the lamps or the system is  Visit an authorized Maybach Studio malfunctioning. as soon as possible. TURN OFF LIGHTS Lamps have been turned on although the  Turn the exterior lamp switch SmartKey in the starter switch is in to M ( page 143). position 0. MIRROR TURN SIG., L CHECK LIGHT The left turn signal in the side mirror is malfunctioning. This message will only appear if all light emitting diodes have stopped working. as soon as possible.  Visit an authorized Maybach Studio as soon as possible. Practical hints What to do if … Display . Possible cause Possible solution MIRROR TURN SIG., R CHECK LIGHT The right turn signal in the side mirror is  Visit an authorized Maybach Studio malfunctioning. This message will only as soon as possible. appear if all light emitting diodes have stopped working. FRONT TURN SIGNAL, L SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON! The left front turn signal lamp is malfunc-  Replace the bulb as soon as possible tioning. A substitute bulb is being used. or visit an authorized Maybach Studio as soon as possible. FRONT TURN SIGNAL, R SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON! The right front turn signal lamp is malfunctioning. A substitute bulb is being used.  Replace the bulb as soon as possible HIGH BEAM, LEFT CHECK LIGHT The left high beam flasher lamp is malfunctioning.  Replace the bulb as soon as possible HIGH BEAM, RIGHT CHECK LIGHT The right high beam flasher lamp is mal-  Replace the bulb as soon as possible functioning. or visit an authorized Maybach Studio as soon as possible. MARKER LIGHT, FL CHECK LIGHT The left front side marker lamp is malfunctioning.  Replace the bulb as soon as possible MARKER LIGHT, FR CHECK LIGHT The right front side marker lamp is malfunctioning.  Replace the bulb as soon as possible or visit an authorized Maybach Studio as soon as possible. or visit an authorized Maybach Studio as soon as possible. or visit an authorized Maybach Studio as soon as possible. or visit an authorized Maybach Studio as soon as possible. 411 Practical hints What to do if … Display . 412 Possible cause Possible solution STANDING LIGHT, L SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON! The left parking lamps are malfunctioning. A substitute bulb is being used.  Replace the bulb as soon as possible STANDING LIGHT, R SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON! The right parking lamps are malfunction-  Replace the bulb as soon as possible ing. A substitute bulb is being used. or visit an authorized Maybach Studio as soon as possible. FRONT FOGLAMP, LEFT CHECK LIGHT The left front fog lamp is malfunctioning.  Replace the bulb as soon as possible or visit an authorized Maybach Studio as soon as possible. FRONT FOGLAMP, RIGHT CHECK LIGHT The right front fog lamp is malfunction-  Replace the bulb as soon as possible ing. or visit an authorized Maybach Studio as soon as possible. LOW BEAM, LEFT CHECK LIGHT The left low beam lamp is malfunctioning. LOW BEAM, RIGHT CHECK LIGHT The right low beam lamp is malfunction-  Visit an authorized Maybach Studio ing. as soon as possible. 3RD BRAKE LIGHT CHECK LIGHT The high mounted brake lamp is malfunctioning. BRAKE LIGHT LEFT SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON! The left brake lamp is malfunctioning. A  Visit an authorized Maybach Studio substitute bulb is being used. as soon as possible. BRAKE LIGHT RIGHT SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON! The right brake lamp is malfunctioning. A substitute bulb is being used. or visit an authorized Maybach Studio as soon as possible.  Visit an authorized Maybach Studio as soon as possible.  Visit an authorized Maybach Studio as soon as possible.  Visit an authorized Maybach Studio as soon as possible. Practical hints What to do if … Display . Possible cause Possible solution REVERSE LIGHT, LEFT CHECK LIGHT The left reverse lamp is malfunctioning.  Visit an authorized Maybach Studio REVERSE LIGHT, RIGHT CHECK LIGHT The right reverse lamp is malfunctioning.  Visit an authorized Maybach Studio as soon as possible. REAR FOGLIGHT CHECK LIGHT The rear fog lamp is malfunctioning. LICENSE PLATE L, L CHECK LIGHT The left license plate lamp is malfunctioning.  Replace the bulb as soon as possible LICENSE PLATE L, R CHECK LIGHT The right license plate lamp is malfunctioning.  Replace the bulb as soon as possible TAIL LIGHT, LEFT SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON! The left tail lamp is malfunctioning. A substitute bulb is being used.  Visit an authorized Maybach Studio TAIL LIGHT, RIGHT SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON! The right tail lamp is malfunctioning. A substitute bulb is being used.  Visit an authorized Maybach Studio REAR TURN SIGNAL, L SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON! The left rear turn signal lamp is malfunc-  Visit an authorized Maybach Studio tioning. A substitute bulb is being used. as soon as possible. REAR TURN SIGNAL, R SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON! The right rear turn signal lamp is malfunctioning. A substitute bulb is being used. as soon as possible.  Visit an authorized Maybach Studio as soon as possible. or visit an authorized Maybach Studio as soon as possible. or visit an authorized Maybach Studio as soon as possible. as soon as possible. as soon as possible.  Visit an authorized Maybach Studio as soon as possible. 413 Practical hints What to do if … Display < K 414 Possible cause Possible solution SEAT BELT SYSTEM DRIVE TO WORKSHOP! The seat belt system is malfunctioning.  Visit an authorized Maybach Studio CLOSE SUNROOF! You have opened the driver’s door with the SmartKey removed from the starter switch and the tilt/sliding sunroof open. as soon as possible.  Close the tilt/sliding sunroof ( page 222). Practical hints What to do if … Display Possible cause Possible solution CLOSE SUNROOF! You have opened the driver’s door with the SmartKey removed from the starter switch and the tilt/sliding sunroof open.  Close the tilt/sliding sunroof ( page 222) _ STEERING GEAR OIL CHECK The steering oil has dropped to a critical  Visit an authorized Maybach Studio level. as soon as possible. L TELE AID BATTERY DRIVE TO WORKSHOP! The emergency power battery for the  Have the Tele Aid system checked Tele Aid system is malfunctioning. If the by an authorized Maybach Studio. vehicle battery is also discharged, Tele Aid will not be operational. TELE AID NOT ACTIVATED You do not have a Tele Aid service contract or you have not extended your existing one. TANK OPEN! CHECK FILLER CAP! A loss of pressure has been detected in  Check the fuel cap ( page 352). the fuel system. The fuel cap may not be If it is not closed properly: closed properly or the fuel system may be  Close the fuel cap. leaky. If it is closed properly: J A  Obtain a Tele Aid service contract or have your existing one extended in an authorized Maybach Studio.  Have the fuel system checked by an authorized Maybach Studio. Ê TRUNK OPEN This message will appear whenever the trunk lid is open.  Close the trunk lid. W WASHER FLUID CHECK LEVEL! The fluid level has dropped to about 1/3 of total reservoir capacity.  Add washer fluid ( page 362). 415 Practical hints What to do if … Tire pressure messages Display 50 MPH Canada: LIMIT TIRE FAILURE Possible cause Possible solution The maximum speed is limited to 50 mph (80 km/h).  Pull over immediately. Change the wheel ( page 436). There was a tire pressure warning message.  Reactivate the tire pressure monitor after 80 KM/H TIRE PRES. MONITOR REACTIVATE AFTER CORRECTING PRESSURE The yellow warning lamp for the tire pressure monitor lights up and you have not reactivated the system since the last tire pressure check. TIRE PRESSURE DISPLAY ONLY AVAILABLE WHEN IGNITION IS ON! Warning! G Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. 416 correcting the tire pressure values ( page 367).  Switch on the ignition. You may lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire. Practical hints What to do if … Display Possible cause TIRE PRES. MONITOR REACTIVATED The tire pressure monitor is using the current pressure values as the basis for monitoring. TIRE PRES. MONITOR CURRENTLY UNAVAILABLE The tire pressure monitor is temporarily inoperative because  Remove the additional wheel sen-
an additional wheel sensor is in the vehicle
the maximum temperature of the wheel sensor has been exceeded As soon as the causes of the malfunction have been removed, the tire pressure monitor automatically becomes active again.
a radio source is causing interference
unrecognized wheel sensors are installed TIRE PRES. MONITOR NOT OPERATIONAL Warning! G Possible solution sor from the vehicle The tire pressure monitor or the wheel sensor is malfunctioning.  Have the tire inflation pressure A wheel without proper sensor was installed.  Have the wheels checked. monitor checked by an authorized Maybach Studio. You may lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire. Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. 417 Practical hints What to do if … Display H Possible cause Possible solution TIRE PRESSURE PLEASE CORRECT The pressure is low in one or more tires.  Check and correct tire pressure as required ( page 364). TIRE PRESSURE CAUTION TIRE DEFECT! One or more tires is deflating.  Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt steering and braking maneuvers. Carefully observe the traffic situation.  Repair or change the wheel ( page 436). One or more tires is deflating. TIRE PRESSURE CHECK TIRES!  Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt steering and braking maneuvers. Carefully observe the traffic situation.  Repair or change the wheel ( page 436). Warning! G Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You may lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire. 418 Practical hints What to do if … Display H TIRE PRES., LF CAUTION TIRE DEFECT! Possible cause Possible solution The left front tire is deflating.  Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt steering and braking maneuvers. Carefully observe the traffic situation.  Repair or change the wheel ( page 436). The left front tire pressure is low. TIRE PRES., LF CHECK TIRES!  Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt and observe the traffic situation.  Check the tire.  Check and correct tire pressure as required. TIRE PRES., RF CAUTION TIRE DEFECT! The right front tire is deflating.  Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt steering and braking maneuvers and observe the traffic situation.  Repair or change the wheel ( page 436). Warning! G You may lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire. Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. 419 Practical hints What to do if … Display H TIRE PRES., RF CHECK TIRES! Possible cause Possible solution The right front tire pressure is low.  Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt and observe the traffic situation.  Check the tire.  Check and correct tire pressure as required. TIRE PRES., LR CAUTION TIRE DEFECT! The left rear tire is deflating.  Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt steering and braking maneuvers. Carefully observe the traffic situation.  Repair or change the wheel ( page 436). The left rear tire pressure is low. TIRE PRES., LR CHECK TIRES!  Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt and observe the traffic situation.  Check the tire.  Check and correct tire pressure as required. Warning! G Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. 420 You may lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire. Practical hints What to do if … Display H TIRE PRES., RR CAUTION TIRE DEFECT! Possible cause Possible solution The right rear tire is deflating.  Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt steering and braking maneuvers. Carefully observe the traffic situation.  Repair or change the wheel ( page 436). The right rear tire pressure is low. TIRE PRES., RR CHECK TIRES!  Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt and observe the traffic situation.  Check the tire.  Check and correct tire pressure as required. Warning! G Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You may lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire. 421 Practical hints Where will I find ...? First aid kit The first aid kit is stored in the storage compartment under the front passenger seat. ! Vehicle jack, vehicle tool kit, luggage bowl, spare wheel The spare wheel, the vehicle tool kit and the luggage bowl are stored in the compartment underneath the trunk floor. To prevent damage, always disengage trunk floor handle from trunk edge and lower trunk floor before closing the trunk lid. The vehicle tool kit includes: 1 Tabs  Press tabs 1 together.  Fold the cover forward.  Remove first aid kit. i Check expiration dates and contents for completeness at least once a year and replace missing/expired items. 1 2 3 4 5 Vehicle jack Spare wheel Luggage bowl Vehicle tool kit Chock  Lift up the trunk floor cover and en- gage trunk floor handle in upper edge of trunk. You can now remove the tools and accessories. 422
One pair of universal pliers
Two open-end wrenches
One hex-socket wrench
One interchangeable slot/Phillips screwdriver
One towing eye bolt
One wheel wrench
One alignment bolt
One fuse extractor
One fuse chart
Spare fuses Practical hints Unlocking/locking in an emergency  Unlocking/locking in an emergency Unlocking the vehicle If you are unable to unlock the vehicle using the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO**, open the driver’s door and the trunk using the mechanical key. Removing the mechanical key Unlocking the driver’s door 1 Mechanical key locking tab 2 Mechanical key 1 Unlocking i Unlocking the driver’s door and/or the trunk with the mechanical key will trigger the anti-theft alarm system. To cancel the alarm, insert the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** in the starter switch.  Move locking tab 1 in direction of arrow.  Slide mechanical key 2 out of the housing.  Insert the mechanical key into the driver’s door lock until it stops.  Turn the mechanical key counter- clockwise to position 1. The driver’s door is unlocked. 423 Practical hints Unlocking/locking in an emergency Unlocking and opening the trunk lid ! A minimum height clearance of 6.2 ft (1.89 m) is required to open the trunk lid. The trunk lid swings open automatically. Always make sure there is sufficient overhead clearance. The trunk lid lock is located next to the handle above the rear license plate recess.  Turn the mechanical key back and re- move it from the trunk lid lock. Locking the vehicle If you are unable to lock the vehicle with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO**, do the following:  Close the passenger doors and the trunk lid.  Press the central locking switch on the center console ( page 125). 1 Unlocking in an emergency 2 Handle  Insert the mechanical key into the trunk lid lock until it stops.  Turn the mechanical key counter- clockwise to position 1. The trunk lid unlocks.  Pull on handle 2. The trunk lid opens. 424  Check to see whether the locking knobs on the passenger doors have moved down.  If necessary push them down manual- ly. Except for the driver's door, the vehicle should now be locked. 1 Locking  Remove the mechanical key out of the SmartKey ( page 423).  Insert the mechanical key into the driver’s door lock until it stops.  Turn the mechanical key clockwise to position 1. The driver’s door is locked. Practical hints Opening/closing in an emergency  Opening/closing in an emergency Power tilt/sliding sunroof (Maybach 57) You can open or close the tilt/sliding sunroof manually should an electrical malfunction occur.  Pull cover 1 off at the location marked by the arrow.  Insert crank 2 through hole.  Turn crank 2 clockwise to:
slide roof closed
raise roof at the rear  Turn crank 2 counterclockwise to: The tilt/sliding sunroof roof drive is located behind cover 1 on the overhead control panel.
slide roof open
lower roof at the rear The tilt/sliding sunroof must be resynchronized after being operated manually ( page 224). 2 Crank  Remove the crank 2 from the Oper- ator’s Manual pouch. 1 Cover 425 Practical hints Opening/closing in an emergency Power tilt/sliding sunroof (Maybach 62) The tilt/sliding sunroof drive is located behind cover 1 in the roof lining with the rear passenger compartment instruments.  Pull cover 2 off of the rear center in- strument.  Remove the crank 1 from the Oper- ator’s Manual pouch.  Insert crank 1 inclined through hole.  Turn crank 1 clockwise to:
slide roof closed
raise roof at the rear  Turn crank 1 counterclockwise to:
slide roof open
lower roof at the rear The tilt/sliding sunroof must be resynchronized after being operated manually ( page 229). 1 Crank 2 Cover 426 Practical hints Pocket PC*  Pocket PC* Installing the memory card The memory card slot is located in the top panel of the Pocket PC. Do not remove the memory card from the Pocket PC. If the memory card was inadvertently removed from the Pocket PC, you have to insert the memory card again.  Push memory card 1 into slot 2 un- til it engages. The reset button is on the lower righthand side of the bottom panel. The side of the memory card 1 with the rounded corner should be on the lower left. Resetting the Pocket PC The reset button is on the lower righthand side of the bottom panel. Installing Pocket PC 2 1 Reset button  Make sure the memory card is installed in the Pocket PC ( page 427).  Remove the stylus from the upper Pocket PC 1 Pocket PC 1 shown; Pocket PC 2 varies slightly 1 Memory card 2 Slot 1 Reset button right-hand corner of your Pocket PC ( page 312) or ( page 315).  Insert the stylus into reset button 1 for approx. one second.  Remove the stylus from reset button 1. The Pocket PC is automatically switched on. 427 Practical hints Replacing SmartKey batteries If the batteries in the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** are discharged, the vehicle can only be locked or unlocked using the mechanical key ( page 423). It is recommended to have the batteries replaced at an authorized Maybach Studio. Warning! G Batteries contain poisonous and corrosive substances. Therefore keep the batteries out of reach of children. If a battery is swallowed, seek medical help immediately. 428 Batteries contain materials that can harm the environment if disposed of improperly. Recycling of batteries is the preferred method of disposal. Many states require sellers of batteries to accept old batteries for recycling. i When inserting the batteries, make sure they are clean and free of lint. i When replacing batteries, always replace both batteries. The required replacement batteries are available at any Maybach Studio. Practical hints Replacing SmartKey batteries  Remove the mechanical key out of the SmartKey ( page 423).  Pull battery compartment 2 out of the housing in direction of arrow.  Using a lint-free cloth, insert new batteries 3 under the contact spring 4 with the plus (+) side facing up.  Return battery compartment 2 into the housing until it locks into place.  Slide mechanical key 1 back into the SmartKey.  Check the operation of the SmartKey/ KEYLESS-GO**. 1 Mechanical key 2 Battery compartment 3 Battery 4 Contact spring Replacement batteries: Lithium, type CR 2025 or equivalent.  Remove the batteries 3.  Insert mechanical key 1 inside open- ing and push gray slide in direction of arrow. The battery compartment 2 is unlatched. 429 Practical hints Replacing bulbs Safe vehicle operation depends on proper exterior lighting and signaling. It is therefore essential that all bulbs and lamp assemblies are in good working order at all times. Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely important. Have headlamps checked and readjusted at regular intervals and when a bulb has been replaced. See an authorized Maybach Studio for headlamp adjustment. i Back-up bulbs will be used when the following lamps malfunction:
Turn signal lamps
Brake lamps
Parking lamps
Tail lamps 430 Bulbs Front lamps Lamp Type 1 Additional turn signal and side marker lamp LED 2 Turn signal lamp SAE J573 2357 A 12.8 V-30CP 3 Side marker lamp W 5 W 4 Low beam and high beam 5 High beam flasher H7-55 W 6 Parking and standing lamp W 5 W Blue 7 Fog lamp H7 55 W 1 Xenon1 D2S-35 W Bi-Xenon headlamps: For safety reasons (high voltage), do not replace the Xenon bulb yourself. See an authorized Maybach Studio. Practical hints Replacing bulbs Rear lamps Notes on bulb replacement Lamp Type 8 High mounted brake lamp LED 9 License plate lamp C 5 W a Brake lamp LED Tail, parking and standing lamp LED Warning! G Keep bulbs out of reach of children. Bulbs and bulb sockets can get very hot. Allow the lamp to cool down before changing a bulb. Halogen lamps contain pressurized gas. A bulb can explode if you Side marker lamp LED
touch or move it when hot Back-up lamp H 24 W
drop the bulb Rear fog lamp, driver’s side LED
scratch the bulb Turn signal lamp LED Wear eye and hand protection. Because of high voltage in Xenon lamps, it is dangerous to replace the bulb or repair the lamp and its components. We recommend that you have such work done by a qualified technician.

Use only 12-volt bulbs of the same type and with the specified watt rating. Switch lights off before changing a bulb to prevent short circuits.
Always use a clean lint-free cloth when handling bulbs.
Your hands should be dry and free of oil and grease.
If the newly installed bulb does not come on, visit an authorized Maybach Studio.
Have the LEDs and bulbs for the following lamps replaced by an authorized Maybach Studio:
Additional turn signal lamp and side marker lamp in the exterior rear view mirrors
Bi-Xenon lamp
Rear fog lamp
High mounted brake lamp
Brake lamp
Rear side marker lamp
Rear turn signal lamp
Tail lamp
Rear parking and standing lamp 431 Practical hints Replacing bulbs High beam flasher bulbs or fog lamps Replacing bulbs for front lamps  Switch off the lights.  Open the hood ( page 355).  Twist housing cover 1 counterclock- wise and pull out.  Twist bulb socket 5 (high beam flasher bulb) or 7 (fog lamps) counterclockwise and pull out.  Push bulb into socket, turn counter- 1 Housing cover for fog lamps, high beam flasher bulb, parking and standing lamp 2 Bulb socket for turn signal lamp 3 Bulb socket for side marker 4 Low beam and high beam (Bi-Xenon) housing cover 5 Bulb socket for high beam flasher bulb 6 Parking and standing lamp 7 Bulb socket for fog lamps G Do not remove the cover for the Bi-Xenon headlamp. Because of high voltage in Xenon lamps, it is dangerous to replace the bulb or repair the lamp and its components. We recommend that you have such work done by a qualified technician. 432 twist clockwise.  Reinsert bulb socket 5 (high beam flasher bulb) or 7 (fog lamps) in lamp and twist clockwise. Low beam and high beam bulbs Warning! clockwise and remove.  Insert new bulb in socket, push in and  Align housing cover 1 and twist clockwise. Practical hints Replacing bulbs Turn signal bulb  Insert a new bulb in the socket.  Switch off the lights.  Reinstall bulb socket 6.  Turn the round cover in the wheel  Align housing cover 1 and twist housing trim counter-clockwise and remove cover.  Twist bulb socket 2 counterclock- wise and pull out.  Push bulb into socket, turn counter- clockwise and remove.  Insert new bulb in socket, push in and twist clockwise.  Reinsert bulb socket 2 in lamp and twist clockwise.  Replace round cover in wheel hous- ing trim and turn it clockwise. clockwise. Side marker lamp bulb  Switch off the lights.  Turn the round cover in the wheel housing trim counter-clockwise and remove cover.  Twist bulb socket 3 counterclock- wise and pull out.  Push bulb into socket, turn counter- clockwise and remove.  Insert new bulb in socket, push in and twist clockwise. Parking and standing lamp bulb  Switch off the lights.  Open the hood ( page 355).  Twist housing cover 1 counterclock- License plate lamp  Reinsert bulb socket 3 in lamp and twist clockwise.  Replace round cover in wheel hous- 1 Screws 2 License plate lamp  Switch off the lights.  Loosen both screws 1 and remove li- cense plate lamp 2.  Replace the tubular lamp and rein- stall lamp.  Tighten the screws 1. ing trim and turn it clockwise. wise and pull out.  Pull out bulb socket 6 with the bulb.  Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket 6. 433 Practical hints Replacing wiper blades ! To avoid damage to the hood, the wiper arms should only be folded forward when in the vertical position. Removing wiper blades  Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 1.  Turn combination switch to wiper setting II ( page 71).  With wiper arm in vertical position 1, turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 0. Warning! G  Slide the wiper blade sideways out of retainer 2. For safety reasons, remove SmartKey from starter switch before replacing a wiper blade, otherwise the motor could suddenly turn on and cause injury. 1 Wiper arm vertical  Fold the wiper arm forward. You should hear it snap into place.  Turn the wiper blade at a right angle to wiper arm. 434 Practical hints Replacing wiper blades Installing wiper blades  Slide the wiper blade into the cutout on the wiper arm. !  Rotate the wiper blade into position Hold on to the wiper when folding the wiper arm back. If released, the force of the impact from the tensioning spring could crack the windshield. parallel to wiper arm.  Fold the wiper arm back so that blade rests on windshield. Make sure you hold on to the wiper when folding the wiper arm back. Never open the hood when the wiper arm is folded forward. Do not allow the wiper arms to contact the windshield glass without a wiper blade inserted. Make certain that the wiper blades are properly installed. Improperly installed wiper blades may cause windshield damage. For your convenience, you should have this work carried out by an authorized Maybach Studio. 435 Practical hints Flat tire Preparing the vehicle  Park the vehicle as far as possible from moving traffic on a hard surface.  Turn on the hazard warning flashers.  Engage the steering wheel lock in the straight ahead position and set the parking brake.  Move the gear selector lever to P.  Have any passenger exit the vehicle at a safe distance from the roadway. Removing the spare wheel Mounting the spare wheel  Turn the luggage bowl counterclockwise ( page 422). Spare wheel The spare wheel rim is mounted with a full-sized tire of the same type as on the vehicle, and it is fully functional.  Remove the spare wheel. When you replace the vehicle’s tires, you can use the spare wheel as a regular wheel if:  Place spare wheel in wheel well and
it is not more than six years old
rim and tire are the same model as the regular wheels Warning! G If the spare tire is more than six years old or is not the same model as the regular tires, have the spare tire replaced with a new tire at the nearest Maybach Studio. Never operate the vehicle with more than one spare tire. For more information on spare wheel, see "Technical data" ( page 459). 436 Storing the spare wheel secure it with luggage bowl.  Turn the luggage bowl clockwise to its stop. Preparing the vehicle  Take vehicle tool kit tray and vehicle jack out of trunk.  Take the spare wheel out of wheel well. Practical hints Flat tire Lifting the vehicle When changing wheel on a hill:  Place chock and another sizeable, heavy object on the downhill side blocking both wheels of the axle not being worked on. 1 Chock  Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by blocking wheels with wheel chock 1 and another sizable, heavy object. When changing wheel on a level surface:  Place one chock in front of and another sizeable, heavy object behind the wheel that is diagonally opposite to the wheel being changed. 2 Two-piece wheel wrench  Take the two-piece wheel wrench 2 out of the vehicle tool kit tray. Assemble wheel wrench. Warning! G The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up the vehicle at the jack support tube hole built into the vehicle. To help avoid personal injury, use the jack only to lift the vehicle during a wheel change. Never get beneath the vehicle while it is supported by the jack. Keep hands and feet away from the area under the lifted vehicle. Always firmly set parking brake and block wheels before raising vehicle with jack. Do not disengage parking brake while the vehicle is raised. Be certain that the jack is always vertical (plumb line) when in use, especially on hills. Always try to use the jack on level surface. Make sure the jack arm is fully seated in the jack support tube hole. Always lower the vehicle onto sufficient capacity jackstands before working under the vehicle.  On wheel to be changed, loosen but do not yet remove the wheel bolts (approximately one full turn with wrench).  437 Practical hints Flat tire  The tube openings are located directly behind the front wheel housings and in front of the rear wheel housings.  Take ratchet 5 out of vehicle tool Removing the wheel kit.  Place ratchet 5 on jack 3 so that you can see the letters UP.  Crank ratchet 5 up and down until the tire is a maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) off the ground. Warning! The jack is intended only for lifting the vehicle briefly for wheel changes. It is not suited for performing maintenance work under the vehicle. 3 Jack 4 Jack support tube hole 5 Ratchet
 Insert jack 3 fully into tube hole 4 up to the stop. Warning! G Insert the jack arm fully into the jack support tube hole up to the stop. Otherwise the vehicle may fall from the jack and cause personal injury or damage to the vehicle. 438 G
Never start the engine when the vehicle is raised. Never lie down under the raised vehicle. 6 Alignment bolt  Unscrew uppermost wheel bolt and remove.  Replace this wheel bolt with align- ment bolt 6 supplied in the tool kit.  Remove the remaining bolts. ! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt. This could result in damage to the bolt and wheel hub threads.  Remove the wheel. Practical hints Flat tire Mounting the new wheel Warning!  Clean contact surfaces of wheel and wheel hub. Use only genuine equipment Maybach wheel bolts. Other wheel bolts may come loose. ! To avoid paint damage, place wheel flat against hub and hold it there while installing first wheel bolt. Warning! G Always replace wheel bolts that are damaged or rusted. Do not tighten the wheel bolts when the vehicle is raised. Otherwise the vehicle could fall off the jack.  Guide the spare wheel onto the alignment bolt and push it on. Lowering the vehicle  Place ratchet on jack so that you can see the letters DOWN.  Lower vehicle by cranking ratchet up Never apply oil or grease to wheel bolts. and down until vehicle is resting fully on its own weight. Damaged wheel hub threads should be repaired immediately. Do not continue to drive under these circumstances! Contact an authorized Maybach Studio or call Roadside Assistance. Incorrect mounting bolts or improperly tightened mounting bolts can cause the wheel to come off. This could cause an accident. Make sure you are using the correct mounting bolts. G  Remove the jack.   Insert wheel bolts and tighten them slightly.  Unscrew the alignment bolt, install last wheel bolt and tighten slightly. 439 Practical hints Flat tire Warning! G Have the tightening torque checked after changing a wheel. The wheels could come loose if they are not tightened to a torque of 110 lb-ft (150 Nm).  Before storing the jack in the trunk, it 1-5 Wheel bolts   Tighten the five wheel bolts evenly, following the diagonal sequence illustrated (1 to 5), until all bolts are tight. Observe a tightening torque of 110 lb-ft (150 Nm). 440 should be fully collapsed, with handle folded in.  Place the wheel bolt wrench, chock, alignment bolt and jack back in the trunk. Replacing jack support tube cover  Slide tongue of cover under the up- per edge of the tube opening.  Applying even pressure, press cover until it snaps into place. Be careful not to damage the locking tabs or clamp the plastic retaining strap. ! You can also secure the damaged wheel down into the spare wheel well in the trunk. Do not activate the tire inflation pressure monitor ( page 365) until the depressurized tire is no longer in the vehicle. Practical hints Batteries  Batteries Your vehicle is equipped with two batteries:
The starter battery (located in the engine compartment)
The battery for electrical consumers (located in the trunk) Warning! G Failure to follow these instructions can result in severe injury or death. Never lean over batteries while connecting, you might get injured. 4 Cover over positive terminal 5 Battery for electrical consumers 6 Negative terminal Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes, skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately flush affected area with water and seek medical help if necessary. A battery will also produce hydrogen gas, which is flammable and explosive. Keep flames or sparks away from battery, avoid improper connection of jumper cables, smoking, etc. 1 Negative terminal 2 Starter battery 3 Cover over positive terminal 441 Practical hints Batteries ! Never loosen or detach battery terminal clamps while the engine is running or the SmartKey is in the starter switch. Otherwise the alternator and other electronic components could be severely damaged. Have the battery checked regularly by an authorized Maybach Studio. Refer to Maintenance Booklet for maintenance intervals or contact an authorized Maybach Studio for further information. Warning! G Do not place metal objects on the battery as this could result in a short circuit. Use leak-proof battery only to avoid the risk of acid burns in the event of an accident. 442 Warning! G The SBC brake system requires electrical power to operate. A malfunction in the vehicle’s power supply or electrical system may impair brake system operation and switch it into its emergency operation mode. The same applies if battery is disconnected. To brake, the driver must then apply significantly greater brake pedal pressure and depress the pedal much further to obtain the expected braking effect. If necessary, apply full pressure to the brake pedal. Brakes are only applied to the front wheels. Stopping distance is increased! Adjust your driving style accordingly. For more information, refer to "SBC brake system" ( page 101). Warning! G With a disconnected battery
you will no longer be able to turn the SmartKey in the starter switch and pressing the KEYLESS-GO** start/stop button ( page 55) on the gear selector lever will have no effect
the gear selector lever will remain locked in position P Practical hints Batteries Disconnecting the batteries ! Always disconnect the batteries in the order described below, even if you only want to charge the starter battery, for example. Otherwise, the vehicle’s electronics could be damaged. i It is only possible to maintain the existing charge in the battery for electrical consumers using the battery charge maintenance unit ( page 279).  Turn off the engine ( page 75).  Turn off all electrical consumers.  Remove SmartKey from starter  Remove trunk floor from right hand side of the trunk. The consumer battery is located in the trunk on the right hand side.  Disconnect negative terminal from consumer battery.  Open hood. The starter battery is located in the engine compartment on the passenger side.  Disconnect negative terminal of start- er battery.  Remove cover from positive terminal.  Disconnect the positive lead of con- sumer battery and of the starter battery. Removing the batteries switch. In vehicles with KEYLESS-GO**:  Open the driver‘s door.  Depress parking brake firmly or move gear selector lever to position P.  Open trunk. Removing the consumer battery  Loosen the screws that hold the con- sumer battery in the trunk in place. Removing the starter battery  Loosen the screw that holds the start- er battery in the engine compartment in place.  Swing the bar up and remove bat- tery. Charging and reinstalling the batteries  Charge batteries in accordance with the instructions of the battery charger manufacturer.  Reinstall the charged battery. Follow the previously described steps in reverse order. Warning! G Never charge a battery while still installed in the vehicle. Gases may escape during charging and cause explosions that may result in paint damage, corrosion or personal injury.  Remove battery’s support and brack- et. Take battery out of trunk. 443 Practical hints Batteries Reconnecting the batteries ! Always connect the batteries in the order described below. Otherwise, the vehicle’s electronics could be damaged. ! i Never invert the terminal connections. The following procedures must be carried out following any interruption of consumer battery power (e.g. due to reconnecting):  Reinstall carpet on the right hand side of the trunk.
Set the clock. Refer to the separate COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions.
Resynchronize the ESP ( page 395)
Resynchronize side windows ( page 220).
Resynchronize tilt/sliding sunroof ( page 224) or ( page 229).  Have a Maybach Studio check engine  Turn off all electrical consumers.  Install starter battery in the designat- ed location in the engine compartment.  Install consumer battery in the desig- nated location in the trunk.  Attach supports and brackets and tighten screws.  Connect positive lead of the consum- er battery and of the starter battery and fasten covers.  Connect negative lead of the starter battery in the engine compartment.  Connect negative lead of the con- sumer battery in the trunk. 444 control units for error messages and have them erased. ! The batteries, their filler caps and the vent tube must always be securely installed when the vehicle is in operation. Batteries contain materials that can harm the environment if disposed of improperly. Large 12-volt storage batteries contain lead. Recycling of batteries is the preferred method of disposal. Many states require sellers of batteries to accept old batteries for recycling. Practical hints Jump starting  Jump starting Warning! G Failure to follow these directions will cause damage to the electronic components, and can lead to a battery explosion and severe injury or death. Never lean over batteries while connecting or jump starting, you might get injured. Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes, skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately flush affected area with water, and seek medical help if necessary. If the starter battery is discharged, the engine can be started with jumper cables and the battery of another vehicle. Observe the following:
Jump starting should only be performed when the engine and catalytic converter are cold.
Do not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw out first.
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas, which is flammable and very explosive. Keep flames or sparks away from battery, avoid improper connection of jumper cables, smoking, etc. Attempting to jump start a frozen battery can result in it exploding, causing personal injury.
Read all instructions before proceeding.
Only jump start from batteries with the same voltage rating (12 V). Jump starting with a more powerful battery could damage the vehicle‘s electrical system, which will not be covered by the Maybach Limited Warranty. Use only jumper cables with sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps. Always make sure the jumper cables are not on or near pulleys, fans or other parts that move when an engine is started or running. ! Jump starting should only be performed on the starter battery installed in the engine compartment. Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Do not attempt to start the engine using a battery quick charge unit. If engine does not run after several unsuccessful starting attempts, have it checked at the nearest authorized Maybach Studio. Excessive unburned fuel generated by repeated failed starting attempts may damage the catalytic converter and may present a fire risk. Make sure the jumper cables do not have loose or missing insulation. Make sure the cable clamps do not touch any other metal part while the other end is still attached to a battery. 445 Practical hints Jump starting Warning!  Start engine of the vehicle with the G charged battery and run at idle speed. Keep flames or sparks away from battery. Do not smoke.  Connect negative terminal 1 of the charged battery with negative terminal 3 of the discharged battery with the jumper cable. Clamp cable to charged battery 1 first. Observe all safety instructions and precautions when handling automotive batteries ( page 361). Jump starting should only be performed on the starter battery. The starter battery is located in the engine compartment on the passenger side.  Make sure the two vehicles do not touch.  Turn off all electrical consumers, ex- cept hazard warning flashers or work lights.  Apply parking brake.  Shift gear selector lever to position P.  Open hood ( page 355).  Start the engine of the disabled vehi- cle. 1 Negative terminal of charged battery 2 Positive terminal of charged battery 3 Negative terminal of discharged battery 4 Positive terminal of discharged battery  Connect positive terminal 2 of the charged battery with positive terminal 4 of the discharged battery with the jumper cable. Clamp cable to charged battery 2 first. ! Never invert the terminal connections. 446 Now you can again turn on the electrical consumers. Do not turn on the lights under any circumstances.  Remove the jumper cables first from negative terminals 3 and 1 and then from positive terminals 4 and 2. You can now turn on the lights.  Have the starter battery checked at the nearest authorized Maybach Studio. i Do not tow-start the vehicle. Practical hints Towing the vehicle  Towing the vehicle We recommend that Maybach vehicles be transported with all wheels off the ground using flatbed or appropriate wheel lift/dolly equipment. ! Use flatbed or wheel lift/dolly equipment with SmartKey in starter switch turned to position 0. Do not tow with sling-type equipment. Towing with sling-type equipment over bumpy roads will damage radiator and supports. To prevent damage during transport, do not tie down vehicle by its chassis or suspension parts. Switch off the tow-away alarm ( page 106) and the automatic central locking ( page 181). When circumstances do not permit the recommended towing methods, the vehicle may be towed with all wheels on the ground or front wheels raised only so far as necessary to have the vehicle moved to a safe location where the recommended towing methods can be employed. ! If the vehicle is towed with the front axle raised, the engine must be shut off (SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or 1). Otherwise, the ESP will immediately be engaged and will apply the rear wheel brakes. When towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground, the gear selector lever must be in position N and the SmartKey must be in starter switch position 2. When towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground or the front axle raised, the vehicle may be towed only for distances up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a speed not to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). ! To be certain to avoid a possibility of damage to the transmission, however, we recommend the drive shaft be disconnected at the rear axle drive flange for any towing beyond a short tow to a nearby garage. Warning! G If circumstances require towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground, always tow with a tow bar if:
the engine will not run
there is a malfunction in the SBC brake system
there is a malfunction in the power supply or in the vehicle’s electrical system as that will be necessary to adequately control the towed vehicle. Prior to towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground, make sure the SmartKey is in starter switch position 2. If the SmartKey is left in starter switch position 0 for an extended period of time, it can no longer be turned in the switch. In this case, the steering is locked. To unlock, remove SmartKey from starter switch and reinsert. 447 Practical hints Towing the vehicle i To signal turns while being towed with the hazard warning flasher in use, switch on ignition and activate the combination switch for the left or right turn signal in the usual manner – only the selected turn signal will operate. Upon canceling the turn signal, the hazard warning flasher will operate again. Warning! G The SBC brake system requires electrical power to operate. A malfunction in the vehicle’s power supply or electrical system may impair brake system operation and switch it into its emergency operation mode. To brake, the driver must then apply significantly greater brake pedal pressure and depress the pedal much further to obtain the expected braking effect. If necessary, apply full pressure to the brake pedal. 448 Brakes are only applied to the front wheels. Stopping distance is increased! Adapt your driving style accordingly. For more information, refer to "SBC brake system" ( page 101). With the engine not running, there is no power assistance for the brake and steering system. In this case, it is important to keep in mind that a considerably higher degree of effort is necessary to brake and steer the vehicle. Adapt your driving accordingly. ! To prevent the vehicle door locks from locking, deactivate the automatic central locking ( page 181). The vehicle should only be towed using the properly installed towing eye bolt. Never attach tow cable, tow rope or tow rod to the vehicle chassis, frame or suspension parts. i If the battery is disconnected or discharged:
the SmartKey will not turn in the starter switch. For information, see "Batteries" ( page 441) and "Jump starting" ( page 445)
the gear selector lever will remain locked in position P. When towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground, please note the following: With the automatic central locking activated and the SmartKey in starter switch position 2, or KEYLESS-GO** start/stop button ( page 55) in position 2, the vehicle doors lock if the left front wheel as well as the right rear wheel are turning at vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or more. Practical hints Towing the vehicle Installing towing eye bolt Front of vehicle To remove cover: Rear of vehicle  Pry off cover 1 using lower recess.  Lift cover off to reveal threaded hole for towing eye bolt. The towing eye bolt is supplied with the tool kit (located in the storage compartment under the trunk floor).  Screw towing eye bolt in to its stop and tighten with lug wrench. To reinstall cover:  Fit cover 1 and snap into place. 1 Cover on right side of front bumper 1 Cover on right side of rear bumper To remove cover:  Pry off cover 1 using lower recess.  Fold cover down to reveal threaded hole for towing eye bolt. The towing eye bolt is supplied with the tool kit (located in the storage compartment under the trunk floor).  Screw towing eye bolt in to its stop and tighten with lug wrench. To reinstall cover:  Fit cover 1 and snap into place. 449 Practical hints Fuses Fuses are designed to protect the electrical circuits in your vehicle from a short circuit. If a fuse is blown, the component(s) and systems controlled by that fuse will stop working. The following aids are available to help you replace fuses ( page 422):
Fuse chart
Spare fuses
Fuse extractor 450 Warning! G Only use fuses approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles and which have the specified amperage. Using other fuses may cause an overload and lead to a fire, or cause damage to electrical components and/or systems. ! Never attempt to repair or bridge a blown fuse. Have the cause determined and remedied by an authorized Maybach Studio. Your vehicle’s electrical fuses are located in various fuse boxes:
In the engine compartment on the passenger-side ( page 451)
In the engine compartment on the driver’s side ( page 451)
In the dashboard on the passenger-side ( page 452)
In the trunk on the driver’s side ( page 452) Practical hints Fuses Aids for replacing fuses Fuse chart A chart explaining fuse allocation and fuse amperages can be found in the vehicle tool kit in the trunk ( page 422). Fuse boxes in engine compartment There are two fuse boxes located in the engine compartment the driver’s and front passenger side in front of the firewall (dividing wall between engine compartment and passenger compartment). 2 Spare Fuses Spare Fuses are found in the vehicle tool kit in the trunk ( page 422). 2 Fuse box cover, passenger-side Fuse extractor Opening The fuse extractor is found in the vehicle tool kit in the trunk ( page 422).  Take crank out of vehicle document pouch.  Loosen retaining screws with crank. 1 Fuse box cover, driver’s side  Remove cover from fuse box. Closing  Re-attach cover to fuse box.  Make sure the cover fits correctly.  Tighten retaining screws with crank. 451 Practical hints Fuses Fuse box in passenger compartment The fuse box is located in the dashboard on the front passenger-side. Opening  Open the passenger door.  Insert flat, blunt object as a lever into Fuse box in the trunk The fuse box is located in the trunk behind the left-hand trim panel. the edge of the cover 1 at the position indicated by the arrow.  Loosen cover 1 from dashboard using lever.  Using your hands, pull cover 1 out and remove. Closing  Hook cover 1 into the opening at the front. 1 Cover ! Do not use sharp objects such as a screw driver to open the fuse box cover 1 in the dashboard, as this could damage it.  Press cover 1 back on until it engag- es. 1 Locking knob 2 Trim panel Opening  Turn locking knob 1 90°.  Pull trim panel 2 upward and remove it. Closing  Attach trim panel 2 into the opening at the top.  Turn locking knob 1 90°. 452 Technical data Parts service Warranty coverage Identification labels Layout of poly-V-belt drive Engine Rims and tires Electrical system Main dimensions Weights Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. Consumer information 453 Technical data Parts service The "Technical data" section provides the necessary technical data for your vehicle. All authorized Maybach Studios maintain a stock of genuine Maybach parts required for maintenance and repair work. In addition, strategically located parts distribution centers provide quick and reliable parts service. Genuine Maybach parts are subjected to stringent quality inspections. Each part has been specifically developed, manufactured or selected for and adapted to Maybach vehicles. Therefore, genuine Maybach parts should be installed. 454 ! The use of non-genuine Maybach parts and accessories not authorized by us for use on Maybach vehicles could damage the vehicle, which is not covered by the Maybach Limited Warranty, or could compromise the vehicle’s durability or safety. Technical data Warranty coverage  Warranty coverage Your vehicle is covered under the terms of the warranties printed in the Service and Warranty Information booklet. Your authorized Maybach Studio will exchange or repair any defective parts originally installed in the vehicle in accordance with the terms of the following warranties:
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
Emission System Warranty
Emission Performance Warranty
California, Maine, Massachusetts, and Vermont Emission Control Systems Warranty Replacement parts and accessories are covered by the Maybach Parts and Accessories warranties, copies of which are available at any Maybach Studio. Loss of Service and Warranty Information Booklet Should you lose your Service and Warranty Information booklet, have an authorized Maybach Studio arrange for a replacement. It will be mailed to you. 455 Technical data Identification labels 1 Certification label, includes Paintwork code (on driver’s B pillar) 2 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) (located in the trunk) 3 Engine number (engraved on engine) 4 VIN, visible (lower edge of windshield) 5 Emission control information label, includes both federal and California certification exhaust emission standards Vacuum line routing diagram label i When ordering parts, please specify vehicle identification and engine numbers. 456 Technical data Layout of poly-V-belt drive  Layout of poly-V-belt drive 1 Automatic belt tensioner 2 Power steering pump 3 Air conditioning compressor 4 Crankshaft 5 Coolant pump 6 Generator (alternator) 7 Idler pulley 8 Air conditioning compressor 9 Idler pulley a Idler pulley b Idler pulley 457 Technical data Engine Model Maybach 1 Engine 285 Mode of operation 4-stroke engine, gasoline injection No. of cylinders 12 Bore 3.23 in (82.00 mm) Stroke 3.43 in (87.00 mm) Total piston displacement 336.4 cu in (5513 cm3) Compression ratio 9:1 Output acc. to SAE J 1349 543 hp/5250 rpm 2 (405 kW/5250 rpm) Maximum torque acc. to SAE J 1349 664 lb-ft/2300–3000 rpm (900 Nm/2300–3000 rpm) 1 2 Maximum engine speed 5950 rpm Firing order 1-12-5-8-3-10-6-7-2-11-4-9 Poly-V-belt 2713 mm The quoted data apply only to the standard vehicle. See an authorized Maybach Studio for the corresponding data of all special bodies and special equipment. Premium fuel required. Performance may vary with fuel octane rating. 458 Technical data Rims and tires  Rims and tires Use only tires and rims which have been specifically developed for your vehicle and tested and approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles. Other tires and rims can have detrimental effects, such as
poor handling characteristics
increased noise
increased fuel consumption ! i Moreover, tires and rims not approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles may, under load, exhibit dimensional variations and different tire deformation characteristics that could cause them to come into contact with the vehicle body or axle parts. This may result in damage to the tires or the vehicle. Further information on tires and rims is available at any authorized Maybach Studio. A tire inflation pressure table is located on the fuel filler cap of the vehicle. The tire pressure should be checked regularly and should only be adjusted on cold tires. Follow tire manufacturer's maintenance recommendation included with vehicle. 459 Technical data Rims and tires Same size tires Summer tires (radial-ply tires) 275/50 R19 112W XL or Extra Load MO Wheel offset 2.64 in (67 mm) Rims (light alloy) 8J x 19 Winter tires (radial-ply tires) 275/50 R19 112H XL or Extra Load M+S MO Wheel offset 2.64 in (67 mm) Rims (light alloy) 8J x 19 Spare wheel Summer tire (radial-ply tire) 275/50 R19 112W XL or Extra Load MO Wheel offset 2.64 in (67 mm) Rim (light alloy) 8J x 19 460 Technical data Electrical system  Electrical system Generator (alternator) 14 V/350 A Starter motor 12 V/1.7 kW Starter battery 12 V/40 Ah Electrical consumer battery 12 V/95 Ah Spark plugs NGK IFR 6 Q-G Electrode gap 0.028 in (0.7 mm) Tightening torque 15–22 lb-ft (20–30 Nm) 461 Technical data Main dimensions Model Maybach 57 Maybach 62 Overall vehicle length 225.5 in (5728 mm) 242.7 in (6165 mm) Overall vehicle width 78.0 in (1980 mm) 78.0 in (1980 mm) Overall vehicle height 61.9 in (1572 mm) 61.9 in (1573 mm) Wheelbase 133.5 in (3390 mm) 150.7 in (3827 mm) Track, front 65.9 in (1675 mm) 65.9 in (1675 mm) Track, rear 66.7 in (1695 mm) 66.7 in (1695 mm) 462 Technical data Weights  Weights 1 Roof load max. no roof load1 Trunk load max. 220 lb (100 kg) To avoid potential damage to the roof, solar panel* or electrotransparent roof*, roof rails and any roof-mounted devices must not be used. 463 Technical data Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. Capacities Vehicle components and their respective lubricants must match. Therefore use only brands tested and approved by us. Capacity Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. Engine with oil filter 10.5 US qt (10.0 l) Approved engine oils Automatic transmission 7.9 US qt (7.5 l) MB Automatic Transmission Fluid Rear axle 2.1 US qt (2.0 l) Hypoid gear oil SAE 85 W 90 Power steering approx 1.45 (1.65 l) MB Power Steering Fluid (Pentosin CHF 11S) Front wheel hubs approx. 0.35 oz (10 g) each High temperature roller bearing grease Cooling system approx. 18 US qt (17.0 l) MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze Low temperature cooling system approx. 2.3 US qt (2.2 l) MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze Fuel tank including a reserve of Premium unleaded gasoline: Minimum Posted Octane 91 (average of 96 RON/86 MON) 29.1 US gal (110.0 l) 3.7 US qt (14.0 l) Air conditioning system Windshield washer and headlamp cleaning system 1 Please refer to the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet, or inquire at your Maybach Studio. R-134a refrigerant and special PAG lubricant oil (never R-12) 7.1 US qt (6.7 l) MB Windshield Washer Concentrate1 Use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate "S" and water for temperatures above freezing point or MB Windshield Washer Concentrate "S" and commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze for temperatures below freezing point. Follow suggested mixing ratios ( page 469). 464 Technical data Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. Engine oils Engine oils are specifically tested for their suitability in our engines and durability for our service intervals. Therefore, only use approved engine oils and oil filters required for vehicles with Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) or FSS (Canada vehicles). For a listing of approved engine oils and oil filters, refer to the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet, or contact an authorized Maybach Studio. Using engine oils and oil filters of specification other than those expressly required for the Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) or FSS (Canada vehicles), or changing of oil and oil filter at change intervals longer than those called for by the Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) or FSS (Canada Vehicles) will result in engine damage not covered by the Maybach Limited Warranty. Please follow Maintenance System (U.S vehicles) or FSS (Canada vehicles) recommendations. Failure to do so could result in engine damage not covered by the Maybach Limited Warranty. Engine oil additives Do not blend oil additives with engine oil. They may damage the engine. Damage or malfunctions resulting from blending oil additives are not covered by the Maybach Limited Warranty. Air conditioning refrigerant R-134a (HFC) refrigerant and special PAG lubricating oil is used in the air conditioning system. Never use R-12 (CFC) or mineral-based lubricating oil. Otherwise damage to the system will occur. 465 Technical data Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. Brake fluid During vehicle operation, the boiling point of the brake fluid is continuously reduced through the absorption of moisture from the atmosphere. Under extremely strenuous operating conditions, this moisture content can lead to the formation of bubbles in the system, thus reducing the system’s efficiency. Therefore, the brake fluid must be replaced every two years, preferably in the spring. Only brake fluid approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles is recommended. Your authorized Maybach Studio will provide you with additional information. Premium unleaded gasoline ! To maintain the engine’s durability and performance, premium unleaded gasoline must be used. If premium unleaded is not available and low octane fuel is used, follow these precautions:

Have the fuel tank only partially filled with unleaded regular and fill up with premium unleaded as soon as possible.
Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt acceleration. Unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates such as Ethanol, IPA, IBA and TBA can be used provided the ratio of any one of these oxygenates to gasoline does not exceed 10%; MTBE must not exceed 15%.
Do not exceed an engine speed of 3000 rpm if the vehicle is loaded with a light load such as two persons and no luggage.
466 Fuel requirements Use only premium unleaded fuel Do not exceed 2/3 of maximum accelerator pedal position if the vehicle is fully loaded or operating in mountainous terrain. The octane number (posted at the pump) must be 91 min. It is an average of both the Research (R) octane number and the Motor (M) octane number: (R+M)/2. This is also known as the ANTI-KNOCK INDEX. The ratio of Methanol to gasoline must not exceed 3% plus additional cosolvents. Using mixtures of Ethanol and Methanol is not allowed. Gasohol, which contains 10% Ethanol and 90% unleaded gasoline, can be used. These blends must also meet all other fuel requirements, such as resistance to spark knock, boiling range, vapor pressure, etc. Technical data Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. Gasoline additives A major concern among engine manufacturers is carbon build-up caused by gasoline. We recommend only the use of quality gasoline containing additives that prevent the build-up of carbon deposits. Products Pamphlet for a listing of approved product(s). Follow directions on product label. After an extended period of using fuels without such additives, carbon deposits can build up especially on the intake valves and in the combustion area, leading to engine performance problems such as: Damage or malfunction resulting from poor fuel quality or from blending additional fuel additives other than those tested and approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles listed in the Factory Approved Service Products Pamphlet are not covered by the Maybach Limited Warranty.
Warm-up hesitation
Unstable idle
Knocking/pinging
Misfire
Power loss In areas where carbon deposits may be encountered due to lack of availability of gasolines which contain these additives, we recommend only the use of additives approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles. Refer to Factory Approved Service Do not blend any specific fuel additives with fuel. This only results in unnecessary costs and may be harmful to the engine operation. Coolants The engine coolant is a mixture of water and anticorrosion/antifreeze, which provides:
Corrosion protection
Freeze protection
Boiling protection (by increasing the boiling point) The cooling system was filled at the factory with a coolant providing freeze protection to approximately –22°F (–30°C) and corrosion protection. If the antifreeze mixture is effective to –22°F (–30°C), the boiling point of the coolant in the pressurized cooling system is reached at approximately 266°F (130°C). The coolant solution must be used year round to provide the necessary corrosion protection and increase in the boil-over protection. Refer to Maintenance Booklet for replacement interval. Coolant system design and coolant used stipulate the replacement interval. The replacement interval published in the Maintenance Booklet is only applicable if MB 325.0 anticorrosion/antifreeze solution or other products approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles of equal specification (see Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet) are used to renew the coolant concentration or bring it back up to the proper level. 467 Technical data Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. To provide important corrosion protection, the solution must be at least 45% anticorrosion/antifreeze [equivalent to freeze protection to approximately –22°F (–30°C)]. If you use a solution that is more than 55% anticorrosion/antifreeze [freeze protection to approximately –49°F (–45°C)], the engine temperature will increase due to the lower heat transfer capability of the solution. Therefore, do not use more than this amount of anticorrosion/antifreeze. If the coolant level is low, water and MB 325.0 anticorrosion/antifreeze should be used to bring it up to the proper level (have cooling system checked for signs of leakage). Please make sure the mixture is in accordance with label instructions. The water in the cooling system must meet minimum requirements, which are usually satisfied by normal drinking water. If you are not sure about the water quality, consult an authorized Maybach Studio. Anticorrosion/antifreeze Your vehicle contains a number of aluminum parts. The use of aluminum components in motor vehicle engines necessitates that anticorrosion/antifreeze coolant used in such engines be specifically formulated to protect the aluminum parts. (Failure to use such anticorrosion/antifreeze coolant will result in a significantly shortened service life). Anticorrosion/antifreeze quantity Approximately freeze protection –35°F (–37°C) –49°F (–45°C) Cooling system 9.0 US qt (8.5 l) 9.9 US qt (9.35 l) Low temperature cooling system 1.16 US qt (1.1 l) 1.27 US qt (1.2 l) 468 Therefore, the following product is strongly recommended for use in your vehicle: Maybach 325.0 Anticorrosion/ Antifreeze Agent. Before the start of the winter season (or once a year in hot southern regions), you should have the anticorrosion/antifreeze concentration checked. The coolant is also regularly checked each time you bring your vehicle to an authorized Maybach Studio for service. The anticorrosion/antifreeze quantities listed in the table below are in relation to total filling capacity. Technical data Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. Windshield and headlamp washer system Both the windshield and headlamp washer systems are supplied from the windshield washer fluid reservoir. The windshield and headlamp washer fluid reservoir has a capacity of approximately 7.1 US qt (6.7 l).  Refill the reservoir with MB Wind- shield Washer Concentrate and water (or concentrate and commercially available pre-mixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze, depending on ambient temperatures). Warning! Windshield and headlamp washer fluid mixing ratio For temperatures above freezing point, use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate "S" and water:
G Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flammable. Do not spill washer solvent/antifreeze on hot engine parts, because it may ignite and burn. You can be seriously burned. 1 part "S" to 100 parts water (1.34 floz [40 ml] "S" to 1 gallon [4.0 l] water) For temperatures below freezing point, use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate "S" and commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent/ antifreeze:
1 part "S" to 100 parts solvent (1.34 floz [40 ml] "S" to 1 gallon [4.0 l] solvent) 469 Technical data Consumer information The following text is published as required of all manufacturers of passenger cars under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the "National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966." Uniform tire quality grading Quality grades can be found, where applicable, on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example: Treadwear Traction Temperature 200 AA A All passenger car tires must conform to federal safety requirements in addition to these grades. graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate. Traction The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. Warning! G Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (11/2) times as well on the government course as a tire 470 The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics. Temperature The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. Warning! G The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause excessive heat build-up and possible tire failure. Technical terms ABS (Antilock Brake System) Prevents the wheels from locking up during braking so that the vehicle can continue to be steered. ADS (Adaptive Damping System) Automatically adapts the optimum suspension damping to prevailing driving conditions. Airmatic DC (Airmatic Dual Control) Automatically selects the optimum suspension tuning and ride height for your vehicle. Airmatic consists of three components:
Adaptive Damping System (->ADS)
Stiffness of spring
Vehicle level control Alignment bolt Metal pin with thread. The centering pin is an aid used when changing a tire to align the wheel with the wheel hub. BabySmartTM1 airbag deactivation system This system detects if a special system compatible child restraint seat is installed on the front passenger seat. The system will automatically deactivate the passenger front airbag when such a seat is properly installed (PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp located in the center console comes on). See an authorized Maybach Studio for availability. BabySmartTM compatible child seats Special restraint system for children. The sensor system for the passenger seat prevents deployment of the passenger front airbag if a BabySmartTM compatible child seat is installed. Bi-Xenon headlamps Headlamps which use an electric arc as a light source and produce a more intense light than filament headlamps. Bi-Xenon headlamps produce low beam and high beam. CAN system (Controller Area Network) Data bus network serving to control vehicle functions such as door locking or windshield wiping. Cockpit All instruments, switches, buttons and indicator/warning lamps in the passenger compartment needed for vehicle operation and monitoring. BAS (Brake Assist System) System for potentially reducing braking distances in emergency braking situations. The system is activated when it senses an emergency based on how fast the brake is applied. 1 BabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens Automotive Corp. 471 Technical terms COMAND (Cockpit Management and Data System) Information and operating center for vehicle sound and communications systems, including the radio and navigation system, as well as other equipment (CD changer, telephone, etc.). Control system The control system is used to call up vehicle information and to change component settings. Information and messages appear in the multifunction display. The driver uses the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel to navigate through the system and to adjust settings. Cruise control Driving convenience system that automatically maintains the vehicle speed set by the driver. Distronic** A driving convenience cruise control system which helps the driver maintain a pre-selected speed:
If there is no vehicle directly ahead, the system operates in the same way as conventional ->cruise control.
If a slower moving vehicle is ahead, Distronic will reduce your vehicle speed to the extent permitted by reduced throttle and up to 20% braking power to maintain the preset minimum following distance. ELCODE (Electronic Code System) System that electronically checks whether a person entering or driving the vehicle is authorized to do so. It is part of the Maybach anti-theft protection program. 472 Engine number The number set by the manufacturer and placed on the cylinder block to uniquely identify each engine produced. Engine oil viscosity Measurement for the inner friction (viscosity) of the oil at different temperatures. The higher the temperature an oil can tolerate without becoming thin, or the lower the temperature it can tolerate without becoming viscous, the better the viscosity. ESP (Electronic Stability Program) Improves vehicle handling and directional stability. ETD (Emergency Tensioning Device) Device which deploys in certain frontal and rear collisions exceeding the system's threshold to tighten the seat belts. ->SRS Technical terms FSS (Canada vehicles) (Flexible Service System) Maintenance service indicator in the multifunction display that informs the driver when the next vehicle maintenance service is due. FSS evaluates engine temperature, oil level, vehicle speed, engine speed, distance driven and the time elapsed since your last maintenance service, and calls for the next maintenance service accordingly. Gear range Number of gears which are available to the automatic transmission for shifting. The automatic gear shifting process can be adapted to specific operating conditions using the gear selector lever. GPS (Global Positioning System) Satellite-based system for relaying geographic location information to and from vehicles equipped with special receivers. Employs DVD digital maps for navigation. Instrument cluster The displays and indicator/warning lamps in the driver’s field of vision, including the tachometer, speedometer and fuel gauge. KEYLESS-GO** System for entering and operating the vehicle with only carrying the SmartKey along. Kickdown Depressing the accelerator past the point of resistance shifts the transmission down to the lowest possible gear. This very quickly accelerates the vehicle and should not be used for normal acceleration needs. Lock button Button on the door which indicates whether the door is locked or unlocked. Pushing the lock button down on an individual door from inside will lock that door. Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) Maintenance service indicator in the multifunction display that informs the driver when the next vehicle maintenance service is due. The Maintenance System in your vehicle tracks distance driven and the time elapsed since your last maintenance service, and calls for the next maintenance service accordingly. Maybach Assistance Center Voice connection between the Customer Assistance Center and the vehicle passengers for information about
operating the vehicle
Maybach products
Maybach services Maybach Relationship Manager Your personal contact person at Maybach Studios for any questions you might have regarding your Maybach. 473 Technical terms Memory function Used to store three individual seat, steering wheel and mirror positions for each SmartKey. Multifunction display The display field in the instrument cluster used to present information provided by the control system. Poly-V-belt drive Drives engine-components (alternator, AC compressor, etc.) from the engine. MON (Motor Octane Number) The Motor Octane Number for gasoline as determined by a standardized method. It is an indication of a gasoline's ability to resist undesired detonation (knocking). The average of both the MON (Motor Octane Number) and ->RON (Research Octane Number) is posted at the pump, also known as ANTI-KNOCK INDEX. Multifunction steering wheel Steering wheel with buttons for operating the control system. Power train Collective term designating all components used to generate and transmit motive power to the drive axles, including: 474 Overspeed range Engine speeds within the red marking on the tachometer dial. Avoid this engine speed range, as it may result in serious engine damage that is not covered by the Maybach Limited Warranty. Parktronic System which uses visual and acoustic signals to assist the driver during parking maneuvers.
Engine
Clutch/torque converter
Transmission
Transfer case
Drive shaft
Differential
Axle shafts/axles Technical terms Program mode selector switch Used to switch the automatic transmission between sport operation S and comfort operation C. REST (Residual engine heat utilization) Feature that uses the engine heat stored in the coolant to heat the vehicle interior for a short time after the engine has been turned off. Restraint systems Seat belts, belt tensioners, airbags and child restraint systems. As independent systems, their protective functions complement one another. RON (Research Octane Number) The Research Octane Number for gasoline as determined by a standardized method. It is an indication of a gasoline's ability to resist undesired detonation (knocking). The average of both the ->MON (Motor Octane Number) and RON (Research Octane Number) is posted at the pump, also known as ANTI-KNOCK INDEX. SBC (Sensotronic Brake Control) Electronically controlled hydraulic braking system for increased braking safety and comfort. Shift lock When the vehicle is parked, this lock prevents the transmission gear selector lever from being moved out of position P without SmartKey turned/ KEYLESS-GO** start/stop button pressed and brake pedal depressed. SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) Seat belts, emergency tensioning device and airbags. Though independent systems, they are closely interfaced to provide effective occupant protection. Tele Aid System (Telematic Alarm Identification on Demand) The Tele Aid system consists of three types of response: automatic and manual emergency, roadside assistance and information. Tele Aid is initially activated by completing a subscriber agreement and placing an acquaintance call. The Tele Aid system is operational provided that the vehicle’s battery is charged, properly connected, not damaged and cellular and GPS coverage is available. 475 Technical terms Telematics A combination of the terms "telecommunications" and "informatics." Tightening torque Force times lever arm (e.g. a lug wrench) with which threaded fasteners such as wheel bolts are tightened. Tire speed rating Part of a tire designation; indicates the speed range for which a tire is approved. Traction Force exerted by the vehicle on the road via the tires. 476 Vehicle level control The ground clearance of the vehicle is automatically controlled according to a selected setting and speed. The driver can set the ground clearance manually, for example, on very rough roads. VIN (Vehicle Identification Number) The number set by the manufacturer and placed on the body to uniquely identify each vehicle produced. Voice control system Voice control system for car phones, portable cell phones and audio systems (radio, CD, etc.). Index A ABS 471 Indicator lamp 25, 97, 385 Messages in display 392 Warning lamp 385 ABS/ESP Warning lamp 25, 384 Activating Air conditioner (cooling) 208, 217 Air recirculation mode 205 Anti-theft alarm system 105 Automatic climate control 203, 215 Central locking (control system) 181 Charcoal filter 207 Distance warning function** 244 Distronic** 240 Easy-entry/exit feature 183 Exterior rear view mirror parking position 194 Hazard warning flasher 148 High beam 147 Immobilizer 104 Rear window defroster 198 Residual heat 208, 217 Seat heater 138 Tow-away alarm 106 Adaptive Damping System (ADS) 471 Adding Coolant 360 Engine oil 359 Additional turn signals 430 Adjusting Air distribution 203, 215 Air volume 204, 216 Exterior rear view mirrors 61 Head restraint Front seats 59 Rear seats 129 Head restraint height 58 Head restraint tilt 59 Instrument cluster illumination 153 Interior rear view mirror 61 Mirrors 61 Passenger seat 50 Rear seats Head restraint tilt 129 Right front passenger seat 49 Seat 57, 58 Seat backrest tilt 58 Seat cushion depth 58 Seat cushion tilt 58 Seat fore and aft adjustment 58 Seat height 58 Seat in the lumbar region 137 Seat in the shoulder region 137 Steering wheel 23, 60 Volume of two-way intercom* 46, 47, 48 Air conditioner (cooling) Turning off 208, 216, 217 Air conditioning refrigerant 465 Air pressure see Tire inflation pressure Air recirculation mode 205 Activating 205 Deactivating 206 Air vent grille 23, 258 Air volume Adjusting 204, 216 AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp 390 Airbags 79 BabySmartTM airbag deactivation system 471 BabySmartTM deactivation system 89 Children 80 Airmatic DC 247, 471 Damping button 28, 29, 248 Level control button 28, 29, 249 Messages in display 397 Setting vehicle level 248 Switch Damping button 248 477 Index Alarm Audible 104 Visual 104 Alarm system 104 Alignment bolt 422, 438, 471 Ambient lighting 46, 47, 48, 152 Setting 180 Anti-glare Automatic 192 Anti-lock Brake System see ABS Anti-theft alarm system 104 Activating 105 Canceling the alarm 105 Deactivating 105 Indicator lamp 27 Anti-theft systems 104 Anti-theft alarm system 104 Immobilizer 104 Tow-away alarm 106 Armrest Storage compartment in front of armrest 268 Ashtray 28, 29, 272 In the front 272 In the rear 46, 47, 48, 273 Vehicles with rear center seat* 261, 262 At the gas station 352 478 Audio menu 163 Selecting radio station 163 Selecting satellite radio station (USA only) 163 Automatic anti-glare function 30 Automatic anti-glare rear view mirrors 192 Switching off 193 Switching on 193 Automatic central locking Activating/deactivating (control system) 181 Automatic climate control 199 Adjusting air volume 204, 216 Air recirculation mode 205 Cockpit 200 Control unit Rear passenger compartment of Maybach 57 210 Rear passenger compartment of Maybach 62 212 Defrosting 205 Front passenger compartment 27 Operating from the rear 209 Overview of rear passenger compartment Maybach 57 210 Maybach 62 212 Rear compartment 33, 35, 37 Rear window defroster 198 Setting the temperature 203, 215 Automatic headlamp mode 143, 144 Automatic lighting control Activating 148 Deactivating 149 Automatic locking when driving 124 Automatic shift program Automatic transmission 189 Automatic transmission 185 Automatic shift program 189 Driving tips 190 Emergency operation (limp home mode) 191 Fluid level 359 Gear ranges 187 Gear selector lever position 188 Gear shifting malfunctions 191 Gearshift pattern 66 Kickdown 190 One-touch gearshifting 186 Program mode selector 28, 29 Selector lever 28, 29 Selector lever position 185 Transmission fluid 359 Winter program mode 189 AUX sockets 39, 41, 43, 45, 267 Index B BabySmartTM Airbag deactivation system 89, 471 Compatible child seats 89, 471 Installing/Removing 92 Self-test 90 Backrest supports Lumbar region 137 Shoulder region 137 Back-up lamps 431 Bulbs 431 BAS 97, 471 Batteries, SmartKey Check lamp 110, 115 Replacing 428 Batteries, vehicle 361, 441 Charging 443 Charging the consumer battery 279 Disconnecting 443 For electrical consumers 441 For starter 441 Reconnecting 444 Reinstalling 443 Removing 443 Battery charge maintenance socket 279 Battery discharged Jump starting 445 Battery indicator lamp SmartKey 108, 112 Beverage holder In the rear 39, 41 Bi-xenon headlamps 430, 471 Blocking Rear window operation 94 Bottle holder 271 In the rear 39, 41, 269 Brake Assist System see BAS Brake fluid 354, 466 Brake lamp Bulbs 431 High mounted 431 Brake pads Message in display 400 Brake warning lamp 25 Brakes 344 Warning lamp 388 Break-in period 342 Bulbs, replacing 430 Back-up lamps 431 Brake lamps 431 Fog lamps 430 Front lamps 430 High beam 430 High beam flasher 430 License plate lamps 431, 433 Parking lamps 430, 431, 433 Rear fog lamp 431 Side marker lamps 430, 433 Standing lamps 430, 431, 433 Tail lamp assemblies 431 Turn signal lamps 430, 431 Turn signals 433 C Calling up Distronic** settings 168 Maintenance service indicator 374 Range (distance to empty) 170 CAN system 471 Cargo tie-down hooks 256 Carpet Cleaning 380 Catalytic converter 350 CD changer Compartment for 39, 43, 45, 266, 267 Storage compartment for 41 Cellular phone holder Closing 290 Opening 290 Cellular phone in the front 290 Cradle Removing 291 479 Index Cellular phone in the rear 291 Cradle Removing 293 Delayed switch-off time 292 Holder Re-inserting 293 Inserting the cradle 291 Making calls Hands-free mode 293 Private mode 292 Center console AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp 390 Ashtray 272 Lighter 273 Centigrade Setting temperature units 175 Central locking Automatic 124 From inside 125 Switch 27, 46, 47, 48, 125 Switch in the front 27 Switch in the rear 46, 47, 48 Switching on/off (control system) 181 Unlocking from inside 125 Central unlocking Switch 27, 46, 47, 48, 125 Switch in the front 27 Switch in the rear 46, 47, 48 480 Champagne flute holder 271 Setting down champagne flutes 271 Changing Key setting 182 Vehicle level 249 Charcoal filter 207 Activating 207 Deactivating 207 Charging Vehicle battery 443 Vehicle consumer battery 279 CHECK ENGINE malfunction Indicator lamp 389 Checking Coolant level 360 Oil level 354, 356, 357 Tire inflation pressure 354 Vehicle lighting 354 Checking tire pressure electronically 365 Child safety Airbags 80 Override switch 94 Child safety switch see Blocking of rear window operation Child seat anchors LATCH-type 92 Children in the vehicle 87 Cleaning Carpet 380 Distronic** system sensor cover 378 Electrotransparent roof* 382 Gear selector lever 380 Hard plastic trim items 380 Headlamps 192 Headliner 380 Instrument cluster 380 Leather upholstery 381 Light alloy wheels 379 Parktronic system sensor 378 Plastic and rubber parts 381 Seat belts 381 Steering wheel 380 Tumbler holder 380 Windows 379 Wiper blades 378 Wood trims 381 Clock 25 In the rear 33, 35, 37, 156 Instrument cluster 156 Closing 76 Cellular phone holder 290 Compartment for the front telephone 260 Cup holders Cockpit 269, 270 Curtains 27, 46, 280, 281 Index Electrotransparent roof* Screen 231 Folding table* 276 Front door windows 31, 49, 50 Glove box 259 Hood 356 Left rear side window curtain* with Pocket PC* 323 Partition curtain* with Pocket PC* 322 Partition* 47, 48, 284 Partition* curtain 29, 47, 48 Power tilt/sliding sunroof (Maybach 57) 222 Power tilt/sliding sunroof (Maybach 62) 225, 227, 228 In an emergency 425 Power window with SmartKey 220 Power window with SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** 220 Rear door windows 31 Rear doors automatically from the inside (Maybach 62) 117 Rear window curtain with Pocket PC* 326 Refrigerator** 278 Right rear side window curtain* with Pocket PC* 325 Side windows 219 Trunk 119, 120 Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO** 121, 122 Tumbler holder In the rear 270 Windows 218 Closing in an emergency Power tilt/sliding sunroof 425, 426 Cockpit 22, 471 Cockpit management and data system (COMAND) 472 COMAND 27, 472 COMAND see separate operating instructions Combination switch 23, 70, 71, 147 High beam flasher 147 Communication system 288 Compartment for the front telephone 260 Closing 260 Consumer battery Removing 443 Control and operation of radio transmitters 349 Control system 157, 472 Audio menu 163 Convenience submenu 182 Digital speedometer display 162 Distronic** menu 168 Functions 161 Instrument cluster submenu 175 Lighting submenu 176 Menus 160, 161 Multifunction display 157 Multifunction steering wheel 158 Navigation menu 168 Operating 26, 158 Selecting radio system 163 Settings menu 172 Standard display 162 Standard display menu 162 Submenus 161 Trip computer menu 169 Vehicle status message memory menu 171 Vehicle submenu 181 Convenience closing feature 221 481 Index Convenience submenu 182 Activating easy-entry/exit feature 183 Setting automatic locking 181 Setting fold-in function for exterior rear view mirrors 184 Setting parking position for exterior rear view mirror 184 Coolant 360, 467 Adding 360 Checking level 360 Messages in display 403, 404 Temperature 351 Temperature gauge 25, 154 Warning lamp 404 Coolant level 354 Checking 360 Coolant temperature gauge 25 Courtesy lighting 149 Cruise control 233, 472 Canceling 234 Driving downhill 234 Driving uphill 234 Fine adjustment 235 Lever 23, 240 Setting current speed 234 Setting speeds 235 482 Cup holder 27, 269 Cockpit 269 In the rear 269 Rear Cleaning 380 Curtain Opening/Closing 27, 46, 280 Rear side window* 46, 281 Operating from cockpit 281 Operating from the rear 282 Rear side windows* 27, 46, 47, 48 Opening/Closing 46, 281 Rear window 27, 46, 280 Operating from cockpit 280 Operating from the rear 46, 47, 48, 281, 286 D Damping button Airmatic DC 28, 29, 248 Daytime running lamp mode 145 Setting 177 Deactivating Air conditioner (cooling) 208, 216 Air recirculation mode 206 Anti-theft alarm system 105 Central locking (control system) 181 Cruise control 234 Defrost 205 Distance warning function** 244 Distronic** 242 Hazard warning flasher 148 Headlamps 75 Immobilizer 104 Interior lighting delayed switchoff 180 Rear window defroster 198 Residual heat 208, 217 Seat heater 138 Seat ventilation* 139 Tow-away alarm 106 Deactivation button Parking assist (Parktronic system) 28, 29, 255 Deceleration With Distronic** 239 Deep water see Standing water Defrosting 205 Delayed switch-off Interior lighting 180 Delayed switch-off time Cellular phone in the rear 292 Dialing A number (telephone) 166 Digital clock 25 Digital speedometer 162 Direction of rotation (tires) 364 Index Discharged battery Jump starting 445 Disconnecting Vehicle batteries 443 Displays Digital speedometer 162 Distronic** 237 Instrument cluster 25 Messages 358 Showing malfunctions 171 Vehicle status messages 391 Distance Decreasing in Distronic** 243 Increasing in Distronic** 243 Setting in Distronic** 243 Warning function** 243 Distance warning function** 243 Activating 244 Deactivating 244 Distronic** warning lamp 243 Intermittent warning sound 243 Switching off 243 Switching on 243 Symbol in multifunction display 168 Distance warning lamp 25 Distronic** 236, 472 Activated 239 Activating 240 Calling up settings 168, 239 Cleaning system sensor 378 Cruise control lever 240 Deactivated 239 Deactivating 242 Deceleration 239 Decreasing distance 243 Decreasing time interval 243 Displays in the speedometer dial 237 Distance to empty (range) Calling up 169 Distance warning function** 243 Driving hints 244 Fine adjustment 241 Increasing distance 243 Increasing time interval 243 Intermittent signal tone 238 Malfunction indicator lamp 385 Menu 239 Messages in display 393 Sensor cover 378 Setting a higher speed 241 Setting a lower speed 241 Setting following distance 243 Setting the current speed 240 Setting to last stored speed ("Resume" function) 242 Thumbwheel for setting distance 28, 29 Warning and indicator lamps 238 Warning lamp 25, 385 Door Inside door handle 117 Door control panel 23 Driver’s 31 In the rear Maybach 57 49 Maybach 62 50 Door handle 31, 49, 50 Lock button (KEYLESS-GO**) 76 Doors Closing the rear doors automatically from the inside (Maybach 62) 117 Locking knob 117 Message in display 407 Opening from inside vehicle 117 Remote rear door closing switch 118 483 Index Downhill driving Cruise control 234 Downshifting One-touch gearshifting 186 Drinking and driving 343 Driving 63, 68 Abroad 349 General instructions 343 Hydroplaning 346 In winter 348 Through standing water With Distronic** 244 Driving abroad 349 Driving hints SBC brake system 103 Driving instructions 343 Driving off 345 Driving safety systems 96 ABS 96 BAS 97 ESP 98, 473 SBC brake system 101 Driving systems 233 Airmatic DC 247 Cruise control 233 Distronic** 236 Parktronic 251 Vehicle level control 248 484 Driving tips Automatic transmission 190 Dual control Airmatic DC 247 DVD player Compartment for 39, 43, 45, 266, 267 Storage compartment for 41 E Easy-entry/exit feature 127 Activating 183 ELCODE 472 Electrical fuses 450 Electrical system 461 Electronic Stability Program (ESP) control switch 28, 29 Electronic Stability Program see ESP Electrotransparent roof lighting* 152 Electrotransparent roof* 230 Cleaning 382 Lowering panel 382 Making opaque 231, 232 Making transparent 231, 232 Opaque/transparent 48 Opening 382 Opening/closing screen 231, 232 Operating from the cockpit 230 Operating from the rear 232 Operating the screen 30, 230 To make opaque/transparent with Pocket PC* 324 To open/close the screen with Pocket PC* 330 Emergency call system 294 Emergency calls Initiating an emergency call 297 With Tele Aid 296 Emergency operation (limp home mode) 191 Emergency operations Closing power tilt/sliding sunroof 425 Locking the vehicle 424 Opening power tilt/sliding sunroof 425 Remote door unlock 302 Unlocking the trunk lid 424 Unlocking the vehicle 423 Emergency tensioning device (ETD) 86 Emergency tensioning device see ETD Emission control 350 Emission control information label, includes both federal and California certification exhaust emission standards 456 Ending A call (telephone) 166 Index Engine Compartment 355 Message in display 389 Oils 465 Turning off with KEYLESS-GO** 75 Engine cleaning 377 Engine compartment 355 Fuse box in 451 Hood 355 Engine malfunction Indicator lamp 25 Engine malfunction indicator lamp 389 Engine number 473 Engine oil 356 Adding 359 Additives 465 Checking level 356, 357 Consumption 356 Display messages 407 Messages in display 358, 408 Viscosity 473 Engine oil level see Oil level Entry position Messages in display 409 ESP 98, 473 Switching off 99 Switching on 100 Warning lamp 384 ETD 86, 473 Exterior lamp switch 23, 70, 143 Exterior lamps Warning sound 144 Exterior mirror adjustment 31 Exterior rear view mirrors Adjusting 61 Folding 195 Parking position for 184 External communication 288 Listening 288 Speaking 288 External communication (special order equipment) 288 F Fahrenheit Setting temperature units 175 Fastening the seat belts 63 Fine adjustment Cruise control 235 Distronic** 241 First aid kit 422 Flat tire 436 Lowering the vehicle 439 Mounting the spare wheel 436 Preparing the vehicle 436 Speed limitation 369 Flexible Service System (FSS, Canada vehicles) 473 Flexible Service System, Canada vehicles (FSS) 373 Fog lamp Rear 146, 431 Fog lamps Front Messages in display 412 Switching on 146 Replacing bulbs 430 Folding Exterior rear view mirrors 195 Folding table* 39, 41, 275 Closing 276 Opening 275 Folding the exterior mirrors in and out 31 Front airbags 83 Front center console 27 Lower part 28 Upper part 27, 28 Front door windows Closing 31, 49, 50 Opening 31, 49, 50 485 Index Front lamps Messages in display 411–412 Replacing bulbs 430, 432 Switching off 143 Switching on 143 Front passenger seat Setting from rear 135 Front storage compartment 23 Front storage compartment for telephone Opening 260 FSS (Flexible Service System, Canada vehicles) 373, 473 Fuel 353 Fuel reserve warning lamp 389 Premium unleaded gasoline 353 Fuel consumption statistics From the start 169 Since last reset 170 Fuel content Gauge 25 Fuel filler flap 352 Locking 352 Unlocking 352 Fuel requirements 466 Fuel reserve Warning lamp 25 Fuel tank Filler flap 352 486 Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. 464 Functions (control system) 161 Fuse box 451, 452 Fuse chart 422 Fuses 450 Fuse box in engine compartment 451 Fuse box in passenger compartment 452 Fuse box in the trunk 452 Fuse chart 422 Fuse extractor 422 Replacing 451 Spare fuses 422 G Garage door opener 30, 304 Integrated remote control 305 Gasoline additives 467 Gasoline see Fuel Gear range 473 Automatic transmission 187 Limiting 187 Shifting into optimal 186 Gear range limit Canceling 186 Gear selector lever Cleaning 380 Position 188 Gearshift pattern 66 Glare From the front 197 From the sides 197 Global locking KEYLESS-GO** 114 SmartKey 109 Global Positioning System (GPS) Global unlocking KEYLESS-GO** 114 SmartKey 109 Glove box 23, 258, 259 Closing 259 Heating and cooling 209 Lid release 23 Lock 23 Opening 259 Good visibility 192 GPS 295, 473 473 H Hand-held transmitter Programming integrated remote control (Garage door opener) 305 Hard plastic trim items Cleaning 380 Hazard warning flasher 147 Switching off 148 Switching on 148 Index Head restraint Adjusting 58, 59 Front seats 59 Rear seats 129 Headlamp cleaning system 354, 362 Washer button 23, 192 Headlamps Automatic control 144 Bi-xenon 430, 471 Cleaning 377 Cleaning system 192, 362, 469 Refilling washer fluid 362 Switching 70 Switching off 75 Washer button 23, 192 Headliner Cleaning 380 Headliner lamps and pillar uplights* 152 Lighting 47 Headphone jacks 39, 41, 43, 45, 266, 267 Headphones Storage compartments In rear doors 261, 262 Heated steering wheel 308 Lever 23 Height adjustments Vehicle level 248 High beam 23, 147 Lamps 430 Messages in display 411 Switching 70 High beam flasher 147 Replacing bulbs 430 High beam headlamps Indicator lamp 25 Switching on 147 High mounted brake lamp 431 Hood 355 Closing 356 Message in display 409 Opening 355 Horn 23 Hydroplaning 346 I Identification labels 456 Certification label 456 Engine number 456 Vacuum line routing diagram label 456 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) 456 Immobilizer 104 Activating 104 Deactivating 104 Indicator lamps see Lamps, indicator and warning Infant and child restraint systems Installing 91, 92 Information Button for Tele Aid 300 Infrared reflecting windshield 308 Inside door handle 117 Inside rear view mirror Anti-glare 192 Installing BabySmartTM 92 Infant and child restraint systems 91, 92 Wiper blades 435 Instrument cluster 24, 153, 473 Cleaning 380 Coolant temperature gauge 154 Illumination 153 Multifunction display 157 Outside temperature indicator 155 Selecting language 176 487 Index Integrated remote control Hand-held transmitter (Garage door opener) 305 Interior lamps In the rear 46 Interior lighting Activating automatic control 148 Control In the front 30, 148 Deactivating automatic control 149 Delayed switch-off 180 In the front 30, 148 In the rear 30, 46, 150 Manual operation in the front 149 Manual operation in the rear 152 Interior rear view mirror Adjusting 61 Interior storage spaces Compartment for the front telephone 260 Glove box 259 Storage compartment in front of armrest 268 Intermittent wiping 71 488 J Jump starting 445 K Key see SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** Key, mechanical 423 Key, SmartKey 52, 108 Battery check lamp 110, 116 Checking the batteries 110 Factory setting 109 Locking 76 Replacing the batteries 428 Key, SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** Checking the batteries 116 KEYLESS-GO** 473 Closing Trunk 121, 122 Factory setting 114 Global locking 114 Global unlocking 114 Important notes 113 Locking 76 Locking the vehicle 115, 122 Opening, trunk lid 111, 116 Positions 55 Remote control 111 Start/stop button 28, 29, 55, 66 Starting the engine 66 Turning off the engine 75 Unlocking 53 Unlocking, trunk lid 111, 116 Kickdown 190, 473 Kilometers/miles in speedometer 175 Km/h or mph in speedometer 175 Knob for instrument cluster illumination 25 L Lamp bulbs, exterior 430 Lamps Low beam headlamps 430 Messages in display 410–413 Lamps, exterior Front 430 Light sensor 410 Messages in display 412 Rear 431 Lamps, indicator and warning ABS 25, 385 ABS/ESP 25, 98 Anti-theft alarm system 27 Battery (SmartKey) 110, 116 Brake warning lamp 25 Brakes 388 Center console 390 CHECK ENGINE 389 Index Coolant 403 Distance warning lamp 25 Distronic** 25, 238, 385 Engine diagnostics 389 Engine malfunction 25 ESP 384 Fuel reserve 25, 389 High beam headlamp 25 Instrument cluster 384–389 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF 27, 390 Restraint system 25 SBC 101 Seat belt telltale 25 Seat belts 386 SRS 79 Tire pressure (Vehicles produced after approximately November 2003) 25, 386 Tow away alarm 105 Turn signals 25 Language Multifunction display 176 Setting 176 Layout of poly-V-belt drive 457 Leather upholstery Cleaning 381 Level control button Airmatic DC 28, 29, 249 Level control system Airmatic DC 247 Lever For cruise control 240 for heated steering wheel 23 License plate lamps Replacing bulbs 431, 433 Light alloy wheels Cleaning 379 Light sensor 410 Lighter 28, 29, 46, 47, 48 Center console 273 Rear compartment 274 Lighting 143 Ambient 46, 47, 48, 152 Dimming 46, 47, 48 Ambient and roof* Dimming 152 Automatic headlamp mode 144 Combination switch 147 Daytime running lamp mode 145 Electrotransparent roof* 152 Exterior lamp switch 143 Front fog lamps 146 Headliner illumination strips* Dimming 152 Headliner lamps and pillar uplights* 47, 152 Dimming 47 High beam 147 High beam flasher 147 Instrument cluster illumination 153 Locator lighting 145 Low beam 143 Night security illumination 145 Parking lamps 143 Rear fog lamp 146 Settings (control system) 176 Limiting the gear range 187 Limp home mode 191 Loading 256 Cargo tie-down hooks 256 Instructions 256 489 Index Locator lighting 145 Setting 178 Lock button 473 SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** 112 Trunk 115 Lock button on the door handle (KEYLESS-GO**) 76 Locking 74, 76 Central locking switch 27, 46, 47, 48 Fuel filler flap 352 Vehicle From the front 125 From the rear 125 Vehicle in an emergency 424 Vehicle with KEYLESS-GO** 115, 122 with the KEYLESS-GO** 76 with the SmartKey 76 Locking and unlocking 108, 109, 114 Locking knob Doors 117 Locking the vehicle 122 Loss of keys 111, 116 Loss of Service and Warranty Information Booklet 455 490 Low beam headlamps Bulbs 430 Messages in display 411, 412 Lowering Power tilt/sliding sunroof (Maybach 62) 228, 229 Vehicle 439 M Main dimensions 462 Main odometer 25 Maintenance service Calling up the maintenance service indicator 374 Overdue 373 Maintenance service indicator Calling up 374 Clearing 373 Resetting 374 Maintenance, U.S. vehicles 373 Making calls Hands-free mode 293 Private mode 292 Manual operations Interior lighting control in the front 149 Interior lighting control in the rear 152 Locking the vehicle 424 Power tilt/sliding sunroof 425, 426 Unlocking the driver’s door 423 Unlocking the trunk lid 424 Massage function 137 MAXCOOL maximum cooling 205 Maybach Assistance Center 474 Maybach Relationship Manager 474 Maybach 62 with partition* Storage pocket 37, 265 Maybach 62 without partition* Storage pocket 265 Mechanical key 423 Locking tab 108, 112 Memory function 140, 474 Recalling positions from memory 141 Storing exterior rear view mirror parking positions 142 Storing key dependent settings 141 Index Menus Audio 163 Distronic** 168, 239 In control system 160, 161 Navigation 168 Settings menu 172 Standard display 162 Trip computer 169 Vehicle status message memory 171 Microphone 288 Changing switch (Microphone) 288 External communication 288 Miles/kilometers in speedometer Setting 175 Mirrors 61 Activating exterior rear view mirror parking position 194 Adjusting 61 Automatic anti-glare for rear view mirror 192 Exterior rear view mirror parking position 184 Exterior rear view mirror parking positions 184 Storing exterior rear view mirror parking position 142 MON (Motor Octane Number) 353, 474 Mph or km/h in speedometer 175 Multicontour seat 136 Driver’s seat/Front passenger seat 136 Rear passenger seats 39, 43 Rear seats 41, 45 Multicontour seats Rear seats (Maybach 57) 136 Rear seats (Maybach 62) 137 Multifunction display 25, 26, 157, 158, 162, 474 Selecting language 176 Standard display 161, 162 Multifunction display messages ABS 392 Airmatic DC 397 Brake fluid 400 Brake pads 400 Check engine 389 Coolant 404 Coolant level 403 Distronic** 393 Doors 407 Engine 389 Engine oil level 408 Entry position 409 Hood 409 Lamps 412 Parking brake 399 Power tilt/sliding sunroof 414 SBC brake system 400, 401 Seat belt system 414 Selector lever 396 SmartKey 410 SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** 409 Steering oil 415 Tele Aid 396 Tires 416–421 Trunk 415 Washer fluid 415 Multifunction steering wheel 23, 26, 158, 474 Buttons 158 N Navigation system Operating 168 See separate COMAND operating instructions Navigation system DVD drive 268 Night security illumination 145 Non-smokers equipment* 274 491 Index O Occupant safety 78 Children and airbags 80 Oil Adding 359 Checking level 357 Consumption 356 Viscosity 473 Oil level Checking One-touch gearshifting 186 Canceling gear range limit 186 Downshifting 186 Upshifting 186 Opening Ashtray 272 Cellular phone holder 290 Curtains 27, 46, 280, 281 Doors from the inside 117 Electrotransparent roof* 382 Screen 231, 232 Folding table* 275 Front door windows 31, 49, 50 Front storage compartment for telephone 260 Fuel filler flap 352 Glove box 259 Hood 355 492 Left rear side window curtain* with Pocket PC* 323 Partition curtain* with Pocket PC* 322 Partition* 47, 48, 285 Partition* curtain 29, 47, 48 Power tilt/sliding sunroof (Maybach 57) 222 Power tilt/sliding sunroof (Maybach 62) 225, 227, 228 Power tilt/sliding sunroof In an emergency 425 Power window with SmartKey 220 Power window with SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** 220 power window with SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** 220 Rear door windows 31 Rear window curtain with Pocket PC* 326 Refrigerator** 277 Remote trunk lid switch 119 Right rear side window curtain* with Pocket PC* 325 Side windows 219 Tilt/sliding sunroof 30 Trunk 118, 119 Trunk lid 108, 112 Trunk lid with KEYLESS-GO** 111, 116 Trunk lid with SmartKey 111, 116 Windows 218, 219 Opening button Trunk lid 108, 112 Opening in an emergency Power tilt/sliding sunroof 425, 426 Operating COMAND see separate operating instructions Control system 26, 158 Electrotransparent roof* 230 Electrotransparent roof* screen 30 Navigation system 168 Radio 163 Radio transmitters 349 Operation Pocket PC* 318 Ornamental moldings 377 Outside microphone 288 Outside temperature indicator 155 Instrument cluster 25, 33, 35, 37 Overdue maintenance service 373 Overhead control panel 30 Override switch for rear passenger compartment 31, 94 Overspeed range 474 Index P Paintwork 376 Panic button 108, 112 Parking 74, 345 Parking assist (Parktronic system) Deactivation button 28, 29, 255 Parking brake 74 Message in display 399 Release 23, 68 Step 74 Parking brake pedal 23 Parking lamps 143 Replacing bulbs 430, 431, 433 Parking position Exterior rear view mirrors 142, 184, 194 Parktronic 251, 474 Cleaning sensors 378 Malfunctioning 255 Warning indicator 23, 39, 41, 43, 45, 253, 254 Warning sound 255 Partition* 284 Opening/Closing 47, 48, 285 Opening/Closing the curtain 29, 47, 48 To open/close with Pocket PC* 327 Parts service 454 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF Indicator lamp 27, 89, 390 Passenger compartment 349 Fuse box in 452 Passenger seat Adjusting from the rear 49, 50 Pedals 343 Phone book Loading 166 Quick search 167 Phone number Dialing 166 Redialing 167 Plastic and rubber parts Cleaning 381 Pliers, universal (vehicle tool kit) 422 Pocket PC* 309, 312, 315 Display 317 Electrotransparent roof* To make opaque/transparent 324 To open/close the screen 330 Left rear side window Opening/Closing the curtain* 323 Main menu function buttons 318 Maybach 57 310 Cradle 310 Holder 310 Inserting 310 Removing 310 Maybach 62 311 Cradle 311 Inserting 311 Removing 311 Navigation button 318 Operation 318 Partition* Opening/Closing the curtain 322 To open/close 327 Pocket PC settings 333 Power tilt/sliding sunroof To open/close 328 To raise/lower 332 Rear seats Extending and retracting rear seat head restraints 331 Rear window Opening/Closing the curtain 326 Removing and inserting the stylus 313, 316 493 Index Right rear side window Opening/Closing the curtain* 325 Selecting main menu Light 320 Manual Adjustments 326 Privacy 321 Switching interior lighting on/off 320 Switching off 314, 317 Switching on 313, 316 Troubleshooting 339 Pocket PC* (vehicles with a rear center seat*) 309 Poly-V-belt drive 475 Positions (Memory function) Recalling from memory 141 Storing in memory 141 Power assistance 343 Power closing assist for doors and trunk lid 124 Power tilt/sliding sunroof 222 Closing in an emergency 425, 426 In the rear Lowering 47 Message in display 414 Opening in an emergency 425, 426 Synchronizing 224, 229 To open/close with Pocket PC* 328 To raise/lower with Pocket PC* 332 494 Power tilt/sliding sunroof (Maybach 57) Closing 222 Opening 222 Stopping 224 Synchronizing 224, 229 Power tilt/sliding sunroof (Maybach 62) Closing 225 Opening 225 Opening/closing 227, 228 Opening/closing screen 226, 228 Operating from cockpit 226 Operating from the rear passenger compartment 227 Raising/lowering 228, 229 Stopping 227, 228 Power train 475 Power windows 218 Blocking of rear window operation Opening and closing with SmartKey 220 Opening and closing with SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** 220 Side windows 218 Synchronizing 220 Power-wash 376 Practical hints First aid kit 422 Fuses 450 Lamp in center console 390 Lamps in instrument cluster 384 Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display 391 Vehicle tool kit 422 Premium unleaded gasoline 466 Problems while driving 73 Program mode selector automatic transmission 28, 29 Program mode selector switch 475 PULSE function (Massage function) 137 Q Quick search Phone book 167 R Radial-ply tires Summer tires 460 Winter tires 460 Radio Selecting satellite radio station (USA only) 163 Selecting stations 163 Index Radio transmitters, control and operation 349 Raising Power tilt/sliding sunroof (Maybach 62) 228, 229 Range (distance to empty) Calling up 170 Reading lamp In the front 30 In the rear 46, 47, 48 Rear bench seat Maybach 57 with rear center seat* 42 Maybach 62 with rear center seat* 44 Rear center console 46 Maybach 57 46 Maybach 62 with electrotransparent roof* 48 Maybach 62 with power tilt/sliding sunroof 47 Rear compartment Ashtray 273 Lighter 274 Rear door control panel Maybach 57 49 Maybach 62 50 Rear door windows Closing 31 Opening 31 Rear fog lamp 431 Bulb 431 Switching on 146 Rear interior lamps Switching on/off 152 Rear lamps Messages in display 412–413 Rear lamps see Tail lamps Rear passenger compartment Control panel 32 Maybach 57 32 Maybach 62 34 Maybach 62 with partition* 34, 36 Rear seat adjustment 49, 50 Rear seat head restraints Extending 134 Extending/retracting 28, 29 Retracting 133 Rear seats 129 Adjusting Head restraint tilt 129 Extending and retracting rear seat head restraints 133 Extending and retracting rear seat head restraints with Pocket PC* 331 Extending/retracting head restraints 28, 29 Maybach 57 38 Maybach 62 40 Rear view mirror 30 Rear view mirrors automatic antiglare 192 Rear view mirrors see Mirrors Rear window Blocking operation 94 Rear window defroster 198 Activating 198 Deactivating 198 Reconnecting Vehicle batteries 444 Recovery services For stolen vehicle 303 Refrigerator** Closing 278 Controlling temperature 278 Opening 277 Rear center armrest 266 Switching on/off 278 Vehicle care 376 Refueling 352 Regular checks 354 Reinstalling vehicle batteries 443 Remote control Pocket PC* (vehicles with a rear center seat*) 309 SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** 111 495 Index Remote controls Integrated (Garage door opener) 305 Remote door unlock With Tele Aid 302 Remote rear door closing switch Doors 118 Remote trunk lid switch Trunk 23, 119 Removing BabySmartTM 92 Vehicle batteries 443 Wheel 438 Replacing Bulbs 430 Front lamp bulbs 432 Fuses 451 License plate lamp bulbs 433 Parking lamp bulbs 433 Rear lamp bulbs 431 Side marker lamp bulbs 433 Wiper blades 434 Reset button 25 Reset button in the instrument cluster 172 Resetting All functions (control system) 172 Fuel consumption 170 Maintenance service indicator 374 Trip odometer 154 496 Residual heat utilization 208, 217, 475 Residual ventilation 208, 217 REST (Residual engine heat utilization) 475 Restraint system Indicator lamp 25 Restraint systems 78 Airbags 79 Emergency tensioning device (ETD) 86 Seat belt force limiter 86 Seat belts 84 Rims (light alloy) 460 Rims and Tires 459 Roadside Assistance Tele Aid 298 RON (Research Octane Number) 353, 475 Roof lighting Switching on 231 Roof lighting* Roof lining Lighting* 48 Rubber parts Cleaning 381 S SBC brake system 475 Activation 102 Deactivation 103 Driving hints 103 Messages in display 400, 401 Self-check 102 Warning lamp 101 Screwdriver (vehicle tool kit) 422 Seat Adjusting 57, 58 Fore and aft adjustment 58 Seat heating 138 Seat ventilation* 139 Seat adjustment 31, 49, 50 Seat backrest tilt Adjusting 58 Seat belt Telltale 25 Seat belt force limiter 86 Seat belt system Message in display 414 Seat belts 84 Cleaning 381 Fastening 63 Telltale 386 Index Seat cushion depth Adjusting 58 Seat cushion tilt Adjusting 58 Seat heating 31, 49, 50, 138 Seat height Adjusting 58 Seat ventilation* 31, 49, 50, 139 Switching off 139 Switching on/off 139 Seats Adjusting lumbar support 137 Adjusting shoulder support 137 Massage function 137 Securing cargo Cargo tie-down hooks 256 Selector lever Message in display 396 Position 185 Selector lever for automatic transmission 28, 29 Selector lever lock 66 Self-test BabySmartTM airbag deactivation system 90 Tele Aid 295 Sensotronic Brake Control see SBC Service (maintenance) 373 Service life (tires) 364 Service System, Canada vehicles see FSS Setting Ambient lighting 180 Convenience functions 182 Cruise control 234 Daytime running lamp mode 177 Digital clock 25 Distronic** time interval 243 Exterior rear view mirror parking position 184 Following distance in Distronic** 243 Front passenger seat 135 Higher speed in cruise control 235 Higher speed in Distronic** 241 Individual vehicle settings 172 Interior lighting delayed switchoff 180 Lamps and lighting (control system) 176 Language, multifunction display 176 Last stored speed ("Resume" function) in Distronic** 242 Locator lighting 178 Lower speed in cruise control 235 Lower speed in Distronic** 241 Miles/kilometers in speedometer 175 Parking position for exterior rear view mirrors 184 Slower speed in cruise control 235 Speed in cruise control 235 Speed in Distronic** 240 Speedometer display mode 175 Temperature (interior) 203, 215 Temperature indicator 175 Units Speedometer 175 Temperature 175 Vehicle level control 248 Setting current speed 234 Setting distance in Distronic** Thumbwheel 28, 29 Setting key dependency 182 Settings Calling up Distronic** 168, 239 Convenience functions 182 Factory, KEYLESS-GO** 114 Individual 109, 114 Lighting (control system) 176 Resetting all (control system) 172 Settings menu Functions in 172 Individual vehicle settings 172 Submenus 173 Shift lock 475 Shifting Gear selector lever positions 188 Into optimal gear range (automatic transmission) 186 497 Index Shoulder support Seat adjustment 137 Side impact airbags 83 Side marker lamps 430 Replacing bulbs 430, 431, 433 Side windows Automatic closing 219 Automatic opening 219 Cleaning 379 Closing 218, 219 Closing fully (Express-close) 219 Opening 218, 219 Opening fully (Express-open) 219 Stopping 220 Synchronizing power windows 220 SmartKey 52, 108 Battery check lamp 110, 116 Checking the batteries 110, 116 Factory setting 109 Global locking 109 Global unlocking 109 Individual setting 109, 114 Lock button 108 Locking 76 Loss of 111 Opening and closing power window with 220 Replacing the batteries 428 498 Restoring to factory setting 110, 115 Starting the engine 66 Unlock button 108 SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** Checking the batteries 110, 116 Lock button 112 Locking the vehicle 115 Loss of 116 Messages in display 409 Opening and closing power window with 220 Remote control 111 Restoring to factory setting 110, 115 Unlock button 112 Snow chains 372 Socket (12 V) 41, 278 Solar panel* 217 Spare fuses 422 Spare wheel 460 Mounting 436 Speed Setting current 234 Setting to last stored speed ("Resume" function) in Distronic** 242 Speed limitation With flat tire 369 Speed settings Cruise control 235 Distronic** 240, 241 Speedometer 25 Displaying gear range 187 Displays 237 In the rear 33, 35, 37 Settings units 175 Speedometer display mode Selecting 175 SRS 476 Indicator lamp 387 SRS indicator lamp 78 Standing lamps 143 Replacing bulbs 430, 431, 433 Standing water Driving instructions 349 Starter battery 441 Removing 443 Starter switch 23 Positions 54 Starting the engine With the KEYLESS-GO** 66 With the SmartKey 66 Steering column Adjusting in or out 60 Adjusting up or down 60 Index Steering oil Message in display 415 Steering wheel 60 Adjusting 60 Adjustment stalk 23 Cleaning 380 Heated 308 Stolen vehicle Recovery services 303 Stopping Power tilt/sliding sunroof (Maybach 57) 224 Power tilt/sliding sunroof (Maybach 62) 227, 228 Windows 220 Storage compartment/drawer Between the front seats (Maybach 62 with partition*) 263 Storage compartments 41, 45, 258 Armrest 268 Between rear seats 266 For headphones 39, 41, 43, 45 For wireless surround sound headphones 261, 262 Between the front seats (Maybach 62 with partition*) 263 Center armrest In the front 274 Compartment for the front telephone 260 For CD changer 39, 41, 43, 45, 266, 267 For DVD player 39, 41, 43, 45, 266, 267 Glove box 259 In front doors 31, 261 Maybach 57 261 In glove box 23, 258 In rear center console 263 In rear doors 262 For headphones 261, 262 Rear center armrest 275 Refrigerator** 266 Telephone 266 Under the driver’s seat 262 With navigation system DVD drive 268 Storage pocket Maybach 62 with partition* 37, 265 Maybach 62 without partition* 265 Storing (Memory function) Positions into memory 141 Submenus Convenience 182 In control system 161 Instrument cluster 175 Lighting 176 Selecting 173 Settings menu 173 Vehicle 181 Summer opening feature 220 Sun visor 197 Mirror in 257 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) 476 Switching off Automatic anti-glare rear view mirrors 193 Automatic central locking (control system) 181 Distance warning function** 243 ESP 99 Front lamps 143 Hazard warning flasher 148 Headlamps 75 Pocket PC* 314, 317 Refrigerator** 278 Two-way intercom* 28, 29, 46, 47, 48 499 Index Switching on Automatic anti-glare rear view mirrors 193 Automatic central locking (control system) 181 Distance warning function** 243 ESP 100 Front fog lamps 146 Front lamps 143 Hazard warning flasher 148 Headlamps 70 High beam 70, 147 Pocket PC* 313, 316 Rear fog lamp 146 Refrigerator** 278 Roof lighting 231 Seat ventilation* 139 Two-way intercom* 28, 29, 46, 47, 48 Windshield wipers 71 Symbol for activated distance warning function (Distronic**) Distance warning function** 168 Synchronizing Power tilt/sliding sunroof 224, 229 Power tilt/sliding sunroof (Maybach 57) 224, 229 Power windows 220 500 T Tachometer 25, 155 Overspeed range 155 Tail lamps Cleaning 377 Replacing bulbs 431 Tar stains 376 Tele Aid 294, 476 Emergency calls 296 Information 300 Initiating an emergency call manually 297 Messages in display 396 Remote door unlock 302 Roadside Assistance 298 Stolen Vehicle Recovery services 303 System self-check 295 Tele Aid System 294 Upgrade signals 301 Tele Aid (emergency call system) 30, 46, 47, 48 Telematics 476 Telephone 26, 158, 289 Answering a call 166 Compartment in rear center armrest 266 Dialing a number from the phone book 166 Ending a call 166 Loading phone book 166 Redialing 167 Temperature Display mode 175 Setting interior temperature 203, 215 Setting units in display 175 Tires 365 Tie-down hooks (Trunk) 256 Tightening torque 476 Tightening torque (Wheel bolts) 440 Tilt/sliding sunroof Opening/closing 30 Tire inflation pressure Checking 354, 364 Tire pressure Warning lamp (Vehicles produced after approximately November 2003) 25, 386 Index Tire speed rating 347, 476 Winter tires 371 Tire traction 347 Tires 363 Direction of rotation 364 Driving instructions 346 Messages in display 416–421 Retreads 363 Rotating 370 Service life 364 Temperature 365 Tread depth 372 Wear pattern 370 Winter 372 Tools 422 Tow-away alarm 106 Activating 106 Arming 106 Deactivating 106 Disarming 106 Disarming for transport 106 Tow-away alarm button 30 Towing eye bolt (vehicle tool kit) 422 Installing 449 Towing the vehicle 447 Traction 190, 476 Transmission see Automatic transmission Tread depth (tires) 372 Trip computer 169 Trip odometer 25 Resetting 154 Trunk Closing 120 From the inside 119 From the outside 120 Fuse box in 452 Lock button 115 Lock button, KEYLESS-GO** 115 Message in display 415 Opening 118, 119 Remote switch 119 Remote trunk lid switch 23, 119 Tie-down hooks 256 Trunk lid 118 Trunk lid emergency release 123 Unlocking and opening with SmartKey 111, 116 Unlocking in an emergency 424 Unlocking with KEYLESS-GO** 111, 116 Trunk lid closing switch 120, 121 Trunk lid emergency release 123 Tumbler holder 270 Cleaning 380 Turn signals 23, 71 Additional in mirrors 430 Cleaning lenses 377 Front bulbs 430 Indicator lamp 25 Rear bulbs 431 Replacing bulbs 430, 431, 433 Turning off Engine with KEYLESS-GO** 75 Turning off engine 75 Turning off the engine Warning sound 75 Two-way intercom* 287 Adjusting volume 46, 47, 48 Operating 287 Switching off 28, 29 Switching on 28, 29 Switching on/off 46, 47, 48 501 Index U Umbrella 268 Units Setting speedometer units 175 Setting temperature units 175 Unlock button SmartKey 108 SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** 112 Unlocking Central locking switch 27, 46, 47, 48 Driver’s door in an emergency 423 Fuel filler flap 352 In an emergency 423 Individual settings 109, 114 Trunk in an emergency 424 Trunk lid with KEYLESS-GO** 111, 116 Trunk lid with SmartKey 111, 116 Vehicle in an emergency 302 With KEYLESS-GO** 53 Upgrade signals Tele Aid 301 Uphill driving Cruise control 234 Upshifting One-touch gearshifting 186 502 Useful features Ashtrays 272 Garage door opener 304 Storage compartments 258 Tele Aid 294 V Vanity mirror In the rear 257 In the sun visor 257 Opening/closing 257 Vehicle Individual settings 172, 174 Locking From the front 125 From the rear 125 Locking in an emergency 424 Lowering 439 Service batteries 441 Towing 447 Unlocking in an emergency 423 Vehicle batteries 441 Vehicle care 375 Carpet 380 Distronic** system sensor cover 378 Engine cleaning 377 Gear selector lever 380 Hard plastic trim items 380 Headlamps 377 Instrument cluster 380 Leather upholstery 381 Light alloy wheels 379 Ornamental moldings 377 Paintwork 376 Parktronic system sensor 378 Plastic and rubber parts 381 Power-wash 376 Refrigerator** 376 Seat belts 381 Steering wheel 380 Tail lamps 377 Tar stains 376 Tumbler holder 380 Turn signals 377 Vehicle washing 377 Window cleaning 379 Wiper blades 378 Wood trims 381 Vehicle level 248 Changing 249 Setting 249 Automatic 249 Manual 249 Vehicle level control system Airmatic DC 247 Vehicle lighting Checking 354 Index Vehicle status message memory 171 Calling up 171 Displaying 171 Vehicle tool kit 422 Alignment bolt 422 Fuse chart 422 Fuse extractor 422 Hex-socket wrench 422 Open-end wrench 422 Screwdriver 422 Spare fuses 422 Universal pliers 422 Wheel wrench 422 Vehicle washing 377 Video monitor 33, 35, 37 VIN (Vehicle Identification Number) 476 Voice control system 476 W Warning indicator Parktronic 253 Warning lamp ABS/ESP 384 Warning lamps see Lamps, indicator and warning Warning sounds Distance warning function** 243 Distronic** 238 Exterior lamps 144 Parktronic 255 Turning off the engine 75 Warranty coverage 455 Washer button Headlamps 23, 192 Washing the vehicle 375 Wear pattern (tires) 370 Weights 463 Wheel change Tightening torque 440 Wheel offset 460 Wheels Tires and wheels 363 Window curtain airbag 84 Windows see Side windows Windshield Infrared reflecting 308 Refilling washer fluid 362 Replacing wiper blades 434 Washer fluid 362, 469 Windshield washer 354 Windshield washer fluid Message in display 415 Refilling 362, 469 Windshield wipers 23, 71 Fast wiper speed 71 Intermittent wiping 71, 72 Replacing wiper blades 434 Single wipe 72 Switching on 71 Wiping with windshield washer fluid 72 Winter driving 371 Snow chains 372 Tires 372 Transmission program mode 189 Winter driving instructions 348 Winter tires 372 Tire speed rating 371 Wiper blades Cleaning 378 Installing 435 Replacing 434 Wood trims Cleaning 381 Wrench, hex-socket (vehicle tool kit) 422 Wrench, open-end (vehicle tool kit) 422 Wrench, wheel (vehicle tool kit) 422 X Xenon headlamps Bi-xenon 430, 471 503 504